pRflMKLiN  Institute  Library 

FHIL/lbELFHI^ 

Class  ..C/./..     Book^^/  7.a     Accession  5^0  Z Jo.. 


AKxrcLE  V. — The  Library  shall  be  divided  into  two  classes  ;  the  first 
comprising  such  works  as,  from  their  rarity  or  value,  should  not  be  lent 
out,  all  unbound  periodicals,  and  such  text  books  as  ought  to  be  found  in  a 
library  of  reference,  except  when  required  by  Committees  of  the  Institute, 
or  by  Members  or  holders  of  second  class  stock,  who  have  obtained  the 
sanction  of  the  Committee.  The  second  class  shall  include  those  books 
intended  for  circulation. 

Article  VI. — The  Secretary  shall  have  authority  to  loan  to  Members  and 
to  holders  of  second  class  stock,  any  work  belonging  to  the  second  class, 
subject  to  the  following  regulations  : 

Section  1. — No  individual  shall  be  permitted  to  have  more  than  two  books 
out  at  one  time,  without  a  written  permission,  signed  by  at  least  two  mem- 
bers of  the  Library  Committee ;  nor  shall  a  book  be  kept  out  more  than 
TWO  WEEKS ;  but  if  no  one  has  applied  for  it,  the  former  borrower  may 
renew  the  loan.  Should  any  person  have  applied  for  it,  the  latter  shall 
have  the  preference. 

Section  2. — A  fine  of  ten  cents  per  week  shall  be  exacted  for  the 
detention  of  a  book  beyond  the  limited  time  ;  and  if  a  book  be  not  returned 
within  three  months,  it  shall  be  deemed  lost,  and  the  borrower  shall,  in 
addition  to  his  fines,  forfeit  its  value. 

Section  3. — Should  'any  book  be  returned  injured,  the  borrower  shall  pay 
for  the  injury,  or  replace  the  book,  as  the  Library  Committee  may  direct ; 
and  if  one  or  more  books,  belonging  to  a  set  or  sets,  be  lost,  the  borrower 
shall  replace  them  or  make  full  restitution. . 

Article  VII. — Any  person  removing  from  the  Hall,  without  permission 
from  the  proper  authorities,  any  book,  newspaper,  or  othe»  property  in 
charge  of  the  Library  Committee,  shall  be  reported  to  the  Committee,  who 
may  inflict  any  fine  not  exceeding  twenty-five  dollars. 

Article  VIII. — No  Member  or  holder  of  second  class  stock,  whose 
annual  contribution  for  the  current  year  shall  be  unpaid,  or  who  is  in 
arrears  for  fines,  shall  be  entitled  to  the  privileges  of  the  Library  or  Read- 
ing Room. 

Article  IX. — If  any  Member  or  holder  of  second  class  stock,  shall  refuse 
or  neglect  to  comply  with  the  foregoing  rules,  it  shall  be  the  duty  of  the 
Secretary  to  report  him  to  the  Committee  on  the  Library. 

Article  X. — Any  Member  or  holder  of  second  class  stock,  detected  in 
mutilating  the  newspapers,  pamphlets  or  books  belonging  to  the  Institute, 
shall  be  deprived  of  his  right  of  membership,  and  the  name  of  the  offender 
shall  be  made  public. 


PllACTICAL  WORKSHOP  COMPANION 


TIIST,    SHEET    lEOISr, 


COPPER  PLATE  WORKERS. 


COKTAININQ 

Rri-KS     FOR     DKSCRIBING     VARIOUS     KINDS    OF    PATTERNS    USED    BY    TIB, 

SHKET    IRON,    AND    COPPER    PLATE    WORKERS  J 

PRACTICAL    GEOMETRY: 

IlSensuration  of  Surfaces    and  Solids; 

TABLES      OF      TUB      AVUIGHTS      OP      METALS,      LEAD      PIPE,     ETC., 

TABLES    OF    AREAS    AND    CI  RC IISIFERENCES    OF    CIRCLES  ; 

JAPANS,     VARNISHES,     LACKERS,     CEMENTS,     COMPOSITIONS, 

ETC.,    ETC.,    ETC. 

By    LEROY    J.  BLINN, 

>  J,  ,        „  MASTER   Mi;';Mi.NIC. 


H  K  N  K  Y     CAR  K  Y    13  AI  R  D    &    CO., 

INDUSTRIAL,     PUBLISHEKS, 

810  Walnut  Street. 

1876. 


Entered   according  to   Act  of  Congress,   In  the  year  1864,    by 
LEROY    J.     BLINN, 
the   Clerk's  Oflice   of   the    District  Court  of  the  Uniled   States   fur  the 
District  of  Micliigan. 


CONTENTS. 


RULES    FOR    DESCRIBING    PATTERNS. 

An  Envelope  for  a  Cone 3 

A  Frustrum  of  a  Cone 4 

A  Can  top  or  Deck  flange 5 

A  Pattern  for,  or  an  Envelope  for,  a  Frustrum  of  a  Cone.  6 

A  Tapering  Oval  Article  to  be  in  four  Sections 7 

A  Tapering  Oval  Article  to  be  in  two  Sections 12.  13 

A  Tapering  Oval  Article 16 

A  Tapering  Oval  or  Oblong  Article,  the  sides  to  be 
Straight,  with  Quarter  Circle  corners,  to  be  in  two 

Sections 19 

A  Tapering  Oval  or  Oblong  Article,  the  sides  to  be 
Straight,  one  end  to  be  a  Semicircle,  the  other  end  to 
be  Straight,  with  Quarter  Circle  corners,  to  be  in  two 

Sections „ 21 

A  Tapering  Oval  or  Oblong  Article,  the  sides  to  be 

Straight,  with  Semicircle  ends,  to  be  in  two  Sections..  23 

Covering  of  Circular  Roofs 25 

Two  different  Principles 25 

To  cover  a  Dome  by  the  first  Method 26 

To  cover  a  Dome  by  the  second  Method 27 

To  ascertain  the  Outline  of  a  Course  of  Covering  to  a 

Dome,  without  reference  to  a  Section  of  the  Dome. . .  28 

To  describe  a  Pattern  for  a  Tapering  Square  Article. ...  29 

(iii) 


■.■■.-> 


j»MA-^: 


IV  CONTENTS. 

A  Square  Tapering  Article  to  be  in  two  Sections 30 

A  Tapering  Article,  the  Base  to  be  Square,  and  the  Tof 

a  Circle,  in  two  Sections 31 

A  Tapering  Article,  the  Base  to  be  a  Rectangle,  and  the 

Top  Square,  in  two  Sections 32 

A  Tapering  Article,  the  Base  to  be  a  Rectangle,  and  the 

Top  a  Circle,  in  two  Sections 34 

A  Tapering  Article,  the  Top  and  Base  to  be  a  Rectangle, 

in  two  Sections 36 

Tapering  Octagon  Top  or  Cover 38 

A  Miter  Joint  at  Right  Angles  for  a  Semicircle  Gutter .  40 

A  Miter  Joint  at  any  Angle  for  a  Semicircle  Gutter 4i 

A  Miter  Joint  for  an  0  G  Gutter  at  Right  Angles 42 

A  Miter  Joint  for  an  0  G  Cornice  at  Right  Angles ;  also 

an  Offset 44 

An  Octagon  0  G  Lamp  Top  or  Cover 46 

A  T  Pipe  at  Right  Angles 48 

A  T  Pipe  at  any  Angle 50 

A  T   Pipe,  the   Collar  to   be   smaller   than  the  Main 

Pipe 52,  54 

A  T  Pipe  at  any  Angle,  the  Collar  to  set  on  one  side  of 

the  Main  Pipe 5*) 

A  Pipe  to  fit  a  flat  Surface  at  any  Angle,  as  the  Side  of 

a  Roof  of  a  Building 58 

A  Pipe  to  fit  two  flat  Surfaces,  as  the  Roof  of  a  Build- 
ing    60 

An  Elbow  at  Right  Angles 62 

An  Elbow  Pattern  at  any  Angle 64 

An  Elbow  in  three  Sections 66 

An  Elbow  in  four  Sections 68 

An  Elbow  in  five  Sections 70 

A  Tapering  Elbow 72 

An  Oval  Boiler  Cover 75 

A  Flange  for  a  Pipe  that  goes  on  the  Roof  of  a  Building.  76 

Octagon  or  Square  Top  or  Cover 78 

Steamer  Cover 79 

An  Ellipse  or  Oval,  having  two  Diameters  given 80 


CONTENTS.  '    ■  '   I    Lif  j 

Arv  Ellipse  with  the  Rule  and  Compasses,  the  Trahs-^^e" 
and    Conjugate  Diameters    being  given,   that   is   the 

Length  and  Width SI 

To  find  the  Centre  and  the  two  Arcs  of  an  Ellipse 82 

To  find  the  Radius  and  Versed  Sine  for  a  given  Frustrum 

of  a  Cone 815 

Practical  Geometry 84 

Decimal  Equivalents  to  Fractional  Parts  of  Lineal  Meas- 
urement        91 

Definitions  of  Arithmetical  Signs 92 

Mensuration  of  Surfaces 93 

Mensuration  of  Solids  and  Capacities  of  Bodies 102 

Tables  of  Weights  of  Iron,  Copper  and  Lead 106-110 

Tables  of  the  Circumferences  and  Areas  of  Circles..   111-119 
Sizes  and  Capacity  of  Tin-wai-e  in  form  of  Frustrum  of  a 
Cone,  such  as  Pans,  Dish  Kettles,  Pails,  Coffee  Pots, 
Wash  Bowls,  Dippers,  Measures,  Druggists'  and  Liquor 

Dealers'  Measures 120-121 

American  Lap  Weled  Iron  Boiler  Flues 122 

Table  of  Efi"ects  upon  Bodies  by  Heat 122 

Weight  of  Water 123 

ESects  produced  by  Water  in  an  Aeriform  State 123 

Practical  Properties  of  Water 124 

Effects  produced  by  Water  in  its  Natural  State 124 

Effects  of  Heat  at  certain  Temperatures 125 

Tempering 125 

Effects  produced  by  Air  in  its  Natural  and  in  a  Rarefied 

State 126 

Table  of  the  Expansion  of  Atmospheric  Air  by  Heat. . .   126 

Size,  Length,  Breadth  and  Weight  of  Tin  Plates 127 

Crystallized  Tin  Plate 127 

List  of  Calibre  and  Weights  of  Lead  Pipe 128 

Calibre  and  Weights  of  Fountains  or  Aqueauct  Pipes.. .   128 
To  Ascertain  the  Weights  of  Pipes  of  various  Metals, 

and  any  Diameter  required 129 

Weight  of  a  Square  Foot  of  Sheet  Iron,  Copper,  and 

Brass,  as  per  Birmingham  Wire  Gauge 129 

Recapitulation  of  Weights  of  Various  Substances 130 


Vi  CONTENTS, 

PRACTICAL    EECEIPTS. 

Japanning  and  Yarnishing 131-138 

Varnishes — Miscellaneous 138-155 

Lackers 155-157 

Cements 158-162 

Miscellaneous  Eeceipts 163-166 

Britannia 167-169 

Solders,  etc 169-173 

Strength  of  Materials 174-17h' 


A  CONE. 


To  describe  an  Envelop  for  a  Cone. 


Let  ABI  be  the  given  cone.  From  I  as  centre,  with  the  radius 
lA,  describe  the  arc  CD  ;  make  CD ;  equal  in  length  to.  the  cir- 
cumference of  AB  (which  can  be  found  by  a  reference  to  the 
table  of  the  Circumferences  of  Circles  ;)  draw  the  lines  CI  and 
DI ;  then  the  figure  GDI  will  be  that  of  the  required  surface 
of  the  cone. 

Edges    for   folding    or    lapping    to    be    allowed,  drawing  the 
lines  parallcd  to  CI  and  DI,  as  shown  by  the  dotted  lines. 


PRACTICAL   KULE8 


To  describe  a  Frustrum  of  a  Gone. 


Fig.    2. 


Let  AB  equal  diameter  of  large  end ;  FH  diameter  of  small 
end  ;  GK  altitude.  Produce  AF  and  BH  until  they  meet  at  E  ; 
with  E  as  centre,  and  the  radii  EF  and  EA,  describe  the  arcs  CD 
and  IJ  ;  set  off  CD  equal  to  that  portion  of  the  circumference  of 
AB  required  for  a  pattern ;  draw  the  lines  CI  and  DJ,  cutting  the 
centre  at  E. 

Edges  for  folding  or  lapping  to  be  allowed,  drawing  the  lines 
parallel  to  CI  and  DJ,  as  shown  by  the  dotted  lines. 


Obs.     The  term  altitude  denotes  perpendicular  height;   as  from 
G  to  K  in  Fig.  2. 


FOK   DESCRIBING   PATTERNS. 


CAN  TOP  OR  DECK  FLANGE. 


To  describe  a  Can  Top  or  Deck  Flange. 


Pig.    3. 


Let  AB  equal  diameter  of  can,  or  base  of  a  flange ;  CD  di- 
ameter of  opening  in  the  top ;  FG  altitude.  Produce  AC  and 
UD  until  tbey  meet  at  E ;  with  E  as  centre,  and  the  radii  ED 
and  EB,  describe  the  curves  IJ  and  HK ;  set  off  IJ  equal  to  the 
circumference  of  the  base  AB;  draw  the  lines  IE  and  JK,  cutting 
the  centre  at  E. 

Edges  to  be  allowed. 


6  ,-',  \,\ -^  ■"'  t-RACTICAL   EULES 


FRUSTRUM    OF   A    CONE. 


To  describe  a  JPatternfor,  or  an  Envelop  for  a  Frus- 
trum  of  a  Gone- 

Fig.    4. 


Describe  the  right  angle  ABE ;  make  BD  the  altitude ;  draw 
the  line  CD  at  right  angle  to  BE ;  make  AB  equal  one-half  the 
diameter  of  the  large  end,  CD  one-half  the  diameter  of  the  small 
end ;  draw  a  line  cutting  the  points  A  and  C,  and  the  line  BE 
with  E  as  a  centre  and  the  radius  EC  and  EA  describe  the  arcs 
FG  and  HI ;  set  off  FG  equal  to  that  portion  of  the  circumfer- 
ence of  the  smallest  end  required  for  a  pattern,  draw  the  lines 
DF  and  IG,  cutting  the  centre  at  E. 

Edges  for  folding  or  laping  to  be  allowed  drawing  the  lines 
parallel  to  HF  and  IG. 

When  the  work  is  to  be  riveted,  punch  the  holes  for  the  rivets 
on  the  lines  HF  and  IG. 

When  the  work  is  to  be  wired,  or  a  flange  laid  off,  it  must  be 
allowed  as  shown  by  the  dotted  lines  over  the  arc  HL 


FOB   DESCKIliING   PA-T^fill^  ^       '^/^I^X'' 


OVAL. 


7b  describe  a  Pattern  for  a  Tapering  Oval  artu  h, 
to  he  in  four  Sections. 

Describe  the  bottom,  the  length  and  breadth  required  as  in  fig. 
6,  describe  the  sides  as  in  fig.  6  and  "7. 

Describe  the  right  angle  ABC,  fig.  6 ;  make  BF  the  altitude, 
draw  the  line  DF  at  right  angle  to  BC  ;  make  DF  equal  to  AB  in 
fig.  5  ;  make  AB  equal  to  DF  and  the  taper  required  on  a  side, 
draw  a  line  cutting  the  points  A  and  D,  and  the  line  BC. 

On  any  right  line,  as  AB  in  fig.  7,  with  the  radii  CD  and  CA, 
describe  the  arcs  EF  and  CD,  set  off  EF  equal  to  EBF  in  fig.  5  ; 
draw  the  lines  CE  and  DF,  cutting  the  centre  at  B. 

Edges  to  be  allowed. 

Fig.  6,  make  EF  equal  to  CD  in  fig.  5  ;  make  GB  equal  to  EF, 
and  the  taper  required  on  a  side,  draw  a  line  cutting  the  points  0 
and  E,  and  the  line  BC. 

On  any  right  line,  as  AB  in  fig.  7,  with  the  radii  HE  and  IIG, 
describe  the  arcs  IK  and  GH;  set  off  IK  equal  to  FDG  in  fig.  5, 
draw  the  lines  GI  and  HK,  cutting  the  centre  at  L 

Edges  to  be  allowed. 

The  taper  must  be  Cfjual  on  aU  sidei. 


rPwVf:TICAL    UULCS 


Fig.    6. 


FUll   DESCiaiilNG    i'ATTKliXS. 


Pig.    7. 


10 


PKACTICAL   RULES 


Fig.     9. 


FOR  DESCRIBING  PATTERNS. 


11 


12  rnAc'ncAL  eules 


OVAL. 


To  describe  a  Pattern  for  a  Taperinrj  Oval  artidf,^ 
to  he  in  two  Sections. 

Describe  the  bottom,  the  length  and  breadth  required  as  in  fig, 
8,  then  describe  the  body  as  in  fig.  9  and  10. 

Describe  the  right  angle  ABO,  fig.  9 ;  make  BE  the  altitude, 
draw  the  line  DE  at  right  angle  to  BO  ;  make  DE  equal  to  AB  in 
fig.  8  ;  make  AB  equal  to  DE  and  the  taper  required  on  a  side, 
draw  a  line  cutting  the  points  A  and  D,  and  the  line  BO. 

On  any  right  line,  as  AB  in  fig.  10,  with  the  radius  CD  and  CA, 
describe  the  arcs  EF  and  CD,  set  off  EF  equal  to  FBE  in  fig.  8  ; 
draw  the  lines  CE  and  DF,  cutting  the  centre  at  B. 

Fig.  9,  make  GE  equal  to  CD  in  fig.  8  ;  make  FB  equal  to  GE, 
and  the  taper  required  on  a  side,  draw  a  line  cutting  the  points  F 
and  G,  and  the  line  BC,  with  the  nidius  EG,  and  in  fig.  10,  E  and 
F  as  centres,  cut  the  lines  CB  and  DB,  as  at  L  and  M,  with  L  and 
M  as  centres  describe  the  arcs  FK  and  EH ;  also,  the  arcs  DI  and 
CG  ;  set  off  FK  and  EH,  equal  to  ED  in  fig.  8  ;  draw  the  lines 
IK  and  GH,  cutting  the  centres  at  M  and  L. 

Edges  to  be  allowed. 

The  taper  must  be  equal  on  all  sliea. 


F0«   DESCRIBING   PATTERNS.  18 

OVAL 


To  describe  a  Pattern  for  a  Tapering  Oval  article^ 

to  he  in  two  Sections. 

Describe  the  bottom,  the  length  and  breadth  required  as  in  fig. 
il,  then  describe  the  body  as  in  figs.  12  and  13  ;  describe  the  right 
angle  ABC,  fig.  12;  make  BE  the  altitude,  draw  the  line  DE  at 
right  angle  to  BC  ;  make  DE  equal  to  FC  in  fig.  11  ;  make  AB 
equal  to  DE  and  the  taper  required  on  a  side,  draw  a  line  cutting 
the   points  A  and  D,   and  the  line  BC. 

On  any  right  line,  as  AB  in  fig.  13,  with  the  radius  CD  and  CA, 
describe  the  arcs  CD  and  EF,  set  off  CD  equal  to  CD  in  fig.  11  ; 
draw  the  lines  EC  and  FD,  cutting  the  centre  at  B. 

Fig.  12,  make  FE  equal  to  AC  in  fig.  11  ;  make  GB  equal  to  FE, 
«\nd  the  taper  required  on  a  side,  draw  a  line  cutting  the  points  G 
»^nd  F,  and  the  line  BC,  with  the  radius  JF,  and  in  fig.  13,  D  as 
a,  centre,  cut  the  line  FB,  as  at  K,  with  K  as  a  centre  describe  the 
arc  DII;  also,  the  arc  FG  ;  set  off  DH  equal  to  BC  in  fig.  11  ; 
draw  the  line  GH,  cutting  the  centre  at  K.  Fig.  12,  make  HE 
equal  to  GE  in  fig.  11  ;  make  IB  equal  to  HE,  and  the  taper  re- 
quired on  a  side,  draw  a  line  cutting  the  points  I  and  H,  and  the 
line  BC  with  the  radius  KS,  and  in  fig.  13,  C  as  a  centre,  cut  the 
iiuc  EB,  as  at  L,  with  L  as  a  centre,  describe  the  arc  IC  ;  also,  the 
arc  JE  ;  set  off  IC  equal  to  DE,  in  fig.  11  ;  draw  the  line  JI,  out-' 
ting  the  centre  at  L. 

Edges  to  be  allowed. 

The  taper  must  be  equal  on  all  sidea^ 


14 


PRACTiOAL   KULES 

Pin.    12. 


FOR   DESCKIBING   PATTEKXS. 


15 


T] 

s- 

13. 

_. — ■ 

K 

F 

^ 

i 

^^■'^ 

\ 

1 

1 

-  \ 

\ 

_ _L- 

d| 

V 

1 

PRA,CTICAL   EULES 

f^^[.  OVAL. 

%  ^^     ' 

To  describe  a  Pattern  for  a  Tapering  Oval  article. 

Describe  the  bottom,  the  length  and  breadth  required  as  in  fig. 
14;  describe  the  body  as  in  figs.  15  and  16;  describe  the  right 
angle  ABC,  fig.  15;  make  BE  the  altitude,  draw  the  line  DE  at 
right  angle  to  BC  ;  make  FE  equal  to  HG  in  fig.  14  ;  make  GB 
equal  to  FE  and  the  taper  required  on  a  side,  draw  a  line  cutting 
the  points  G  and  F,  and  the  line  BC. 

On  any  right  line,  as  AB  in  fig.  16,  with  the  radius  HF  and  HG, 
describe  the  arcs  CD  and  EF,  set  off  CD  equal  to  IGF  in  fig.  14 ; 
draw  the  lines  EC  and  FG,  cutting  the  centre  at  G. 

Fig.  15,  make  DE  equal  to  AB  in  fig.  14  ;  make  AB  equal  to  DE, 
and  the  taper  required  on  a  side,  draw  a  line  cutting  the  points  A 
and  D,  and  the  line  BC,  with  the  radius  CD,  and  in  fig.  16,  with 
I  and  H  as  centres,  cut  the  lines  GL  and  GM,  as  at  M  and  L,  with 
M  and  L  as  centres  ;  describe  the  arcs  HI  and  HI ;  also,  the  arc3 
JK  and  JK ;  set  off  HI  and  HI  equal  to  IB,  in  fig.  14  ;  draw  the 
lines  JH  and  KI,  cutting  the  centres  Lat  and  M.  Fig.  15,  make 
IE  equal  to  CD  in  fig.  14;  make  JB  equal  to  IE,  and  the  taper 
required  on  a  side,  draw  a  line  cutting  the  points  J  and  I,  and  the 
line  BC  with  the  radius  KI,  and  in  fig.  16,  0  and  N  as  centres, 
cut  the  lines  LB  and  MB,  as  at  R  and  S,  with  R  and  S  as  centres  ; 
describe  the  arcs  NO  and  NO  ;  also,  the  arcs  PQ  and  PQ  ;  set  off 
NO  and  NO  equal  to  BD  in  fig.  14  ;  draw  the  lines  QO  and  PN, 
cutting  the  centres  at  S  and  R. 

Edges  to  be  allowed. 

The  taper  must  be  equal  on  all  aides*  Tl-e  pattern  can  be  cut  in 
fti  Y  number  of  aectiona. 


J) 


L 


FOB  DESCRIBING  PATTERNS.  19 


OVAL. 


To  describe  a  Pattern  for  a  Tapering  Oval  or  Ob- 
long  article^  the  sides   to    be   Straight  witlt 
Quarter  Circle  corners,  to  be  in  tioo 
Sections. 

Describe  the  bottom,  the  length  and  breadth  required  as  in  fig. 
17;  the  body  as  in  figs.  18  and  19;  describe  the  right  angle 
ABC,  fig.  18;  make  BE  the  altitude,  draw  the  line  DE  at  right 
angle  to  BC  ;  make  DE  equal  to  EC  in  fig.  1*7 ;  make  AB  equal 
to  DE  and  the  taper  required  on  a  side,  draw  a  line  cutting  the 
points  A  and  D  and  the  line  BC. 

Fig.  19,  make  AD  and  BE  equal  to  AD  in  fig.  18 ;  makeAB 
equal  to  AB  in  fig.  1*7;  draw  the  lines  DM  and  EN,  fig.  18  with 
the  radii  CD,  and  in  fig.  19,  A  and  B  as  centres,  cut  the  lines  DM 
and  EN,  as  at  M  and  N,  with  M  and  N  as  centres ;  describe  the 
arcs  BC  and  AI ;  also,  the  arcs  EF  and  DH  ;  set  off  BC  and  AI 
equal  to  BC,  in  fig.  11 ;  draw  the  lines  HI  and  FC,  cutting  the 
centres  M  and  N.  Draw  the  lines  FG  and  CL  at  right  angle  te 
FN  ;  also,  the  line  KH  and  JI  at  right  angle  to  HM  ;  makeCL  and 
JI  equal  to  one-half  off  CD,  in  fig.  17,  draw  the  lines  KJ  and  GL 
at  right  angle  to  KH  and  FG. 

Edges  to  be  allowed. 

The  taper  to  be  equal  on  all  sides. 


20 


PRACTICAL   BULKS 


Pig.    17. 


f 

1- 

V 

- 

J 

YOR   DESCRIBING  PATTERNS.  21 


OVAL. 


To  describe  a  Pattern  for  a  Tapering  Oval  or  Ob' 
long  article^  the  sides  to  be  Straight,  one  end  to 
be  a  Semi-circle,  the  other  end  to  be  Straight  loith 
quarter  Circle  Corners,  to  be  in  Two  Sections. 

Describe  the  bottom,  the  length  and  breadth  required  as  in  fig. 
20  ;  the  body  as  in  figs.  21  and  22;  describe  the  right  angle  ABC, 
fig.  21 :  make  BG  the  altitude,  draw  the  line  DG  at  right  angle  to 
BC :  make  DG  equal  to  AF  in  fig  20;  make  AB  equal  to  DG  and 
the  taper  required  on  a  side,  draw  a  line  cutting  the  points  A  and 
D,  and  the  line  BG ;  make  FG  equal  to  GD  in  fig.  20  ;  make  EB 
equal  to  FG  and  the  taper  required  on  a  side  draw  'a,  line  cutting 
the  points  E  and  F  and  the  line  B  0. 

Fig.  22,  make  AC  and  BD  equal  to  DA  in  fig.  21 ;  make  CD  and 
AB  equal  to  BC  in  fig.  20 ;  draw  the  lines  CK  and  DL.  Fig.  21  ; 
with  the  radii  CD,  and  in  fig.  22 ;  A  as  a  centre,  cut  the  line  CK 
as  at  K  with  K  as  a  centre  ;  describe  the  arc  AI,  also,  the  arc  CJ  ; 
set  off  AI  equal  to  AB,  in  fig.  20,  draw  the  line  JI,  cutting  the 
centre  at  K. 

Fig.  21,  with  the  radii  HF,  and  in  fig.  22,  B  as  a  centre  cut  the 
line  DL,  as  at  L,  with  L  as  a  centre ;  describe  the  arc  BF,  also  the 
arc  DE  ;  set  ofFBF  equal  to  CD,  in  fig.  20 ;  draw  the  line  EF,  cut- 
ting the  centre  at  L ;  draw  the  lines  FG  and  EH  at  right  angle  to 
EL ;  make  FG,  equal  to  DE,  in  fig.  20 ;  draw  the  line  HG  at  right 
angle  to  EH. 

Edges  to  be  allowed. 

The  taper  to  1)8  equal  on  all  sides. 


22 


PRACTICAL   RULES 


Fig.    22. 


Pig. 20. 


FOIi  DESCRIBING    TaTTERNS.  23 


OVxVL. 


To  describe  a  Pattern  for  a  Taperinfj  Oval  or  Ob- 
long article,  the  sides  to  be  Straight,  with  Semi- 
circle ends,  to  be  in  Two  Sections. 

Describe  the  bottom,  the  length  and  breadth  required  as  in  fig. 
23,  the  body  as  in  figs.  24  and  25. 

Describe  the  right  angle  ABC,  fig.  24 :  make  BE  the  altitud-% 
draw  the  line  DE  at  right  angle  to  BO :  make  DG  equal  to  AB  iu 
fig  23 ;  make  AB  equal  to  DE  and  the  taper  required  on  a  side, 
draw  a  line  cutting  the  points  A  and  D,  and  the  line  BC,  fig.  25 ; 
make  AC  and  BD  equal  to  AD  in  fig.  24. 

Make  AB  and  CD  equal  to  DC  in  fig.  23;  draw  the  lines  CI 
and  DJ,  fig.  24 ;  with  the  radii  CD,  and  in  fig.  25 ;  A  and  B  as 
centres,  cut  the  lines  CI  and  DJ  as  at  I  and  J,  with  I  and  J  as  cen- 
tres; describe  the  arcs  AH  and  BF  ;  also,  the  arcs  CG  and  DE  ; 
set  oflf  An  and  BF  equal  to  CB,  in  fig.  23,  draw  the  lines  GH 
and  EF,  cutting  the  centre  at  I  and  J. 

Edges  to  be  allowed. 

The  taper  to  be  equal  on  all  sides. 

In  a  large  article  it  may  be  more  convenient  to  lay  out  the  End- 
pieces  to  fit  the  Semi-circles,  and  join  them  to  the  sides,  as  at  D 
and  C,  in  fig.  23. 


PKACTICAL   BULES 


Pig.    26. 


Fig. 23. 


FOli  DESCKIBING  PATTKRNS. 


COVERING  OF  CIRCULAR  ROOFS.  &c. 


Circular  Roofs  may  be  covered  upon  two  different  principles  : 

First  Method, 

Assume  the  vertical  section,  or  axis,  to  be  divided  into  a  num- 
ber of  equal  parts,  and  the  roof,  or  figure,  cut  by  planes  through 
the  points  of  division  parallel  to  the  base ;  and  then  consider  the 
portions  of  the  figure  as  so  many  frustrums  of  a  cone  ;  the  surface 
of  each  frustrum  can  then  be  determined  as  by  fig.  26,  page  26. 

Second  Method. 

Divide  the  circumference  of  the  base  into  a  number  of  equal 
parts,  and  assume  sections  to  be  made  perpendicular  through  these 
points  of  division  ;  then  estimate  the  surface  of  each  of  these  di- 
visions on  the  surface  of  the  figure. 


26 


PRAC'ilCAL   RULES 


To  Cover  a  Dome  by  the  First  Method. 


Let  ABC,  fig.  26,  be  the  section  of  a  dome.  Draw  the  axis 
DB  ;  produce  to  J  ;  divide  the  curve  of  one-half  the  figure  into 
equal  parts,  as  EFG  and  H,  the  width  of  these  divisions  being  th« 
width  required  by  that  of  the  metal  with  which  the  dome  is  to  be 
covered  ;  produce  AE,  EF,  FG,  GH,  and  HB,  severally  until  they 
intersect  the  axis  BD  ;  then  [for  example]  from  the  point  I,  with 
the  radii  IG  and  IF,  describe  the  curves  GM,  FN ;  then  set  ofi"  that 
portion  of  the  circumference  of  the  base  FL  required  for  a  pattern 
to  cover  the  course  FG. 

In  the  same  manner,  the  covering  for  the  other  portion  can  be 
found. 


FOR  DESCELBING  PATTEEIS^S. 


27 


To  Cover  a  Dome  by  the  Second  Method. 


\3 


- 

f 

-A 

B 

r^ 

— ~-  1 

^\ 

—^^^ 

_\^ 

C                                            I 

i                              A 

Let  ABC,  fig.  27,  be  the  section  of  a  dome  ;  then  the  length 
of  a  course  of  covering  is  obtained  as  follows:  The  length  of  the 
course  BF  is  equal  to  the  curve  AB,  and  EG  the  breadth  of  it; 
join  ED,  and  the  lines  1,  2,  3,  and  4,  intersected  thereby,  will  be 
the  half  breadth  (for  the  vertical  BD)  of  the  course  at  the  corres- 
ponding lines  on  BF,  through  which  points  a  line  can  be  drawn 
which  will  give  the  form  of  the  course  required. 


28 


PRACTICAL   RULES 


To  ascertain  the  Outlines  of  a  Ci/ arse  of  Gov ering 
to  a  Donie^  without  reference  \>i>  a  Section  of  Che 
Dome. 

Pig.    28. 


Let  AB  be  the  breadth  of  the  course.  Bisect  it  at  B  by  the 
perpendicular  CE  ;  make  BE  equal  to  the  length  of  the  arc  from 
the  base  of  the  dome  to  the  top  of  it  (which  may  be  found  either 
by  measurement  or  calculation);  divide  the  semi-circle  AOD  into 
any  number  of  equal  parts,  and  draw  the  lines  parallel  to  BD  ; 
divide  BE  into  the  same  number  of  equal  parts,  and  draw  liuea 
parallel  to  AD ;  mark  ordinates  on  each  side  of  BE  ;  as  1,  2,  3, 
and  4  equal  to  the  lines  of  BCD,  and  a  curve  drawn  through  their 
terminations  1,  2,  3,  and  4  on  both  sides  will  give  the  outline  of 
the  course. 


FOR   DESCRIBING   PATTERNS. 


29 


To  describe  a  Pattern  for  a  Tapering  Square  Article. 
rig.    29. 


Erect  the  perpendicular  line  GE  ;  draw  the  line  AB  at  ni^.<it 
angle  to  GE  ;  make  EF  equal  to  the  Slant  height,  and  draw  the 
line  CD  parallel  to  AB  ;  make  AB  equal  in  length  to  one  side  of 
the  base ;  make  CD  equal  in  length  to  one  side  of  the  top  or 
smallest  end,  draw  the  lines  AG  and  BG,  cutting  the  points  AC 
and  BD,  G  as  a  centre  with  thQ  radii  GC  and  GA.  Describe  the 
arcs  KM  and  JI;  set  off  on  the  arc  JI,  JA,  BH,  and  HI  eqi'ai  in 
length  to  AB,  and  draw  the  lines  JG,  HG,  and  IG,  also,  thf  Mnoa 
JA,  BH,  HI,  and  KG,  DL,  LM. 

Edges  to  be  allowed. 


30 


PRACTICAL   KULES 


SQUARE. 


'  )  describe  a  Pattern  for  a  Square  Tapering  article, 
to  be  in  Two  Sections. 


Erect  the  perpendicular  line  EF  equal  to  the  Slant  height  of 
the  articles ;  draw  the  line  AB  at  right  angle  to  EF ;  draw  the 
line  CD  parallel  to  AB  ;  make  AB  equal  in  length  to  one  side  of 
the  base  ;  malie  CD  equal  in  length  to  one  side  of  the  top  or 
smallest  end ;  draw  the  lines  AG  and  BD,  0  and  D  as  centres, 
with  a  radii  equal  to  one-half  the  difference  of  the  two  ends,  as 
from  B  to  G  ;  describe  the  arcs  I  and  11 ;  draw  the  right  angle 
lines  lAJ  and  HBK ;  set  off  JA  and  KB  equal  to  FB,  and  draw 
the  lines  JL  and  KM  at  right  angles  to  JA  and  KB;  also,  the 
lines  LC  and  MD  at  right  angles  to  LJ  and  MK. 

Edges  to  be  allowed. 


FOR  DESCRIBING   PATTERNS. 


81 


SQUARE  BASE  WITH  A  CIRCULAR  TOP. 


To  describe  a  Pattern  for  Tapering  article^  the  Base 
to  he  Square^  and  the  Top  a  Circle  to  be  in  two 
Sections. 

Pig.    31. 


Erect  the  perpendicular  line  NF  ;  draw  the  line  AB  at  right 
angle  to  NF  ;  make  EF  equal  to  the  Slant  height,  and  draw  the 
line  CD  parallel  to  AB ;  make  a  AB  equal  in  length  to  one  side 
of  the  base ;  make  CD  equal  in  length  to  one-fourth  the  circum- 
ference of  the  top,  and  draw  the  lines  AC  and  BD,  C  and  D  as 
centres,  with  a  radii  equal  to  one-half  the  difference  of  the  two 
ends ;  describe  the  arcs  I  and  H,  draw  the  right  angle  lines  lAJ 
and  HBK ;  set  off  JA  and  KB  equal  to  FB,  and  draw  the  lines  JN 
and  KN  at  right  angles  to  JA  and  KB,  N  as  a  centre  with  the 
radii  NE  describe  the  arc  LEM. 

Edges  to  be  allowed. 


32  PRACTICAL  EULES 


RECTANGLE  BASE  WITH  A  SQUARE  TOP. 


To  describe  a  Pattern  for  a  Tapering  article,  the 
Base  to  he  a  Bectangle,  and  the  Top  Square,  to  be 
in  Two  Sections. 

Erect  the  perpendicular  line  KG,  fig.  82  ;  draw  the  Hue  AB  at 
right  angle  to  KG ;  make  KG  equal  to  the  Slant  hsight,  and  draw 
the  line  DE  parallel  to  AB ;  make  AB  equal  in  length  to  the  longest 
side  of  the  base ;  make  DE  equal  in  length  to  one  side  of  the  top  ; 
draw  the  lines  AD  and  BE  ;  make  CG  equal  to  one-half  the  short- 
est side  of  the  base,  D  and  E  as  centres,  with  a  radii  equal  to  one- 
half  the  diflference  of  the  top  and  the  shortest  side  of  the  base, 
as  from  G  to  F ;  describe  the  arcs  J  and  I ;  draw  the  right  angle 
lines  JAL  and  IBM  ;  set  off  AL  and  BM  equal  in  length  to  CG, 
and  draw  the  lines  MN  and  LO  at  right  angle  to  BM  and  LA, 
4lso,  the  lines  NE  and  OD  at  right  angle  to  NM  and  OL. 

Edges  to  be  allowed, 


FOE   DESCRIBING   PATTERNS. 


33 


Fig.    32. 


J4  PRACTICAL   EULES 


RECTANGLE   BASE  WITH  A   CIRCULAIl 
TOP. 


To  describe  a  Pattern  for  a  Tapering  Article,  the 
Mase  to  he  a  Rectangle^  and  the  Top  a  Circle,  to  he 
in  T'wo  Sections. 

Erect  the  perpendicular  line  DO,  fig  33  ;  draw  the  line  AB  at 
right  angle  to  DC;  make  CE  equal  to  the  Slant  height,  and  draw 
the  line  FG  parallel  to  AB ;  make  AB  equal  in  length  to  the 
longest  side  of  the  base;  make  FG  equal  in  length  to  one- 
fourth  the  circumference  of  the  top ;  draw  the  lines  AF  and 
BG  ;  make  CK  equal  to  one-half  the  shortest  side  of  the  base  ; 
erect  the  line  LG  parallel  to  EC,  F  and  G  as  centres,  with  the 
radii  KL.  Describe  the  arcs  I  and  H ;  draw  the  right  angle  lines 
HBN  and  lAM ;  set  off  BN  and  AM  equal  in  length  to  CK,  and 
draw  the  lines  MD  and  ND  at  right  angles  to  MA  and  NB,  D  as 
a  centre  with  the  radii  DE,   describe  the  arc  OED. 

Edges  to  be  allowed. 


FOR    DESCRIBING    rATTKBjTS,-  r-  ,  36' \ 


'•  M 


Pig.    33. 


36  PRACTICAL   RULES. 


KEOTANGLB. 


To  describe  a  Pattern  for  a  Tapering  Article,  the 
Top  and  Base  to  he  a  Rectangle,  to  he  in  Two 
Sections. 

Erect  the  perpendicular  line  FE,  fig.  34  ;  draw  the  line  AB  at 
right  angle  to  FE ;  make  FE  equal  to  the  slant  height  of  the 
article,  and  draw  the  line  CD  parallel  to  AB ;  make  AB  equal  in 
length  to  the  longest  side  of  the  base ;  make  CD  equal  in  length 
to  the  longest  side  of  the  top ;  draw  the  lines  AC  and  BD  ;  make 
GH  equal  in  length  to  the  shortest  side  of  the  base ;  make  JI  equal 
in  length  to  the  shortest  side  of  the  top ;  draw  the  line  HI,  also, 
erect  the  line  KI  parallel  to  FE,  C  and  D  as  centres,  with  the  radii 
HK ;  desci'ibe  the  arcs  M  and  L ;  draw  the  right  angle  lines  LBO, 
and  MAN ;  set  off  BO  and  AN  equal  in  length  to  EH,  and  draw 
the  lines  OR  and  NP  at  right  angles  to  OB  and  NA;  also,  the 
lines  RD  and  PC  at  right  angles  to  RO  and  IN. 

Edges  to  be  allowed. 


FOB  DESCRIBING  PATTEENS. 


37 


38  PKACTICAL  EULES 


OCTAGON. 


To  describe  a  Pattern  for  Tapering  Octagon  2'op  or 
Cover. 

Erect  the  perpendicular  line  GE,  fig.  35  ;  draw  the  line  AB  at 
right  angle  to  GE  ;  make  FE  equal  to  the  Slant  height  of  the  ar- 
ticle, and  draw  the  line  CD  parallel  to  AB ;  make  AB  equal  La 
length  to  one  of  the  longest  sides  of  the  base ;  make  CD  equal 
in  length  to  one  of  the  longest  sides  of  the  top,  and  draw  the 
lines  AG  and  EG,  cutting  the  points  AC  and  BD,  G  as  a  centre, 
with  the  radii  GC  and  GA  describe  the  arcs  SO  and  PN  ;  set  off 
QR,  H.T  and  LN  equal  to  AB  ;  set  off  PQ,  KA,  BII  and  JL  equal 
in  length  to  one  of  the  shortest  sides  of  the  base  ;  draw  the  lines 
PS,  QT,  RTJ,  &c.,  cutting  the  centre  at  G.  draw  the  lii  es  PQ, 
QR,  ST,  TU,  &c. 

Edges  to  be  allowed. 


FOB   DESCEIBING    PATTERNS. 


80 


Fig.    35. 


10 


PEACTICAL  ETJLES 


GUTTER  MITER  JOINTS. 


To  describe  a  Pattern  for  a  Miter  Joint  at  Hight 
angles  for  a  /Semicircle  Gutter. 


Pig.    37. 


D 


A10    9     8T     65432     IB 

Let  the  semi-circle  ACB,  fig.  36,  be  the  breadth  and  depth  of  the 
gutter ;  draw  the  line  AB ;  draw  the  lines  AF  and  BE  at  right  angle 
to  AB  ;  draw  the  line  DE  parallel  to  AB  ;  make  DF  equal  to  AB, 
and  draw  the  line  FE;  devide  the  semicircle  into  any  number  of 
equal  partsfrom  the  points;  draw  lines  parallel  to  AF  as  1, 2,  3,  &c., 
then  set  off  the  line  AB,  fig.  37,  equal  in  length  to  the  semicircle 
ACB;  erect  the  lines  BD  and  AC  at  right  angle  to  AB ;  set  off  on 
on  the  line  AB,  fig.  87,  the  same  number  of  equal  distances  as  '.q 
the  semicircle  from  the  points;  draw  lines  parallel  to  BD,  as  1,  2,  3, 
&c.,  make  BD  equal  in  length  to  AF,  fig.  36  ;  and  AC  equal  in 
length  to  BE ;  also,  each  of  the  parallel  lines  bearing  the  same 
figure  as  1,  2,  3,  &c.,  then  a  line  traced  through  the  points  will 
form  the  pattern  required. 


FOB  DESCRIBING   PATTERNS. 


41 


MITER  JOINTS. 


To   describe  a  Pattern  for  a  Miter  Joint  at  any 
Angle  for  a  Semi-circle  Gutter. 


Pig.    39, 


-> 


Let  ABC,  fig.  S8,  be  the  breadth  and  depth  of  the  gutter ; 
draw  the  line  AC  ;  draw  the  lines  EG  and  DH  ;  the  angle  required 
draw  the  line  ED  cutting  the  points  E  and  D  ;  divide  the  semi- 
circle into  any  number  of  equal  parts,  from  the  points  draw  lines 
parallel  to  AE,  as  1,  2,  3,  &c.  Then  set  off  the  line  AB,  fig.  39, 
equal  in  length  to  the  semicircle  ABC  ;  erect  the  lines  AC  and 
BD  at  right  angle  to  AB ;  set  off  on  the  line  AB,  the  same  number 
of  equal  distances  as  in  the  semi-circle  ABC  ;  from  the  points 
draw  lines  parallel  to  BD,  as  1,  2,  3,  &c.  Make  BD  equal  to  EA, 
and  AC  equal  to  DC  ;  also,  each  of  the  parallel  lines  bearing  the 
same  figures  as  1,  2,  3,  &c.,  then  a  line  traced  through  the  points 
will  form  the  pattern. 


42  PRACTICAL   EULES 


MITER  JOINTS. 


To  desenbe  a  Pattern  for  a  Miter  Joint  for  an  0  Q 
Gutter  at  Bight  Angles. 

Let  ABGD,  fig.  40,  be  the  given  gutter ;  divide  the  curved 
line  BC  into  any  number  of  equal  parts  from  the  points ;  draw 
lines  parallel. to  AD,  as  1,  2,  3,  &c. ;  then  set  off  tho  right  angle 
Hue  ABE,  fig.  41 ;  make  BF  equal  to  AB,  and  draw  tho  line  CF 
parallel  to  AB;  make  AB  and  CF  equal  in  length  to  AD,  and 
draw  the  line  AC  ;  make  FD,  equal  in  length  to  the  curved 
line  BC  ;  set  off  on  the  lino  FD  the  same  number  of  equal  dis- 
tances, as  in  the  curved  line  BC  ;  from  tho  points  draw  lines  paral- 
lel to  CF,  as  1,  2,  3,  &c.;  make  CF  equal  to  BE,  also,  eacK  of  tho 
parallel  lines  bearing  the  same  figures,  as  1,  2,  3,  &c.  ;  make  DE 
equel  to  CD,  then  a  line  traced  through  the  points  will  form  the 
pattern. 


FOR    DESCRIBING    PATTERNS. 


43 


4>        C 


44  PRACTICAL   RULES 


COENICE. 


To  describe  a  Pattern  for  a  Miter  Joint  for  an  0  G 
Cornice  at  Right  angles^  also  an  Offset. 

Describe  the  right  angle  line  AFE,  fig.  42  ;  let  ABODE  be  the 
given  corDiee ;  divide  the  curved  line  BOH  into  any  number  of 
equal  parts ;  from  the  points  draw  lines  parallel  to  AF,  as  1,  2, 
3,  &c.  Then  set  off  the  right  angle  ABCF,  fig.  43 ;  make  CD 
equal  to  AB  ;  make  DG  equal  in  length  to  the  curved  line  BCH ; 
make  GE  equal  to  HD ;  make  EF  equal  to  DE  ;  set  off  on  the 
line  DG  the  same  number  of  equal  distances  as  in  the  curved  line 
BCH  ;  from  the  points  draw  lines  parallel  to  BC,  as  I,  2,  3,  K, 
H,  &c.  Make  BC  and  ID  equal  to  AF  ;  also,  each  of  the  parallel 
lines  bearing  the  same  figures  as  2,  3,  4,  &c. ;  make  KG  and  H*?. 
equal  to  DE ;  then  a  line  traced  through  tli£  points  B,  I,  2,  3,  4, 
^c.  ;  KHF  will  form  the  pattern  for  a  Miter  Joint. 

When  there  is  to  be  an  offset  or  projection  at  right  angles,  let 
AB,  fig.  44,  be  the  depth  of  the  offset  or  projection;  make  each 
of  the  parallel  lines  the  same  in  length  as  AB,  LI,  22,  33,  &c., 
then  a  line  traced  through  the  points  will  form  the  pattern. 


FOB  DESCKIBING   PATTERNS. 


45 


^    CQ    <0    ^      t^     <Q     N.    CO    ON  o  m 


bJD 


Lf»0 


J><^ 


CO 


46  PRACTICAL  EULES 


OCTAGON. 


To  describe  a  Pattern  for  an   Octagon  0  G  Lamp 
Top  or   Cover. 

Describe  a  circle  that  will  cut  the  required  Octagon,  fig.  45  ; 
draw  a  line  that  will  cut  the  centre  of  two  sections,  as  AI ;  erect  the 
perpendicular  line  HF ;  let  ABCDEFJ  be  the  given  top  or  cover  ; 
divide  the  curved  lines  BC  and  EF  into  any  number  of  equal 
partrf  ;  from  the  points  draw  lines  parallel  to  FH,  as  1,  2,  3,  &c., 
H,  1,  2,  8,  &c. 

Set  off  the  line  AF,  fig.  46 ;  draw  the  line  GE  at  right  angle  to 
AF  ;  make  AB  equal  to  AB  in  fig.  45  ;  make  BC  equal  in  length 
to  the  curved  line  BC  ;  divide  BC  into  the  same  number  of  equal 
distances,  as  in  the  curved  line  BC  ;  from  the  points  draw  lines 
parallel  to  GE  ;  make  CD  equal  to  CD,  and  DH  equal  to  DE  ; 
make  HF  equal  to  the  curved  line  EF  ;  divide  HF  into  the  same 
number  of  equal  distances,  as  in  the  curved  line  EF;  from  the 
points  draw  lines  parallel  to  GE  ;  make  AGAE  and  BIBJ  equal  to 
GA  ;  also,  each  of  the  parallel  lines  bearing  the  same  figures  as 
1,  2,  8,  4,  6,  6,  7,  8,  9,  10,  10,  H,  1,  2,  8,  4,  5,  6;  then  a  line 
traced  through  the  points  will  form  the  pattern. 

A  Top  may  be  described  in  any  number  of  Sectiona  by  this 
Rule. 


FOR   DESCRIBLNG    PATTERNS. 
Fig.    45. 


47 


Pig.    46 


48  PRACTICAL  BULE8 


PIPES. 


To  describe  a  T  Pipe  at  Right  angles. 

Let  ABCD,  fig.  47,  be  the  length  and  diameter  of  the  T  ;  de- 
scribe the  semi-circle  CED ;  divide  the  semicircle  into  any  num- 
ber of  equal  parts ;  from  the  points  draw  lines  parallel  to  AC,  as 

I,  2,  3,  &c. ;  then  set  off  the  line  ABC,  fig.  48,  equal  in  length  to 
the  circumference  of  the  Pipe  AB ;  erect  the  lines  AD,  BE  and 
OF ;  set  off  on  each  side  of  BE  the  same  number  of  equal  dis- 
tances, as  in  the  semi-circle  CED  ;  from  the  points  draw  lines 
parallel  to  BE,  as  11,  22,  33,  &c.  ;  make  AD,  BE  and  CF  equal  to 
AC  ;  also,  each  of  the  parallel  lines,  bearing  the  same  numbers  aa 

II,  22,  33,  &c. ;  then  a  line  traced  through  the  points  will  form 
the  pattern  required. 

Edges  to  be  allowed  for  folding  or  riveting. 


FOB   DESCRIBING    PATTERNS. 


49 


00 

bi) 


— i< 


•IH 


Ul. 


60  PRACTICAL   KULES 


PIPES. 


To  describe  a  Pattern  for  a  T  Pipe  at  any  angle. 

Draw  the  line  AE,  fig.  49;  erect  the  line  AB,  the  angle  re* 
quired  ;  also,  the  line  ED  parallel  to  AB  ;  make  BD  equal  to  the 
diameter  of  the  Pipe;  describe  the  semicircle  BCD;  draw  the 
line  FG  parallel  to  BD  ;  divide  the  semicircle  into  any  number  of 
equal  parts  from  the  points;  draw  lines  parallel  to  AB,  as  1,  2, 
3,  &c. 

Set  oflF  the  line  ABC,  fig.  50,  equal  in  length  to  the  circumfer- 
ence of  the  Pipe ;  erect  the  lines  AE,  BD  and  CF  at  right  angles 
to  AC  ;  set  off  on  each  side  of  BD  the  same  number  of  equal  dis- 
tances, as  in  the  semicircle  BCD,  and  from  the  points  draw  lines 
parallel  to  BD,  as  11,  22,  33,  &c.  Make  BD  equal  to  AB,  and 
EA  and  CF  equal  to  ED  ;  also,  each  of  the  parallel  lines,  bearing 
the  same  figures  as  11,  22,  33,  &c.  Make  GI  and  HJ  equal  to 
GD;  also,  each  of  the  lines  bearing  the  same  figures  as  11,  11, 
22,  22,  &c. ;  thea  a  line  traced  through  the  points  will  form  the 
required  pattern. 

Edges  to  be  allowed 


FOE   DESCEIBING   PATTERNS. 


61 


Pig.    50. 


?.- 


A38765432  1    Q   [  Z  Z4   56   78  9c 


52 


PEACTICAL    EULES 


PIPES 


To  describe  a  Pattern  for  a  T  Pipe^  the  Collar  to  he 
Smaller  than  the  Main  Pipe. 


Pig.    51. 


AI2  3   4- 


6   7    &q|OS 


Let  the  circle  OH,  fig.  51,  equal  the  large  pipe,  AB,  CD,  the 
Branch  or  Collar ;  describe  the  semicircle  AEB  ;  divide  the  semi- 
circle into  any  number  of  equal  parts ;  from  the  points,  draw 
lines  parallel  to  AC,  as  1,  2,  3,  &c. 


FOB   DESCRIBING    PATTERNS. 


53 


Pig.    52. 


TC 


C9 
<M 

CQ 
to 

'*■ 
li» 

03 


Set  oflF  the  line  ABC,  fig.  52,  equal  in  length  to  the  circumfer- 
ence of  the  Collar  AB  ;  erect  the  perpendicular  lines  AD,  BE  and 
CF;  set  off  on  each  of  BE,  the  same  number  of  equal  distances  aa 
in  the  semicircle  ;  from  the  points  draw  lines  parallel  to  BE,  a3 
1,  1,  2,  2,  &c.  ;  make  AD,  BE  and  CF  equal  to  AC  and  BD ;  also, 
each  of  the  parallel  lines  bearing  the  same  figures  as  1,  1,  2,  "2, 
3,  3,  &c.,  then  a  line  traced  through  the  points  will  form  the  pav- 
tern. 


Edges  to  be  allowed. 


54 


PRACTICAL    RULES 


PIPES. 


To  describe  a  Pattern  for  a  T  Pipe  at  any  angle^  the 
Collar  to  be  Smaller  than  the  Jlahi  Pipe, 


Fig.    53, 


Lot  CE,  fig.  53,  be  the  diameter  of  the  collar,  and  AB  the  angle 
••cquired  ;  describe  the  semicircle  CDE  ;  make  CF  and  EII  of  equal 
length,  with  a  radii  equal  to  one-half  the  diameter  of  the  large 
pipe  ;  describe  the  arc  FIT  ;  divide  the  semicircle  into  any  num- 
ber of  equal  parts  ;  from  the  points  draw  lines  parallel  to  AC,  aa 
1,  2,  &c.  There  must  be  an  odd  number  of  lines,  as  in  the  dia- 
gram, so  that  one  of  the  lines  run  through  the  centre  of  the  semi- 
circle. 


FOR    DESCRIBING    PATTERNS. 


55 


Pig.    54. 


u- 

1 

'vo 

O 

1 

\n 

o 

/  ^ 

•ir 

/ 

tvj 

tt 

/         ''^ 

/  -  - 

■y     ^ 

»r> 

/  ,.- 

/    - 

c» 

/  - 

.^ 

■s^ 

fa 

i    ^ 

'\  ■  - 

\    c 

\_1- 

A       o 

.\       .- 

.     \           -c^ 

\    ^ 

<a 

\. 

^ 

\ 

\n 

.     _Jl 

vO 

' 

Q'- 

— 1 

'^ 

Set  off  the  line  ABC,  fig.  54,  equal  in  length  to  the  circumfer- 
ence of  the  collar,  CE  ;  erect  the  lines  AD,  BE  and  CF ;  set  off 
on  each  side  of  BE  the  same  number  of  equal  distances,  as  in  the 
semicircle,  and  from  the  points  draw  lines  parallel  to  BE,  as  11, 
22,  &c.  ;  make  BE  equal  to  AC  in  fig.  53;  make  AD  and  CF 
equal  to  BE  ;  also,  each  of  the  parallel  lines  bearing  the  same 
figures;  make  GI  and  HJ  equal  to  CF ;  also,  each  of  the  paralk^l 
jines  bearing  the  same  figures  as  11,  11,  22,  22,  &c. 

A  line  traced  through  the  last  points  will  form  the  pattern, 

Edges  to  be  allowed. 


56 


PKACTICAL   RULES 


PIPES. 


To  describe  a  Pattern  for  a  T  Pipe  at  any  angle, 
the  Collar  to  set  on  one  side  of  the  3fain  Pipe. 


Pig.    55. 


Let  the  circle  FE,  fig.  55,  equal  large  pipe  or  boiler;  make 
AB  equal  to  the  diameter  of  the  collar  or  branch  pipe,  BE  the 
angle  required  ;  describe  the  semicircle  ACB ;  divide  the  semi- 
oirclo  into  any  number  of  equal  parts;  from  the  points  draw  lines 
parallel  to  BE,  as  1,  2,  3,  &c. 


FOR   DESCRIBING    PATTERNS. 


51 


Fig.    56. 


Set  oflF  the  line  ABC,  fig.  56,  equal  in  length  to  the  circumfer- 
ence  of  the  collar  AB  ;  erect  the  perpendicular  lines  AD,  BE  and 
CH ;  set  off  on  each  side  of  BE  the  same  number  of  equal  dis- 
tances, as  in  the  semicircle  ACB ;  from  the  points  draw  lines  par- 
allel to  BE  ;  make  BE  equal  to  EB ;  make  AD  and  CF  equal  to 
DA  ;  also,  each  of  the  parallel  lines  bearing  the  same  figures  as 
11,  22,  33,  &c. ;  then  a  line  traced  through  the  points  will  form 
the  pattern. 

Edges  to  be  allowed. 


5S 


PBACJIICAL   BULES 


PIPES. 


To  describe  a  Pattern  for  a  Pipe  to  Jit  a  Flat 
Surface  at  any  Angle,  as  the  side  of  the  Poof  of 
a  Building. 


Pig.    57. 


Let  AB,  fig.  57,  equal  the  angle  of  the  roof  of  a  building ;  let, 
IE,  FB  equal  the  pipe ;    draw  the   line  CE ;  describe  the  semi- 
-ircle  CDE ;  divide  the  semicircle  into  any  number  of  equal  parts ; 
from  the  points  draw  lines  parallel  to  EB,  as  2,  8,  4,  &c, 


FOR    DESCRIBING    PATTERNS. 


59 


■zzi< 


Then  set  off  the  line  ABC,  fig.  58,  equal  in  length  to  the  cir- 
cumference of  the  cylinder  CE  ;  erect  the  perpendicular  lines  AD, 
BE  and  CF ;  set  off  on  each  side  of  BE  the  same  number  of  equal 
distances,  as  in  the  semicircle  CDE ;  fcom  the  points  draw  lines 
parallel  to  BE ;  make  BE  equal  to  BE  ;  make  AD  and  CF  equal 
tc  FC  ;  also,  each  of  the  parallel  lines  bearing  the  same  number 
as  22,  33,  44,  &c. ;  then  a  line  traced  through  the  points  «vill  form 
the  pattern. 


Edges  U  be  allowed. 


••^^VIA/^' 


V  -r-- 

PIPES. 


7o  describe  a  Pattern  for  a  Pipe  to  Jit  two  Flat 
Surfaces^  as  the  Hoof  of  a  Building. 


Fig.    59. 


Let  ABC,  fig.  59,  eqnal  the  pitch  of  a  roof;  let  DF,  lEf,  be  the 
Dipe  ;  draw  the  line  BG  parallel  to  HF;  draw  the  line  DF  at  right 
angle  to  HF;  describe  the  semicircle  DEF ;  divide  one-half  the 
semicircle  into  any  number  of  equal  parts;  from  the  points  draw 
lines  parallel  to  FH,  as  2,  3,  4,  &c. 


FOB   DESCEIBING    PATTKB'JfS.T  r  ^, ,        "olX 


titi^'  ■/''"' 


Pig.    60. 


r^ 


,.v 


y_ 


< 


Set  off  the  Hue  ABC,  fig.  60,  equal  iu  length  to  the  circumfer- 
ence of  the  pipe  DF  ;  divide  the  line  ABC  into  four  equal  parts, 
and  erect  the  lines  AD,  01,  BF,  01,  CE  ;  set  off  on  each  side  of 
01,  01,  the  same  number  of  equal  distances  as  in  one-half  the 
semicircle;  from  the  points  draw  lines  parallel  to  BF;  make  AD, 
BF  and  CE  equal  to  HF  ;  make  01,  01  equal  to  BG  ;  also,  each 
of  the  parallel  lines  bearing  the  same  figures  as  22,  22,  33,  33, 
i\i.  ;  then  a  line  traced  through  the  points  will  form  the  pattern. 


Edges  to  be  allowed. 


62 


PEACTICAL    RULES 


ELBOWS. 


To  describe  an  JSlbow  at  Bight  Angles. 


A3  a 


Let  ABCD,  fig.  61,  be  the  given  elbow  ;  draw  the  line  AB  at 
right  angles  to  BC  ;  draw  the  line  FC  ;  describe  the  semicircle 
AGB ;  divide  the  semicircle  into  any  number  of  equal  parts  ;  from 
the  points  draw  lines  parallel  to  BO,  as  1,  2,  3,  &c. 


FOR    DESCRIBING    PATTERNS. 


G3 


Fig.    62, 


^ 

tt.1 

1 

) 

11 

») 

/ 

/ 

/ 

in 

/ 

/ 

/ 

/ 

d 

/ 

rj 

m 

\ 

\ 

\ 

\ 

\ 

\ 

>^ 

\ 

s 

\ 

9\ 



Ci 

—  • — , 

< 

Set  off  the  line  ABC,  fig.  G2,  equal  in  length  to  the  circumfer- 
ence of  the  elbow  AB  ;  erect  the  perpendicular  lines  AD,  BE  and 
CF ;  set  off  on  each  side  of  BE  the  same  number  of  equal  dis- 
tances, as  in  the  semicircle  AGB  ;  from  the  points  draw  lines  par- 
allel to  BE  ;  make  BE  equal  to  BC  ;  make  AD  and  CF  equal  to 
AF  ;  also,  each  of  the  parallel  lines  bearing  the  same  figures  as 
11,  22,  33,  &c.  ;  then  a  line  traced  through  the  points  will  form 
the  pattern. 

Edges  to  be  allowed. 

Patterns  for  Elbows  may  be  described  at  any  angle,  by  any  of 
the  Rules  for  cutting  Elbow  patterns ;  in  laying  out  Elbow  pat- 
terns let  AB  equal  diameter  of  the  Elbow,  and  BCD  the  angle 


64 


PRACTICAL    UULK3 


ELBOWS. 


To  describe  an  Elboio  Pattern  at  any  angle. 


Ma3 


7  a  ^m 


Let  ABCD,  fig.  68,  be  the  given  Elbow  ;  draw  the  line  AB  at 
right  angle  to  BF  ;  draw  the  line  EF  ;  describe  the  semicircle 
AGB  ;  divide  the  semicircle  AGB  into  any  number  of  equal  parts; 
from  the  points  draw  lines  parallel  to  BF,  as  1,  2,  8,  &c. 


FOR   DESCRIBING   PATTERNS. 


65 


Fig.    64. 


cc 


!rt 


«J 


Set  off  the  line  ABC,  fig.  64,  equal  in  length  to  the  circumfer- 
ence of  the  Elbow  AB  ;  erect  the  perpendicular  lines  AF,  BE  and 
CD  ;  set  off  on  each  side  of  BE  the  same  number  of  equal  dis- 
tances, as  in  the  semicircle  AGB ;  from  the  points  draw  lines 
parallel  to  BE,  as  1,  1,  2,  2,  3,  3,  &c. ;  make  BE  equal  to  BF ; 
make  AF  and  CD  equal  to  AE ;  also,  each  of  the  parallel  lines 
bearing  the  same  figures  as  1,  1,  2,  2,  3,  3,  &c. 

Then  a  line  traced  through  the  point  will  form  the  pattern, 
Edges  to  be  allowed. 


66 


PEACTICAL   EULBS 


ELBOWS. 


To  describe  a  Pattern  for  an  Elbow  in  Three  Sec- 
tions. 


3  218 


Let  ABED,  fig.  66,  be  the  given  elbow ;  draw  the  line  FC ;  make 
FK  equal  to  one-half  the  diameter  of  the  elbow,  with  F  as  a  cen- 
tro  ;  describe  the  arcs  GL  ;  divide  the  arc  GL  into  four  equal  parts  ; 
draw  the  lines  FH  and  FJ  ;  also,  the  line  JH  ;  draw  the  line  AB 
at  right  angles  to  BO ;  describe  the  semicircle  AMB  ;  divide  the 
semicircle  into  any  number  of  equal  parts  ;  from  the  points  draw 
lines  parallel  to  BH,  as  1,  2,  3,  &c. 


FOR  DESCRIBING   PATTERNS. 


07 


Fig.    66. 


(S 


=r 


ot 


=3 


Set  off  the  line  ABC,  fig.  66,  equal  in  length  to  the  circumference 
of  the  elbow  AB  ;  erect  the  perpendicular  lines  AD,  BH  and  CE  ; 
set  off  on  each  side  of  BH  the  same  number  of  equal  distances  as 
in  the  semicircle  AMB  ;  from  the  points  draw  lines  parallel  to  BH  ; 
make  BH  equal  to  BH;  make  AD  and  CE  equal  to  AN ;  also,  each 
of  the  parallel  lines  beairing  the  same  number  as  1, 1,  2,  2,  3,  3,  &c. ; 
then  a  line  traced  through  the  points  will  form  one  of  the  sections ; 
make  DF  and  EG  equal  to  EJ ;  then  reverse  section  No.  1,  and 
place  D  at  G  and  E  at  F,  and  trace  a  line  fron  G  to  F,  this  will 
form  section  No.  2  and  3. 

Edges  to  be  allowed. 


68 


PRACTICAL   RULES 


ELBOWS   IN   FOUR   SECTIONS. 


To  describe  a  Pattern  for    an    Elbow    in   Four 
Sections. 


Aaay   6    5  4-    3  21 


Let  ABED,  fig.  67,  be  the  given  elbow ;  draw  the  line  FC ; 
make  FM  equal  in  length  to  one-half  the  diameter  of  the  elbow, 
with  F  as  a  centre  ;  describe  the  arc  KL  ;  divide  the  arc  KL  into 
three  equal  parts;  draw  the  lines  FH  and  FI;  also  the  line  IH  di- 
vide the  section  HK  into  two  equal  parts,  and  draw  the  line  FG ; 
draw  the  line  AB  at  right  angles  to  BC  ;  describe  the  semicircle 
ANB  ;  divide  the  semicircle  into  any  number  of  equal  parts,  from 
the  points  draw  lines  parallel  to  BO,  as  1,  2,  3,  &c. 


FOR  DESCKIBING  PATTERNS. 


69 


Set  off  the  line  ABO,  fig.  68,  equal  in  length  to  the  circumfer- 
ence of  elbow  AB  ;  erect  the  linc3  AF,  BD  and  CE ;  set  off  on 
each  side  of  the  line  BD  the  same  number  of  equal  distances  as  in 
the  semicircle  ANB  ;  from  the  points  draw  lines  parallel  to  BD  as 
1, 1,  2,  2,  &c.  ;  make  BD  equal  to  BG ;  make  AF  and  CE  equal  to 
AJ ;  also,  each  of  the  parallel  lines,  bearing  the  same  number  as 
1,  1,  2,  2,  3,  3,  &c. ;  then  a  line  traced  through  the  points  will 
form  the  first  section  ;  make  FG  and  EJ  equal  to  HI ;  reverse  sec- 
tion No.  1  ;  place  E  at  G  and  F  at  J  ;  trace  a  line  from  G  to  J  ; 
make  GH  and  JI  equal  to  PO,  fig.  6Y,  or  to  DK,  fig,  68  ;  take  Sec. 
No.  1,  place  F  at  IT  and  E  at  I,  and  trace  a  line  from  H  to  1,  this 
forms  Sec.  No.  3  and  4. 


Edges  to  be  allowed. 


70 


PRACTICAL  EULES 


ELBOWS. 


To   describe    a  Pattern  for    an    Elbow    in   Five 
Sections. 


Pig.    69, 


_B M 


b     5    4    3  2  19 


Let  ABED,  fig.  69,  be  the  given  elbow ;  draw  the  line  FO ; 
make  FL  equal  in  length  to  one-half  the  diameter  of  the  elbow, 
with  F  as  a  centre  ;  describe  the  arc  GM  ;  divide  the  arc  GM  into 
four  equal  parts,  and  draw  the  lines  FJ  and  FH  ;  also,  the  line  IH  ; 
divide  the  section  GH  into  two  equal  parts,  and  draw  the  line  FK ; 
draw  the  line  AB  at  right  angle  to  BO ;  describe  the  semicircle 
ANB  ;  divide  the  semicircle  into  any  number  of  equal  parts  ;  from 
the  points  draw  lines  parallel  to  BO,  as  1,  2,  8,  &c. 


FOB  DESCKIBING  PATTERNS. 


n 


Pig.    70. 


— -il< 


L 

A876543EI     31     2.345     6730 

Set  off  the  line  ABC,  fig.  70,  equal  in  length  to  the  circumfer- 
ence of  the  elbow  AB  ;  erect  the  perpendicular  lines  AL,  BD  and 
CK ;  set  off  on  each  side  of  BD  the  same  number  of  equal  dis- 
tances as  in  the  semicircle  ANB ;  from  the  points  draw  lines  paral- 
lel to  BD  as  1,1,  2,2,  &c.  ;  make  BD  equal  to  BK;  make  AF  and 
CE  equal  to  AO  ;  also,  each  of  the  parallel  lines  bearing  the  same 
number,  as  1,1,  2,2,  3,3  &c. ;  then  a  line  traced  through  the  points 
will  form  Sec.  1;  make  FG  and  EH  equal  to  HI ;  reverse  Sec.  1, 
place  E  at  G  and  F  at  H,  and  trace  a  line  from  G  to  H  ;  make  GJ 
and  HI  equal  DM  in  fig.  70 ;  take  Sec.  1  and  place  E  at  I  and  F 
at  J,  and  trace  a  line  from  J  to  I ;  make  JL  and  IK  equal  to  III ; 
reverse  Sec.  1,  and  place  E  at  L  and  F  at  E,  and  trace  a  line  iVoni 
L  to  K,  this  completes  Sec.  No.  4  and  6;  this  completes  the  pm- 
terns;  when  elbows  are  to  be  of  heavy  iron  and  riveted,  punch  tin.' 
holes  for  the  rivets  on  the  lines  FE,  GH,  JI  and  LK.  allowing  fur 
the  lap  each  side  ou  sections  No.  2,  S,  and  4. 
7 


72  PRACTICAL   KULES 


ELBOWS. 


To  describe  a  Pattern  for  a  Tapering  Elbow. 


Let  AB  and  CD,  fig.  71,  equal  large  end  of  elbow,  DHB  the 
angle  ;  make  HF  equal  CG,  and  EF  equal  AB ;  make  JK  equal 
the  small  end  of  the  elbow  ;  draw  the  lines  BK  and  AJ,  continue 
the  lines  until  they  intersect  at  I ;  describe  the  semicircles  AB 
and  JK  ;  divide  the  semicircles  into  the  same  number  of  equal 
parts;  from  the  points  draw  lines,  as  1,  2,  3,  &c. 

On  any  line,  as  AB,  fig.  72,  with  the  radii  IK  and  IB ;  describe 
the  arcs  HI  and  CD ;  set  off  CAD  equal  in  length  to  the  circum- 
ference of  the  large  end  AB  ;  draw  the  lines  CB  and  DB  ;  set  off 
on  each  side  of  AB  the  same  number  of  equal  distances  as  in  the 
semicircle  AB ;  from  the  points  draw  lines  cutting  the  centre  at 
B ;  make  AE  equal  to  BL  ;  make  CF  and  DG  equal  to  AM  ;  also^ 
each  of  the  lines  bearing  the  same  figure  as  1,  1,  2,  2,  3,  3,  &c.,  then 
a  line  traced  through  the  points  will  form  the  pattern. 

Edges  to  be  allowed. 


FOB   DESCRIBING    PATTERNS. 


?a 


/piiy  a  T 


b   s  tt  astB 


74 


rR.VCriCAL    RULES 


*  3  inh\  hfeint  « ^ 


FOR    DESCRIBING    PATTERNS. 


15 


BOILER   COVER. 


To  describe  an  Oval  Boiler  Cover. 


Ei'e';t  the  line  DC ;  make  FD  equal  to  oue-half  the  lengta  of 
the  boiler  bottom  before  the  edge  is  turned;  describe  the  circle 
IIDI  one-eight  of  an  inch  larger  in  diameter  than  the  breadth  of 
the  bottom;  let  FG  be  three-eights  of  an  inch;  then  apply  the 
corner  of  the  square  on  the  line  AB,  allowing  the  blade  to  cut  the 
circle  at  I  and  the  tongue  at  the  point  G ;  draw  the  lines  GB,  BH, 
also  the  lines  GA,  AH;  allow  one-eight  of  an  inch  for  an  edge, 
as  shown  by  the  dotted  lines,  the  cover  will  be  the  same  size  as 
the  bottom  or  pit. 


76 


PKACTICAL   KULES 


FLANGE. 


To    describe  a  Pattern  for  a  Flange  for  a  Pipe 
that  goes,  on  the  Roof  of  a  Building^  asfg.  59. 


Fig     74. 


Fig.    75. 


Let  ABC,  fig.  74,  be  the  pitch  of  the  roof;  make  DE  equal  to 
tne  diameter  of  the  pipe  ;  describe  the  circle  FG  ;  make  FG  the 
same  in  diameter  as  the  pipe  ;  draw  the  line  FG  ;  set  off  on  the 
line  FG  any  number  of  equal  parts ;  from  the  points  draw  lines  at 
right  angle  to  FG  as  1,  2,  &c. 


FOR    DESCRIBING    PATTERNS. 


77 


Pig.    76. 


Set  off  the  line  HI,  fig.  76,  equal  in  length  to  DBE  in  fig.  74  , 
sot  off  on  the  line  HI  the  same  number  of  equal  parts  as  in  the 
line  FG  ;  from  the  points  draw  lines  at  right  angle  to  HI ;  set  off 
on  each  side  of  HI  the  same  distance  as  on  each  side  of  the  line 
FG  in  fig.  75,  as  1,  1,  2,  2,  &c. ;  a  line  traced  through  the  points 
will  form  the  piece  to  be  cut  out ;  when  there  is  to  be  an  edge 
turned  up,  it  must  be  allowed  inside  of  the  line  traced.  The  same 
rule  is  applied  to  describe  a  pattern  for  a  flange  for  fig.  57  ;  make 
KI,  fig.  76,  equal  BF,  fig.  57,  theu  proceed  the  same  as  described 
above. 


78 


PRACTICAL    RULES 


OCTAGON  OR  SQUARE  TOP  OR  COVER. 


To  describe  an  Octagon  or  Square  Top  or  Cover. 
Pig.    77. 


Describe  a  circle,  three-quarters  of  an  inch  larger  in  diameter 
than  a  circle  that  will  cut  each  corner  of  the  article  the  top  or 
cover  is  for;  set  off  the  squares  from  B  to  C  ;  take  one  half  of  the 
largest  square  ;  and  \with  B  and  C  as  centres,  describe  arcs  G 
and  H  ;  then  with  A  as  centre,  describe  the  arc  cutting  the  square 
at  I  and  the  arc  D  ;  where  the  arcs  GD  and  HD  intersect,  draw  the 
lines  AE  and  AF,  also  the  lines  BE  and  CF. 


rou   DESCRIBING   PATTERNS. 


19 


STEAMER  COYER. 


To  describe  a  Steamer  Cover. 


Pig.    78. 


Describe  a  circle  one  inch  larger  in  diameter  than  the  hoop 
after  the  edge  is  h;id  off;  lay  the  hoop  on  the  pkte,  allowing  an 
edge  each  side,  as  shown  by  the  diitance  between  the  two  circles 
and  tbe  dot  on  the  line  AG,  the  circle  DE  representing  the  hoop  : 
take  the  distance  from  A  to  the  dot  on  the  lino  AO,  and  set  off 
three  times  the  distance  on  the  outer  circle,  as  from  A  to  B ;  draw 
the  lines  AC  and  BO,  cutting  the  centre  at  0. 

Edges  to  ibc  allowed. 


^ 


.;\f,Vt/\>f 


PRACTICAL  EULES 


C'>iAn 


OVAL. 


To   describe   an    Ellipse   or    Oval,  having  one    Two 
Diameters  given. 


On  the  intersection  of  the  two  diameters  as  a  centre,  with  a 
radius  equal  to  one-half  the  difference  of  the  two  diameters,  de- 
scribe the  arc  AB,  and  from  B  as  a  centre,  with  half  the  chord 
ACB,  describe  the  arc  CD  ;  from  E  as  a  centre  with  the  distance 
ED  cut  the  diameters  at  FF  and  DD  ;  draw  the  lines  FO,  FO,  FO, 
FO  ;  then  from  F  and  F  as  centres,  describe  the  arcs  00,  and  00  ; 
also,  from  D  and  D  as  centres,  describe  the  smaller  arcs,  00  and 
00,  which  will  complete  the  ellipse  as  required. 


FOR  DESCRIBING   PATTERNS. 


' ' '  'JTt: ) 


OYAL. 


To  drmo  an  Ellipse  with  the  Rule  and  Compasses, 
tJie  transverse  and  conjugate  Diameters  being 
given;   that  iSy  the  Length  and  Width. 

Fig.    80. 


Let  AB  be  the  transvese  or  longest  diameter ;  CD  the  conjugate 
or  shortest  diameter ;  and  0  the  point  of  their  intersection,  thai; 
is  the  centre  of  the  ellipse.  Take  the  distance  00  or  OD  ;  and, 
taking  A  as  one  point,  mark  that  distance  AE  upon  the  line  AO  ; 
divide  OE  into  three  equal  parts,  and  take  from  AF,  a  distance 
EF,  equal  to  one  of  those  parts  ;  make  OG  equal  to  OF  with  the 
radius  FG,  and  F  and  G  as  centres;  strike  arcs  which  shall  inter- 
sect each  other  in  the  points  I  and  H ;  then  draw  the  lines  HFK, 
HGM,  and  IFL,  IGN" ;  with  F  as  a  centre,  and  the  radius  AF,  de- 
scribe the  arc  LAK;  and,  from  G  as  a  centre,  with  the  same  radius, 
describe  the  arc  MBN ;  with  the  radius  IIC,  and  H  as  a  centre, 
describe  the  arc  KCM  ;  and  from  the  point  I,  with  the  radius  ID, 
describe  the  arc  LMD.  The  figure  ACBD  is  an  ellipse,  formed  o/ 
four  arcs  of  circles. 


82 


PKACTICAL  RULES 


ELLIPSE. 


To  find  thQ  Centre  and  the  ttco  Arcs  of  an  Ellipse. 


Let  ABCD  be  an  ellipse,  it  is  required  to  find  its  centre  ;  draw 
any  two  lines,  as  EF  and  GH,  parallel  and  equal  to  each  other ; 
bisect  these  lines  as  in  the  points  I  and  K,  and  bisect  IK  as  in  L 
from  L,  as  a  centre,  draw  a  circle  cutting  the  ellipse  in  four  poins, 
1,2,3,4,  now  L  is  the  centre  of  the  ellipse  ;  but  join  the  points  1, 
8,  and  2,4  ;  and  bisect  these  lines  as  in  M  and  N;  draw  the  line 
MN",  and  produce  it  to  A  and  B,  and  it  will  be  the  transverse  axis 
draw  CD  through  L,  and  perpendicular  to  AB,  and  it  will  be  the 
conjugate  or  shorter  axis. 


FOB    DESCRIBING    PATTERNS. 


83 


To  find  the  Radius  and   Versed  Sine  for  a  given 
Frustrtim  of  a  Cone. 


Multiply  the  slant  height  by  one-half  the  diameter  of  the  large 
end,  and  divide  the  product  by  one-half  the  difference  of  the  two 
ends,  and  the  quotent  is  the  radius ;  the  versed  sine  is  found  by 
multiplying  the  altitude  by  one-half  the  diameter  of  the  large 
end ;  and  dividing  the  product  by  one-half  the  difference  of  the 
two  ends ;  then  substract  the  quotent  from  the  radius,  and  the 
remainder  is  the  versed  sine. 

The  diameter  AB  equal  12  inches  ;  CD  equal  8  inches ;  the  slant 
height  DB  equal  10  inches,  required  the  radius  10  X  6  =  60  -;  2 
«=  30  inches  radius. 

The  diameter  AB  equal  12  inches ;    CD  equal  8  inches  ;    the  al- 
titude I  0,  9.79  inches  required  versed  sine,  9.79  X  6  =  58.74  -^ 
2  ==  29.07  ;  30  —  29.37  =-  .03  versed  i  inc. 
8 


Geometry  ia  the  science  which  investigates  and  dem»ni»«raies 
the  properties  of  lines  on  surfaces  and  solids  ;  hence,  Practicai. 
Gkometry  is  the  method  of  applying  the  rules  of  science  to  prac- 
tical purposes. 


From  any  given  pointy  in  a  straight  line,  to  erect  a 
perpendicular  ;  or,  to  maJce  a  line  at  right  angles 
with  a  given  line. 

On  each  side  of  the  point  A,  from  which  the  line  v,|^ 

is  to  be  made,  take  equal  distances,  as  AB,  AC ; 
and   from   B  and  D  as  centres,  with  any  distance 
greater  than  BA,  or  CA,   describe  arcs  cutting  each 
other  at  D  ;  then  will  the  line  AD  be  the  perpcn-     '8        A    C' 
dicular  required. 

X 

When  a  perpendicular  is  to  he  made  at  or  near  Chfy 
end  of  a  given  line. 

With  any  convenient  radius,  and  with  any  ,C, 

distance  from  the  given  line  AB,  describe  a  ,/ 

portion  of  a  circle,  as  BAG,  cutting  the  giv-  y>\ 

en  point  in  A ;  draw,  through  the  centre  o/"  /•• 

the  circle  N,  the  line  BNO  ;  and  a  line  from  /^^         j 

the  point  A,  cutting  the  intersectioa  Kt  0,  '>.     -_V_-_   ..J 
the  perpendicular  required. 

[84] 


B-^N . 


PRACTICAL    GEOMETEY. 


85 


To  do  the  same  otherwise 

From  the  given  point  A,  with  any  con- 
venient radius,  describe  the  arc  DCB ;  from 
D,  cut  the  arc  in  C,  and  from  C,  cut  the  aro 
in  B ;  also,  from  C  and  B  as  centres,  describe 
arcs  cutting  eacli  other  in  T ;  then  will  the 
line  AT  be  the  perpendicular  as  required. 


N'ote. — When  the  three  sides  of  a  triangle  are  in  the  proportion  of  S,  4,  and  5 
equal  parts,  respectively,  two  of  the  sides  form  a  riglit  angle  ;  and  observe  that 
in  each  of  these  or  the  preceding  problems,  the  perpendiculars  may  be  continued- 
below  the  given  lines,  if  necossarUy  required. 


To  bisect  any  given  Angle. 

From  the  point  A  as  a  centre,  with  any  ra- 
dius less  than  the  extent  of  the  angle,  describe 
an  arc  as  CD  ;  and  from  0  and  D  as  centres,  de- 
scribe arcs  cutting  each  other  at  B ;  then  will 
the  line  AB  bisect  the  angle  as  required. 


To  find  the  centre  of  a   Circle  or  JRadms,  that  shall 
cut  any  three  given  points,  not  in  a  direct  line. 

From  the  middle  point  B  as  a  centre,  with 
any  radius,  as  BC,  BD,  describe  a  portion  of 
a  circle,  as  CSD;  and  from  R  and  T  as  cen-       /\\\  '  ///'\ 
tres,  with  an  equal  radius,  cut  the  portion  of   p/   \\,|     {//  \ 
the  circle  in  CS  and  DS  ;  draw  lines  through     /         j\T^ 
where  the  arcs  cut  each  other  ;  and  the  inter-     '         ' 
section  of  the  lines  at  S  is  the  centre  of  the 
circle  as  required. 


To  find  the  length  of  any  given  arc  of  a  Circle. 

With  the  radius  AC,  equal  to  Jth  the 
length  of  the  chord  of  the  arc  AB,  and 
from  A  as  a  centre,  cut  the  arc  in  C  ; 
also  from  B  as  a  centre,  with  equal  ra- 
dius, cut  the  chord  in  B ;  draw  the  line  CB;  and  twice  the  length 
of  the  line  is  the  length  of  the  arc  nearly. 


86 


PRACTICAL    GEOMETRY. 


Throucjlh  any  given  2)oint,  to  draw  a  tangent  to   a 
circle. 


Let  the  given  point  be  at  A ;  draw  the 
line  AC,  on  which  describe  the  semicircle 
ADC  ;  draw  the  line  ADB,  cutting  the  cir- 
cumference in  D,  which  is  the  tangent  aa 
required. 


To  draxo  from  or  to  the  circumference  of  a  circle 
lines  tending  towards  the  centre,  when  the  centre  is 
inaccessible. 

Divide  the  whole  or  any  given 
portion  of  the  circumference  into 
the   desired     number     of     eq 
parts  ;    then,  with  any  radius  less 
than  the  distance  of  two  divisions 
describe  arcs  cutting   each  other, 
as  Al  Bl,  C2,  D2,  &c. ;  draw  the  lines  CI,  B2,  D3,  &c.,  which 
lead  to  the  centre  as  required. 


To  draw  the  end  lines. 

As  AR,  FR,  from  C  describe  the  arc  R,  and  with  the  radius  CI, 
from  A  or  F  as  centres,  cut  the  former  arcs  at  R,  or  R,  and  the 
lines  AR-,  FK,  will  tend  to  the  centre  as  required 


To  describe  an  arc,  or  segment  of  a  circle  of  large 
radii. 

Of  any  suitable  material,  construct  a  triangle,  as  ABC ;  make 
AB,BC,  eacli  equal  in  length  to  the  chord  of  the  arc  DE,  and 


height,  twice  that  of  the  arc  BB.  At  each  end  of  the  chord  DE 
fix  a  pin,  and  at  B,  in  the  triangle,  fix  a  tracer,  (as  a  pencil,) 
move  tiio  triangle  along  tlio  pins  as  guides  ;  and  the  traces  will 
dt'scribe  t!ie  aic  n  quired. 


rPwVCTICAL    GEOMETRY. 


87 


Or  otherwise. 

Draw  the  chord  ACB  ;  also, 
draw  the  line  HDI,  parallel 
with  the  chord,  and  equal  to 
the  height  of  the  segment ;  bi- 
sect the  chord  in  C,  and  erect  a — t  t  3  \c~i  T~r  i 
the  perpendicular  CD  ;  join  AD,  DB  ;  draw  AH  perpendicular  to 
AD,  and  BI  perpendicular  to  BD,  erect  also  the  perpendiculars 
A?t,  B?t;  divide  AB  and  III  into  any  number  of  equal  parts; 
draw  the  lines  1,  1,  2,  2,  3,  3,  «&c. ;  likewise  divide  the  lines  A  ?i, 
B  ?j,  each  into  half  the  number  of  equal  parts;  draw  lines  to  D 
from  each  division  in  the  lines  A  w,  B  ra,  and  through  where  they 
intersect  the  former  lines,  describe  a  curve,  which  will  be  the  arc 
or  segment  required. 


To  describe  an  Elliptic  arch^  the  Width  and  Bise 
of  Span  been  given. 

Bisect  with  a  line  at  right  angles 
the  chord  or  span  A  B  ;  erect  the  per-  9 
pendicular  A  q,  and  draw  the  line  y  D  a  ^x 
equal  and  parallel  to  AC  ;  bisect  AC  ^> 
and  A  q  mr  and  n  ;  make  C  I  equal  to 
CD,  and  draw  the  line  Ir  q ;  draw  also 
the  line  w  s  D  ;  bisect  s  D  with  a  line 
at  right  angles,  and  meeting  the  line 
CD  in  g  ;  draw  the  line  g  q,  make  CP 
equal  to  C  k,  and  draw  the  line  g  F  i  ; 
then  from  gr  as  a  centre,  with  tlie  radius 
g  D,  describe  the  arc  s  D  i;  and  from  k  and  P  as  centres,  with 
tlie  radius  A  k,  describe  the  arcs  A  s  and  B  i,  which  completes  the 
arch  as  required.     Or, 


Bisect  the  chord  AB,  and  fix  at 
right  angles  any  straight  guide,  as  be; 
prepare,  of  any  suitable  material,  a 
rod  or  staff,  equal  to  half  the  chord's 
length,  as  c?  c//  from  the  end  of  the 
staff,  equal  to  the  height  of  the  arch, 
fix  a  pin  e,  and  at  the  extremity  a 
tracer/;  move  the  staff,  keeping  its 
end  to  the  guide  and  the  fixed  pin  to 
the  cliord  ;  and  the  tracer  will  describe  one-half  the  arc  required 


88 


PEACTICAL    GEOMETRY. 


To  describe  a  JParabola,  the  dimensions  been  given. 

Let  AB  equal  the  length,  and  CD  the  breadth  of  the  required 
parabola  ;  divide  CA,  CB  into  any  number  of  equal  parts  ;     also, 


divide  the  perpendiculars  A  a  and  B  b  into  the  same  number  of 
equal  parts;  then  from  a  and  b  draw  lines  meeting  each  division 
on  the  line  ACB,  and  a  curve  line  drawn  through  each  intersec- 
tion will  form  the  parabola  required. 

To  obtain  by  measurement  the  length  of  any  direct 
line,  though  intercepted  by  some  7naterial  object. 

Suppose  the  distance  between   A   and   B   is   required,   but   the 
riglit  line  is  intercepted  by  the  object  C.      On   the   point  d,  with 


any  convenient  radius,  describe  the  arc  c  c,  make  the  arc  twice 
the  radius  in  length,  through  whieJi  draw  the  line  dee,  and  on  e 
describe  another  arc  equal  in  length  to  once  the  radius,  as  eff; 
draw  the  line  efr  equal  to  efd;  on  r  describe  the  arc  _;*  j,  in 
length  twice  the  radius;  continue  the  lino  through  rj,  which 
will  be  a  right  line,  and  d  e,  or  e  r,  equal  the  distance  between  dr, 
by  which  the  distance  between  A  and  B  is  obtained  as  required. 

7h  inscribe  a7iy  Regidar  Polygon  in  a  given  circle. 

Divide  any  diameter,  as  AB,  into  so  many 
equal  parts  as  the  polygon  is  required  to  have 
sides  ;  from  A  and  B  as  centres,  with  a  radius 
equal  to  the  diameter,  describe  arcs  cutting 
each  other  in  C  ;  draw  the  line  CD  througli 
the  second  point  of  division  on  the  diameter 
p.  and  the  line  DB  is  one  side  of  the  polygon 
required. 


PRACTICAL    GEOMETRY. 


89 


To  construct  a  Square  iqyon  a  given  right  line. 

From  A  and  B  as  centres,  with  the  radius 
AB,  describe  the  arcs  Ari.BcJ,  and  from  c, 
with  an  equal  radius,  describe  the  circle  or 
po\tion  of  a  circle  cd,  AB,  he  ;  from  hd  cut 
the  circle  at  e  and  c  ;  draw  the  lines  Ae,Bc, 
also  the  line  si,  vf  hich  completes  the  square 
as  required. 


To  form  a  Square  equal  in  area  to  a  given  triangle. 

Let  ABC  be  the  given  triangle  ;  let 
fall  the  perpendicular  BJ,  and  make  Ae 
half  the  height  (ZB ;  bisect  eC,  and  de- 
scribe the  semicircle  enOi ;  erect  the 
perpendicular  As,  or  side  of  the  square, 
then  A  s  <  a;  is  the  square  of  equal  area  as  required. 

To  form  a  Square  equal  in  area  to  a  given  rectangle. 

Let  the  line  AB  equal  the  length  and 
breadth  of  the  given  rectangle  ;  bisect 
the  line  in  e,  and  describe  the  semicircle 
ADB  ;  then  from  A  with  the  breadth,  or 

from  13  with  the  length,  of  the  rectangle,      

cut  the  line  AB  at  C,  and  erect  the  per-        a       c         2  b 

pendicular  CD,  meeting  the  curve  at  D,  and  CD  equal  a  side  of 
the  square  required. 


To  find  the  Length  for  a  rectangle  whose  area  shall 
be  equal  to  that  of  a  given  Square^  the  Breadth  of 
the  rectangle  being  also  given. 


Let  ABCD  be  the  given 
square,  and  DE  the  given 
breadth  of  rectangle  ;  continue 
the  line  BC  to  F,  and  draw  the 
line  D'F ;  also,  continue  the  line 
DC  to  (/,  and  draw  the  line  Ag 
parallel  to  DF ;  from  the  inter- 
section of  the  lines  at  g,  draw 
the  line  gd  parallel  to  DE,  and 


J. 


,  •r 


'&d  parallel  to  Dg  ;  then  YiJ)dg  is  the  rectangle  as  required. 


DO 


PRACTICAL    GEOjMETRY. 


To  bisect  any  given  Triangle. 

Supose  ABO  the  given  triangle ;  bisect  one 
of  its  sides,  as  AB  in  c,  from  wliich  describe 
the  semicircle  A?-B  ;  bisect  the  same  in  r,  and 
from  B,  with  the  distance  Br,  cut  the  diameter 
AB  in  v;  draw  the  line  vy  parallel  to  AC, 
which  will  bisect  the  triangle  as  required. 


To  describe  a  Circle  of  greatest  diameter  in  a  given 
triangle. 

Bisect  the  angles  A  and  B,  and 
draw  the  intersecting  lines  AD,  BD, 
cutting  each  other  in  D ;  then  from  D 
as  centre,  with  the  distance  or  radii 
DC,  describe  the  circle  Ce/,  as  re-  ^ 
quired. 


To  form  a  Mectangle  of  greatest  surface  in  a  given 
triangle. 

Let  ABC  be  the  given  triangle ;  bisect  any 
two  of  its  sides,  as  AB,  BC,  in  e  and  d ;  draw 
the  line  eJ;  also  at  i-ight  angles  with  the  line 
ed,  draw  the  lines  fp,dp,  and  eppd  is  the  rectan- 
gle required. 


DECIMAL  EQUIVALENTS  TO  FRACTIONAL 
PARTS  OF  LINEAL  MEASUREMENT. 


One  Inch  the  Integer  or   Whole  Number. 


96875 

are  equal  to 

1  &  32 

.46875 

9375 

l&i'e 

.4375 

90625 

i&32 

.40625 

875 

1 

.375 

84375 

4&3' 

.34375 

8125 

4&16 

.3125 

78125 

f  &32 

.28125 

75 

f 

.25 

71875 

i&s's 

.21875 

6875 

f  &16 

.1875 

66G25 

i&32 

.15625 

625 

f 

.125 

59375 

i&3'2 

.09375 

5625 

i&16 

.0625 

53125 

i&3J 

.03125 

6 

4 

f  &3' 
I  &  1« 
I   &    32 

i  &3'2 
i-&    .J. 

i  &  33 
i 

i&32 


Owe  Foot  or  12  Inches  the  Integer. 


9166  are 

equal  to 

11 

8333 

10 

75 

9 

6<;66 

8 

5833 

7 

5 

6 

4166 

5 

3333 

4 

25   , 

8 

1666  are  equal 

to 

2  inches. 

0833 

I     " 

07291        " 

I     " 

0625         " 

f     " 

05208       " 

i   •' 

04166       " 

i  " 

03125       " 

f  " 

02083       " 

i  " 

01041       " 

4   " 

91 


DEFINITIOKS    OF    ARITHMETICAL    SIGNS 

USED  IN   THE    FOLLOWING 

CALCULATIONS. 


Sign  of  Equality,  and  signifies  as  4  -^  6  ==  10. 


+ 

Addition,             " 

as  6  +  6  =  12,  the  Sum. 

(( 

Substraction^      " 

as  6  —  2=4,  "  Remainder, 

X 

Multiplication,    " 

as  8  X  3=24,  "  Product. 

-4-         " 

Division,              " 

as  24  -f-  3  =  8  or  '3  ==  8. 

y'         ^i 

Square  Root,      '• 

Evolution  or  Extraction   of 

Square  Root. 

62         " 

to  be  Squared,    " 

thi^i  8»  =  64  Involution,  or 

73         » 

to  be  Cubed,      " 

thus  33  =  27  the  Raising  of 

Powers. 

[92] 


m 


MiNSOKATioN  is  that  branch  of  Mathematics  which  is  employed 
in  ascertainuig  the  extension,  solidities  and  capacities  of  bodies 
capable  of  being  measured. 


MENSURATION   OF   SURFACES. 


To  Measure  or  Ascertain  the  quantity  of  Surface  in 
any  Might  lined  figure,  whose  Sides  are  Parallel  to 
each  other,  as  figs.  1,  2  and  3. 


Square. 
1. 


Rectangle. 
2. 


Ehomboid. 
3. 


7 


Rule. — Multiply  the  length   by  the  breadth  or  perpendicular 
height  and  the  product  will  be  the  area  or  superficial  contents. 

Application  of  the  Hule  to  Practical  purposes. 
The  sides  of  a  square  piece  of  iron  is  9-J  inches  in  length  re- 
quired the  area. 

Decimal  equivalent  to  the  fraction  ^  =  .875.  (See  page  Ql),  aud 
9.875  X  9-875  =  97.5,  &c.,  square  inches  the  area. 

[93] 


94 


MENSURATION    OF    SURFACER. 


2.  The  length  of  a  Roof  is  GO  ft.  4  in.,  and  its  width  25  ft.  3  in. 
required  the  area  of  the  Koof. 

4  iuches  =  333  and  3  inches  =  .25,  (See  table  of  equivalents,) 
hence,  60.333  X  25.25  =  1523.4  Square  feet  the  area. 


TKIANGLES. 

To  find  the  Area  of  a  Triangle  when  the  base  and 
perpendicular  are  given,  fig.  3. 


Rule. — Multiply  the  base   by   the   perpendicular  height,   and 
half  the  product  is  the  area. 

The  base  of  the  triangle,  fig.  4,  ADB 
is  3  feet  6  inches  in  length,  and  the 
height,  DC,  1  foot  9  inches  required 
the  area. 

6  inches  =  .5,  and  9  inches  =  V5  ; 

3.5X1. 75 

hence =3.0625  Square  feet  the  area, 

2 


Any   two  sides  of  a  Might  Angled  Triangle  being 

given  to  find  the  third. 

Fig 

When  the  base  and  perpendiculars  are 
given  to  find  the  hypothenuse. 

Add  the  square  of  the  base  to  the  square 
of  the  perpendicular,  and  the  square  root  of 
the  sum  will  be  the  hypothenuse. 

The  base  of  the  triangle,   fig.  5,  AB  is  4  . 
feet,  and  the  perpendicular  BC  3  feet,  then   -^ 
4t  4-  S«  =  25,       -/  25  =  5  feet  the  hypothenuse. 

"When  the  Hypothenuse  and  Base  are  given,  to  find 
the  Perpendicular. 

From  the  Square  of  the  hypothenuse,  subtract  the  Square  of 
the  base,  and  the  Square  of  the  remainder  will  be  the  perpen- 
dicular. 


MKNSUKATION    OF    SUKFACES.  05 

The  hypothonutJC  of  the  tiianglo,  fig.  5,  AC,  is  5  feet,  and  tli« 
base,  AB,  -i  feet;  then  5«— l^  =  9,  and  Vi)  —  3  the  perpeu- 
dicuhir. 

When  tliG  Ilypothenxise  and  the  Perpendicular  are 
f/iven  to  find  the  base. 

From  tlie  Square  of  the  hypothenuse  subtract  the  square  of  the 
poipendicular  and  the  square  root  of  the  remainder  will  be  iho 
base. 


96 


MENSUKATIOK    OF    SURFACES. 


OF    POLYGONS. 


To  find  the  Area  of  a  Begular  Polygon. 


Rule. — Multiply  the  length  of  a  side  by  half 
the  distance  from  the  side  to  the  centre,  and 
that  product  by  the  number  of  sides  ;  the  last 
product  will  be  the  area  of  the  figure. 

Example. — The  side  AB  of  a  regular  hexagon 
is  12  inches,  and  the  distance  therefrom  to  the 
centre  of  the  figure,  dc,  is  10  inches  ;  required 
the  area  of  the  hexagon. 


10 


Pig. 


X  12  X  6  =-  360  sq.  in.  =  ^  sq.  feet.      ins. 


To  find  the  Area  of  a  Regular  Polygon,  when  the 
Side  only  is  given. 

Rule. — Multiply  the  square  of  the  side  by  the  multiplier  op- 
posit  to  the  name  of  the  Polygon  in  the  9th  column  of  the  follow- 
ing Table,  and  the  product  will  be  the  area. 

Table  of  angleis  relative  to  the  construction  of  Repular  Polygons  with 
the  aid  of  the  Sector,  and  of  co-effieients  to  facilitate  their  construc- 
tion without  it  ;  also,  of  co  efficients  to  aid  in  finding  the  area  of 
the  figure,  the  nde  only  being  given. 


Names. 

No.    Angle 

of         at 

sides  centre. 

Angle 

at 

circum. 

Perpn'n. 

side 
being  1. 

Leugth  of 
side  rad's 
being  1. 

Radius  of 

circl',8ide 
being  1. 

Ead.'of 
cii-.perp 
being  1. 

Area 
being  1. 

Triangle, 

3    120° 

60° 

0.28868 

1.782 

.5773 

2. 

0.43a012 

S-;uare, 

4 

90 

90 

0.5 

1.414 

.7071 

1.414 

1. 

Pt-ntagon, 

6 

72 

108 

0.6882 

1.175 

.8506 

3.238 

1.720477 

Hrxagon, 

6 

60 

120 

0.866 

1. 

1. 

1.156 

2.598076 

Heptagon, 

7 

54 

128i 

1.0382 

.8672 

1.152 

1.11 

3.633912 

Octagon, 

8 

45 

135 

1.2071 

.7654 

1.3065 

1.08 

4.828427 

Nonagon, 

9 

40 

140 

1.3737 

.684 

1.4619 

1.06 

6.181824 

Decagon, 

10 

36 

144 

1.5388 

.618 

1.618 

1.05 

7.694208 

Undecagon, 

11 

82i 

147-5 
11 

1.7028 

.5634 

1.7747 

1.04 

9.36564 

Dodecagon, 

12 

30 

150 

1.866 

.5176 

1.9318 

1.037 

11.196152 

NoTB — "  Angle  at  centre"  means  the  angle  of  radii,  passing  from  the  centre  to 
the  circumference,  or  corners  of  the  figure.  "  Angle  at  circumference"  means 
the  angle  which  any  two  adjoining  Bides  make  with  each  other. 


MENSURATION    OF    SURFACES.  07 


THE   CIRCLE   AND   ITS   SECTIONS. 


Observations  and  Definitions. 

1.  The  Circle  contains  a  greater  area  than  any  other  plain 
fiu'iirc  bounded  by  the  same  perimeter  or  outline. 

2.  The  areas  of  Circles  are  to  each  other  as  the  squares  of  tlieir 
diiimetors  ;  any  Circle  twice  the  diameter  of  another  contains  luur 
t'vpes  the  area  of  the  other. 

3.  The  radius  of  a  circle  is  a  Straight  line 
drawn  from  the  centre  to  the  circumference,  as 
r^D,  fig.  7. 

4.  The  diameter  of  a  circle  is  a  Straight  line 
drawn  through  the  centre  and  terminated  both     £;■ 
ways  at  the  circumference,  as  ABC. 

5.  A  chord  is  a  Straight  line  joining  any  two  points  of  the  cir- 
cumference, as  EF. 

6.  The  Versed  sine  is  a  Straight  line  joining  the  chord,  and  the 
ciifumfereuce  as  GH. 

1.  An  arc  is  any  part  of  the  circumference,  as  AEH. 

S.  A  Semicircle  is  half  the  circumference  cut  off  by  a  diameter, 
as  AIIC. 

!•  A  Segment  is  anr  portion  of  a  circle  cut  off  by  a  chord,  as 
Ei:i'". 

10.  A  Sector  is  a  part  of  a  circle  cut  off  by  two  radii,  as  CBD. 


General  Mules  in  delation  to  the  Circle. 

1.  Multiply  the  diameter  by  3.1416  the  product  is  the  Circum- 
ference. 

2.  Multiply  the   circumference  by  SI 831,  the  product  is  the  di- 
ameter. 

3.  Multiply  the  square  of  the  di/imetcr  by  .7854,  and  the  pro- 
duct is  the  area. 


98  MENSURATION  OF  SUEFACES. 

4.  Multiply  the  square  root  of  the  area  by  1.128SY,  the  product 
is  the  diameter. 

5.  Multiply  the  diameter  by  .8862,  the  product  is  the  side  of  a 
Square  of  equal  area. 

6.  Multiply   the  side  of  a  square   by  1.128,  the  product  is  the 
diameter  of  a  circle  of  equal  area. 


Application  of  the  JRules  to  Practical  Pmyoses. 

1.  The  diameter  of  a  circle  being  5  ft.  6  inches,  required  it  cir- 
cumference. 

5.5  X  3  1416  ==  17.27880  feet  tho  circumference. 

2.  A  straight  line,  or  the  circumff^rcnce  of  a  circle  being 
17.27880  feet  required  the  circle's  diameter  corresponding  thereto. 

17.27880  +  .31831  =  5.5000148280  feet  diameter- 

3.  Tlie  diameter  of  a  circle  is  9f  inches;  what  is  its  area  iti 
square  inches  ? 

f).S7.-3«  =  87.89,  &c.  y  .7854  —  69.029,  &e.,  inches  the  area. 

4.  What  must  the  diameter  of  a  circle  be  to  contain  an  area 
equal  to  69.029296875  square  inches. 

y  69.02929,  &c.,  =  8.3091  ><  1.12837  =  9.375,  &c., 
or  9-|  inchas  the  diameter. 

5.  The  diameter  of  a  circle  is  15^  inches  ;  what  must  each  side 
of  a  square  be,  to  be  equal  in  area  to  the  given  circle  ? 

15.5  X  .8862  =  13.73,  &c.,  inches  length  of  side. 

6.  Eacli  side  of  a  square  is  18.736  iiiciics  in  lonpjtli.  what  iim.'^t 
the  diameter  of  a  cii'cle  be  to  cimtain  an  arta  (.(jual  tu  the  ji,i\t.u 
square. 

13.^36  X  1.128  =  15.49  &c,  or  15|  inches  the  diameter. 
Any  chord   and   versed  sine  of  a  circle  being  given  to  find  tho 
diameter. 

Rule. — Divide  the  sum  of  the  squares  of  the  chord  and  versoti 
sine  by  the  versed  sine,  the  quotent  is  the  diameter  of  eorrc.'^- 
ponding  circle. 

F  i  .T  .    8 . 

7.  The  chord  of  a  circle  AC,  fig.  8,  equal  8 
f.'tt.,  and  the  versed  sine,  BD  equal  1^  feet,  re- 
quired the  circles  diameter. 

83  ^_  1.52  =  66.25  -f.  1.5  ==44.16  feet  the 
diameter.  A' 


MKNSURATION    OP    SlTUFACKS. 


09 


8.  In  the  curve  of  a  railway,  I  stretched  a  liiie  80  foet  in  h^ngth, 
and  *.\'.f  distance  fiom  the  line  to  the  curve  I  found  to  be  9  inches, 
required  tlie  circles  diameter. 

80«  +  .75^  =  640  5625  -^  2  =  820.28,  &c.,feet  tlie  diameter. 

To  find  the  Length  of  any  arc  of  a  circle. 

R0LE. — From  eight  times  the  chord  of  half  the  arc,  pubtuict 
the  chord  of  the  whole  arc,  and  one-third  of  the  r<jni;tiiitlrr  w.il 
be  tlie  length  nearly. 

Fig.    9. 

Required  the  length  of  the  arc 
ABC,  fig  9.  the  chord  AB  of  half 

the  arc  t)eing  8^  ft.,  and  chord  AC  A^^^S^^  j  \o 

of  the  whole  are  10  ft.  8  inches. 


41.334 


8.5  X  8  =  68.0  and  680—  16.666 


13.778  c.  feet 


the  length  of  the  arc. 

To  find  the  area  of  the  sector  of  a  circle. 

Fig.    10. 

Rule. — Multiply  the  length  of  the  arc  by  half 
the  length  of  the  radius. 

The  length  of  the  are  ABC,  fig.  10,  equals  9^ 
inches,  and  the  radii  DA,  DC  equal  each  7  inches 
required  the  area 

9.5  X  3.5  =  33.25  inches  the  area. 

To  find  the  area  of  a  Segnieiit  of  a  circle. 

Rule. — Find  the  area  of  a  sector  whose  arc  is  equal  to  that  of 
the  given  segment,  and  if  it  be  le^s  then  a  semicircle  s-.;btriict  the 
area  of  the  triangle  formed  by  the  chord  of  the  segmenr  and  radii 
of  its  extremities  ;  but  if  more  than  /i  semicircle  add  the  area  of 
the  triangle  to  the  area  of  the  sector  and  the  remainder  or  sura  is 
the  area  of  the  segment. 

Thus  suppose  the  area  of  the  segment  ABC,  E  fig.  10.  is  requir- 
ed and  that  the  length  of  the  arc  ABO  equals  r.>^  ft.,  DA  and  DC 
each  equal  14  ft.,  and  the  chord  AC  equal  16  ft.,  8  inches;  also  the 
perpendicular  ED  equal  7^  feet. 

16.666  X  7  5 

19.5  X  7  ==  136.5  feet  the  area  of  the  sector, = 


t>J.49  feot  the  area  of  the  triangl  ■,  136.5  ■ 
area  of  l!i"  segment. 


6t:!.49  —  74  01  feet  the 


i^AAf!^' 


-W,0  MJBIiSUEATlON  OP   SURFACES. 

To.  find  the  area  of  the  space  contained  between  tipo 
■:.(•; oiicminc  Circles  07'  the  area  of  a  Circular  lii/i'/. 


Rule. — 1  Multiply  the  sum  of  the  inside  and  out  side  diametcis 
by  their  difference  and  by  .7854  the  product  is  the  area. 


nd 
is 

Pig.    11. 


Rule  2. — The  difF.rence  of  the  areas  of 
f.he  two  circles  will  be  the  area  of  the  Ring 
on  space. 

Suppose  the  external  circle  AD,  fig.  11, 
equal  4  ft.,  and  the  internal  circle  BG  2^ 
ft.,  requu'ed  the  area  of  the  space  contained 
between  them  or  area  of  a  Ring. 

4   +  2.5  =  6.5  and  4  —  2.5  =  1.5  hence,  6.5  X  l-f>  X  •'^854  =- 
7.65  ft.,  the  area  ;  or, 

The  area  of  4  ft.,  is  12.566  ;  the  area  of  2.5  is  4.9081.  (See  table 
of  areas  of  circles.) 

12.566  —  4.9081  =^  7.6579  the  area. 


To  find  the  area  of  Elli2)se  or   Oval. 

Rhle. — Multiply  the  diameter  together  and  their  product  by 
.7854. 

An  oval  is  20  inches  by  15  inches  what  are  its  superficial  contents 
20  X  15  X  -7854  =  235."62  inches  the  area. 

To  find  the  circutnference  of  an  Elli2yse  or  Oval. 

RpLE. — Multiply  half  the  sum  of  the  two  diameters  by  3.1416, 
the  product  will  be  the  circumference. 

Example. — An  oval  is  20   inches  by  15  inches  what  is  its  cir- 
rumference. 
20  +  15 
=17.5  X  3.1416  =  54.978  inches  the  circumference. 


MEXSURATION    OF   SUBFAjCJ£Sv> .  ^^^\ 

OF  CYLINDERS.         -^^  A  i<  ^.>.  '^ 


To  find  the  Convex  Surface  of  a   (Jylhder. 

Rule. — ^Multiply  the  circumference  by  the  height  or  Izngtli  the 
product  will  be  the  surface. 

Example. — The  circumference  of  a  cylinders  is  6  ft ,   1  inches 
and  its  length  15  ft.,  required  the  convex  surface, 

6.833  X  15  ==-  94.996  square  feet  the  surface. 


OF  CONES  OR  PYRAMIDS 

To  find  the  Convex  Surface   of  a  Right   Cone  or 
Pyramid 

Rule. — Multiply  the  perimeter  circumference  of  the  base  by  the 
slant  height,  and  half  the  product  is  the  slant  surface  if  the  sur^ 
face  of  the  entire  figure  is  required,  and  the  area  of  the  base  to  the 
convex  surface. 

Example. — The  base  of  a  Cone,  fig.  13,  is  5  ft,  diameter  and 
the  slant  height  is  7  feet,  what  is  the  convex  surface  ? 

15.70  X  7 

5  X  3.1416  =-15.70  circumference  of  the  base  and «=54.95 

2 
square  feet  the  convex  surface. 

To  find  the  Convex   Surface  of  a  Frustrmn  of  a 
Cone  or  Pyramid. 

Rule. — Multiply  the  sum  of  the  circumference  of  the  two  endfi 
by  the  slant  height,  and  half  the  product  will  be  the  slant  surface. 

The  diameter  of  the  top  of  a  Frustom  of  a  Cone,  fig.  14,  is  3  ft., 
the  base  5  ft.,  the  slant  height  7  ft.  3  inches,  required  the  slant 
surface. 

25.12X7.25 
9.42  +  15.7  -= — - — ■ =-  91.06  square  ft.,  the  slant  surface. 


102         MENSURATION  OP  SUKFaCES. 


OF  SPHERES. 


To  find  the   Convex  Surface  of  a  Sphere  or   GU/he^ 
jig.  12. 

Fi 

R0i,E  — Multiply  the  diameter  of  the  Sphere 
by  its  circumference,  and  the  product  is  its  sur- 
face ;    or, 

Multiply  the  square  of  the  diameter  by  8.14- 
16,  the  product  is  its  surface.  k 

What  is  the  Convex  Surface  of  a  glob'',  fij 
ft.,  in  diameter? 

6.5  X  3.1416  X  6.5=  132.73  square  feet;    or,  6.5*  ^42.25  X 
3.1416  =-  132.73  square  feet  the  Convex  surface. 


\ 


*\vs«:. 


MENSURATION    OF    SOLIDS    AND  CAPACL 
TIES  OF  BODIES. 


To  find  the  Solidity  or  capacity  of  any  figure  in  the 
Cubical  Form. 

Rule. — Multiply  the  length  of  any  one  side  by  its  breadth  and 
by  the  depth  or  distance  to  its  opposite  side,  tlie  product  is  the 
Bolidity  or  capacity  in  equal  terms  of  measurement. 

Example. — The  side  of  a  cube  is  20  inches,  what  is  the  solidity  ? 
20  X  20  X  20  »=  8000  cubic  inches ;  or,  4.6296  cubic  feet  ncai ly. 

A  Rectangular  tank  is  in  length  6  feet,  in  breadth  44- feet,  and  in 
depth  3  feet,  required  its  capacity  in  cubic  feet;  also  its  capacity 
in  U.  S.  Standard  gallons. 

6x4.5X3  =  81  cubic  feet,  81  X  1728  =  139968  -:-  231  =605.92 

gallons. 


MENSURATION    OF  SrLTDS.  103 


OF  CYLINDERS. 


To  find  the  Solidity  of  Cylinders. 

Rui.K. — Multiply    the  area  of  the  base  by   the  height,  iiud  the 
product  is  the  solidity. 

Example. — The  base  of  a  cylinder  is  18  inches,  and  the  height 
is  40  inches — what  is  the  solidity  ? 

18^  X  •'?8o4  X  40  =  101'78.7840  cubic  inches. 


To  find  the    Contents  in    Gallons   of    Cylindrical 

Vessels. 

RcLE. — Take  the  dimensions  in  inches  and  decimal  parts  of  nn 
inch.  Square  the  diameter,  multiply  it  by  the  height,  then  mul- 
tiply the  product  by  .0034  for  Wine  gallons,  or  by  .002785  tor 
Beer  gallons. 

Example. — How  many  U.  S.  Gallons  will  a  Cylinder  contain, 
whose  diameter  is  18  inches  and  length  30  Inches. 

18*  X  SO  =  9720  X  .0034  ==  33.04,  &c.,  gallons. 


OF   CONES   AND    PYRAMIDS. 

To  find  the  Solidity  of  a  Cone  or  a  Fyramid. 

Fig.    13, 

D 

Rule. — Multiply  the  area  of  the  Base  by  the 

perpendicular  height,    and  -J-  the  product  will  be 
the  Solidity. 

Example. — The  base  of  a  cone,  fig.  13,  is  2  J  ft., 
and  the  height  is  3  J  feet,  what  is  the  Solidity. 

2.'25  X  -7854  X  =^'i& 

■ =  407  cubic  feet  the  Solidity. 

3  ^ 


104  MENSURATION    OF    SOMDS. 


To  find  the  Solidity  of  the  Frustruni  of  a  Cone. 


Rule. — To  the  Product  of  the  dia'.mtors  ef  the  ends,  add  J  the 
pquare  of  ■  the  difference  of  the  diftnietcrs ;  multiply  the  sum  by 
.7854  and  the  product  will  be  the  mean  area  between  the  ends, 
which  multiplied  by  the  perpendicular's  height  of  the  Frustrom, 
gives  the  Solidity. 


Pig.    14 


Example. — The  diameter  of  the  large  end  of  a 
Frustrom  of  a  Cone,  fig.  14,  is  10  feet,  that  of 
the  smaller  end  is  G  feet,  and  the  perpendicular 
height  12  feet,  what  is  the  Solidity  ? 

10— 6  =4?  =  16  -^  3  :=  5.8S3  sq.  of  differ- 
ence of  ends  ;  and  10X6  +  5.333  =  65.333  X 
.^854  X  12  =  615.75  cubic  feet  the  Solidity. 


To  find  the    Contents  in  XI.  S.  Standard  Gallons  of 
the  Friistrum  of  a  Cone. 

Rule. — To  the  product  of  the  diameters  in  inches,  and  decimal 
parts  of  an  inch  of  the  ends,  add  ^  the  square  of  the  difference 
of  the  diameters  Multiply  the  sum  by  the  perpendicular  height 
In  inches  and  decimal  parts  of  an  inch,  and  mu'.tip'y  that  product 
by  .0034  for  Wine  gallons,  and  by  .002785  for  Beergallons. 

Example. — The  diameter  of  the  large  end  of  a  Frustrum  of  a 
Cone,  fig.  14,  is  8  feet,  that  of  the  smaller  end  is  4  feet,  and  the 
p'^rpendicular  height  10  feet — what  is  the  Contents  in  U.  S.  Stan- 
dard gallons  ? 

96  —  48  =  4S2  =  2304  -^  3  _  768  ;  96  X  48  +  768  =  53T6 
X   120  X  .0034  =2193.4  gallons. 


ME^SURATIOX    OF    ^'OLIDS,  105 

To  find  the  Solidity  of  the  Frustrum  of  a  Pyramid. 

Fig 
Rule. — Add  to  the  areas  of  the  two  ends  of  the 
Frustrum,   the  square  root  of  their  product,  and 
this  sura   multiplied   by   -J   of    the   perpendicular 
height  will  give  the  Solidity. 

Example. — What  is  the  Solidity  of  a  hexagonal 
pyramid,  fig.  15,  a  side  of  the  large  end  AB,  buing      //        fe-S^ 
12  feet,  and  one  of  the  smaller  ends  6  feet,  and  the  perpendicular 
height  8  feet  ? 

874.122  +  93.63  =,     1^84991.63  =  590.811  374.122  +  93.53-^ 
1058.  .463  X  8 
690.811  = =  2822.568  Cubic  ft.  the  Solidity. 


To  find  tlie  Solidity  of  a  Sphere. 

Rule. — Multiply  the  Cube  of  the  diameter  by  .5236  and  the  pro- 
duct is  the  Solidity. 

Example. — What  is  the  Solidity  of  a  Sphere,  fig.  15,  the  dianie- 
ter  being  20  inches  ? 

20»  =  8000  X  .5236  =4188.8  Cubic  inches  the  Solidity. 


iflWis  &i 


Weight  of  Square  Itolled  Iron,  from  1-4  Inch  to  12 
Inches,  and  1  I^oot  in  length. 


S.jse  in 

AVeight  In 

Size  in 

Weiglit  In 

Size  in 

Weight  in 

Inches. 

Pounds- 

0.2 

Inches. 

Pounds 

Inches. 

Pounds. 

i 

3ir 

35.7 

61 

142.8 

1 

0.5 

3f 

38.5 

6f 

154.0 

k 

0.8 

^k 

41.4 

7 

165.6 

f 

1.3 

3f 

44.4 

7i 

177.7 

4 

1.9 

31 

47.5 

71 

190.1 

^ 

2.6 

3* 

50.8 

n 

203.0 

1 

3.4 

4 

54.1 

8 

216.3 

li 

43 

4i 

57.5 

81- 

230.1 

li 

5.3 

4i 

61.1 

8+ 

244.2 

i| 

6.4 

4f 

64.7 

8f 

258.8 

i| 

-7.6 

■  4* 

68.4 

9 

273.8 

'1 

8.9 

4f 

72.3 

9i 

289.2 

If 

10.4 

4i 

76.3 

H 

305.1 

H 

11.9 

4i 

80.3 

9f 

321.3 

2 

13.5 

5 

84.5 

10 

337.9 

2i 

15.3 

5i 

88.8 

lOJ 

355.1 

2i 

17.1 

5i 

93.2 

101 

372.7 

2f 

19.1 

5f 

97.7 

lOf 

30O.6 

2^ 

21.1 

Bi 

102.2 

11 

409.0 

2| 

23.3 

5f 

107.0 

Hi- 

427.8 

2| 

25.6 

5i 

111.8 

111 

447.0 

2| 

27.9 

5i 

116.7 

iif 

466.7 

% 

S0.4 

6 

121.7 

12 

486.7 

...3 

33.0 

6i 

132.0 

106 


TABLES   OF   WEIGHT,    ETC. 


107 


Weight  of  Flat  Boiled  Iron  from  1-8x1-2  Inch  to 
1  X  G  Inches. 


Thick 

Widlh. 

W.Ightin 
Pounds. 

Tliiok: 

Width: 

Weight  In 
Founds. 

Thick: 

Width: 

Welphi  IB 

Po.nul.: 

i 

i 

0.211 

1 

4 

5.1 

5 

~3~ 

6.9 

i 

f 

0.264 

1 

4J 

5.4 

8 

n 

7.4 

i 

f 

0.316 

f 

4i 

5.7 

J 

3i 

7.9 

i 

1 

0.369 

f 

41 

6.0 

¥ 

4 

8.4 

i 

1 

0.422 

f 

5 

6.3 

ft 

8 

4J 

9.0 

i 

li 

0.475 

1 

5i 

6.7 

5 

4^ 

9.5 

i 

1 

0.8 

f 

5J 

7.0 

8 

43 

10.0 

1 

u 

1.1 

f 

5i 

7.3 

8 

5 

10.6 

k 

u 

1.3 

f 

6 

7.6 

8 

r  1 

0  3 

11.1 

i 

If 

1.5 

i 

1 

1.7 

5 

5i 

11.6 

J 

2 

1.7 

i 

u 

2.1 

I 

s 

53 

12.1 

i- 

2i 

1.9 

i 

l5 

2.5 

5 

3 

6 

12.7 

1 

2^ 

2.1 

i 

li 

8.0 

i 

1 

2.5 

i- 

21 

2.3 

i 

2 

3.4 

I 

u 

3.2 

I 

3 

2.5 

i 

2i 

3.8 

1 

li 

3.8 

i 

3i 

2.7 

\ 

2J 

4.2 

1? 

4.4 

i 

31 

S.O 

I 

2i 

4.6 

i 
5 

2 

5.1 

Jr 

31 

3.2 

1 

2 

3 

5.1 

? 

2i 

5.7 

i- 

4 

3.4 

i 

3J 

5.5 

5 

2i 

6.3 

i 

4ir 

3.6 

J 

3i 

5.9 

2-3 

70 

^ 

4i 

3.8 

i 

z'i 

6.3 

5 

3 

7.6 

Ir 

4f 

4.0 

\ 

4 

6.8 

5 

3i 

8.2 

i- 

5 

4.2 

1 

4J 

7.2 

4 

8i 

8.9 

i- 

H 

4.4 

J 

4i 

7.6 

5 

33 

9.5 

Jr 

bl 

4.6 

i 

4£ 

8.0 

4- 
2 

4 

10.1 

1 

4 

55 

4.9 

\ 

5 

8.4 

4j 

10.8 

J. 

6 

5.1 

I 

6i 

8.9 

4J 

11.4 

1 

1 

1.3 

\ 

5j 

9.3 

i 

43 

12.0 

1 

11 

1.6 

I 

5j 

9.7 

I 

5 

12.7 

f 

IJ 

1.9 

\ 

6 

10  1 

% 

5i 

13.3 

f 

a 

2.2 

1 

1 

2.1 

i 

5i 

139 

§ 

2 

2.5 

f 

u 

2.6 

% 

53 

14.6 

1 

2J 

2.9 

f 

u 

8.2 

6 

15.2 

t 

n 

3.2 

f 

It 

3.7 

li 

5.1 

f 

n 

3.5 

t 

2 

4.2 

2 

6.8 

f 

3 

3.8 

f 

2J 

4.8 

S 

10.1 

t 

Si 

4.1 

f 

2J 

5.3 

4 

13.5 

1- 

3J 

4.4 

f 

2i 

5.8 

p 

16.9 

1 

35 

4.8 

f 

3 

6.3 

6 

20.  S 

10 


108 


TABL.'OS    OF    WEIGHT,    ETC 


Wchjlit  of  Hound  Rolled  Iron  from  1-4  Inch  to  12 
Inches  in  Dlatneter,  and  1  foot  in  Length. 


P'ameter  in  Inches, 
1-d 

38 
1-2 

58 

8-4 

7-8 
1 

1  1-8 
1  1-4 
1  3-8 
1  1-2 
1  5-8 
1  3-4 

1  7-8 
2 

2  1-8 
2  1-4 
2  3-8 
2  1-2 
2  5-8 
2  8-4 

2  7-8 
3 

3  1-8 
3  1-4 
3  3-8 
3  1-2 
3  5-8 
3  3-4 

3  7-8 
4 

4  1-8 
4  1-4 
4  8-8 
4  1-2 
4  5-8 


Weight  in  Pounds. 


0.2 

0.4 

0.7 

1.0 

1.5 

2.0 

2.7 

3.4 

4.2 

5.0 

6.0 

7.0 

8.1 

9.3 

10.6 

12.0 

13.5 

15.0 

16.7 

18.8 

20.1 

21.9 

23.9 

25.9 

28.0 

80.2 

32.5 

34.9 

37.3 

39.9 

42.5 

45.2 

48.0 

50.8 

53.8 

66.8 


Diameter  in  Inches. 

Weight  in  Fonnds. 

4  3-4 

60.0 

4  7-8 

63.1 

5 

66.8 

5  1-8 

69.7 

5  1-4 

73.2 

5  3-8 

76.7 

5  1-2 

80.3 

5  5-8 

8-1.0 

5  3-4 

87.8 

5  7-8 

91.6 

6 

95.6 

6  1-4 

103.7 

6  1-2 

112,2 

6  3-4 

121.0 

7 

130.0 

7  1-4 

139.5 

7  1-2 

149.3 

7  3-4 

159.5 

8 

1C9.9 

8  1-4 

180.7 

8  1-2 

191.8 

8  3-4 

203.3 

9 

215.0 

9  1-4 

227.2     - 

9  1-2 

239.6 

9  3  4 

252.4 

10 

266.3 

10  1-4 

278.9 

10  1-2 

292.7 

10  3-4 

306.8 

11 

321.2 

11  1-4 

836  0 

11  1-2 

3.51.1 

11  3-4 

366.5 

12 

382.2 

TAV.I.KS;    or    AVEIGIIT,    ETC. 


109 


Wc'ujht  of  a  Square  Foot  of  Wrought  Iron,   Cop^ 
per  and  Lead^  from  1-16  to  2  Inches  thick. 


Wrought  Iron, 

Copper, 
Hard  Rol'd. 

Lead. 

Hard  Rol'd. 

1-16 

2.517 

2.890 

3.691 

1-8 

5.035 

5.741 

7  382 

3-16 

7.552 

8.672 

11.074 

1-  4 

10.070 

11.562 

14.765 

5-16 

12.588 

14453 

18.456 

8-8 

15.106 

17.344 

22.148 

7-16 

17.623 

20.234 

25.8:59 

1-2 

20.141 

23.125 

29.530 

9-16 

22.6.-9 

26.106 

33.222 

5-8 

25.176 

28.906 

36.913 

11-16 

27.694 

31.797 

40.604 

3-4 

S0.211 

34.688 

44.296 

13-16 

32.729 

37.578 

47.987 

7-8 

3.5.247 

40.469 

51.678 

15-16 

87.764 

43.359 

55.370 

1 

40.282 

46.250 

59.061 

li 

45.317 

52.031 

6(3.444 

H 

50.352 

57.813 

73.826 

If 

55.SS7 

63.594 

81.210 

n 

60.422 

69.375 

88.592 

H 

65.4  5S 

75.156 

95.975 

If 

70.493 

80.938 

103.35ii 

n 

75.528 

86.719 

110.740 

2 

80.563 

92.600 

118.128 

110 


tagi.es  of  weight,  etc. 


Weight  of  Copper  Bolts  from  1-4  <o  4  Inches  in  Di- 
ameter, and  1  foot  in  Length. 


Diametar. 

Pounds. 

Difuneter. 

Pounds. 

1-4 

.1892 

1  9-16 

7.3898 

5-16 

.2956 

1  5-8 

7.9931 

3-8 

.4256 

1  3-4 

9.27('2 

7-16 

.5794 

1  7-8 

lM.6420 

1-2 

.7567 

2 

12.1082 

9-16 

.9578 

2  1-8 

13  6677 

5-8 

1.1824 

2  1-4 

15.3251 

11-16 

1.4307 

2  3-8 

17.0750 

3-4 

1.7027 

2  1-2 

18.91G1 

13-16 

1.9982 

2  5-8 

2(1.8562 

7-8 

2.3176 

2  3-4 

22.8913 

15-16 

2.6605 

2  7-8 

2.5.0188 

1 

3.0270 

3 

27.2435 

1  1-16 

3.4170 

3  1-8 

29.5594 

1  1-8 

3.8312 

3  1-4 

33.9722 

1  3-16 

4.2688 

3  3-8 

34.4815 

1  1-4 

4.7298 

3  1-2 

37.0808 

1  5-16 

5.2140 

3  5-8 

39.7774 

1  3-8 

5.7228 

3  3-4 

42.5680 

1  7-16 

6.2547 

3  7-8 

45.4550 

1 1-a 

e.siog 

4 

48.4330 

TABLES 


llirnimfietieiw^s  01!  i»d>e.ci, 


NeaUEST    FRiCTIOX    OF    PRACTICAL    MEASUREMENT, 


THE     AREAS    OP    CIRCr.ES,    IN     INCHES,     AND    DECIMAL  PARTS, 

LI&EWISE     IN     FEET     AND    DECIMAL    PARTS, 

AS    MAY     CE     REQUIRED. 


Rules  that  may  render  the  following    Tables  more 
generally  useful. 

1.  Any  of  the  areas  in  inches,  multiplied  by  -04328,  or  the  areas 
in  feet  multiplied  by  6-232,  the  product  is  the  number  of  imperial 
gallons  at  1  foot  in  depth, 

2.  Any  of  the  areas  in  feet,  multiplied  by  -03704,  the  product 
e((ual  the  number  of  cubic  yards  at  1  foot  in  depth. 

[Ill] 


112 


CIRCUMFEEENCES   AND 


Ditt.  In 

Circum. 

Area  in 

Side  of 

Dia  in 

Cir.  in 

Area  In 

Area  In 

inch. 

in  incjh. 

eq.  inch. 

=  sq. 

-0554 

inch. 

It.     in. 

8q.    inch. 

aq.  ft. 

1-16 

-196 

-0030 

4  in. 

1     0^ 

12-566 

-0879 

1-8 

-392 

-0122 

-1107 

41 

1     01 

13-364 

-0935 

3-16 

-589 

-0276 

-1661 

H 

1    13 

14-186 

-0993 

1-4 

-785 

-0490 

-2115 

4j 

1  13 

15-033 

-1052 

5-16 

-981 

-0767 

-2669 

H 

1      2| 

15-904 

-1113 

3-8 

1-178 

-1104 

3223 

^ 

1     2h 

lG-800 

-1176 

7-16 

1-374 

-1503 

-3771 

H 

1     21 

17-720 

-1240 

41 

1     3i 

18-6G5 

-1306 

1-2 

1-570 

-1963 

-4331 

5  in. 

1     3| 

19-G35 

-1374 

9-16 

1-767 

-2485 

•4995 

5| 

1      4i 

20-629 

-1444 

5-8 

1-9G3 

-3:)G8 

-5438 

5| 

1     4^ 

21-647 

-1515 

11-16 

2-159 

-3712 

-6093 

5^ 

1     41 

22-690 

-1588 

3-4 

2-356 

-4417 

-6646 

5^^ 

1     5i 

23-758 

-1663 

13-16 

2-552 

-5185 

-7200 

5t 

1     5i 

24-850 

-1739 

7-8 

2-748 

-6:)i3 

-7754 

53 

1     6 

25-967 

-1817 

15-16 

2-945 

-6903 

-8308 

•^8 

1     6^ 

27-108 

-1897 

1  in. 

3i 

-7854 

7 
8 

6  in. 

1      61 

28-274 

-1979 

li 

3,1 

-9940 

1  &  3-32 

G^ 

1     7i 

29-4G4 

-2062 

U 

3i 

1-227 

1  in. 

Gi 

1     7s 

30-679 

-2147 

U 

H 

1-484 

1  3-16 

Gi 

1     8 

31-919 

-2234 

IJ 

4i 

1-7G7 

1  5-16 

6^ 

1     8i 

33-183 

2322 

n 

5| 

2-074 

1  7-16' 

H 

1    83 

34  471 

-2412 

13 

5^ 

2-405 

1  9-16' 

G3 

1     9^ 

35-784 

-2504 

u 

5| 

2-761 

1   11-16 

61 
7  in. 

1     91 

37-122 

-2598 

2  in. 

6i 

3-141 

n 

1    10 

38-484 

-2G93 

n 

61 

3-546 

u 

n 

1    10^ 

39-871 

-2791 

2i 

7 

3-97G 

2  in. 

n 

1    103 

41-282 

-2889 

2j 

7^ 

4-430 

2  i 

7^ 

1  lU 

42-718 

-2990 

4 

7i 

4-908 

2   3-16 

'^5 

1  uh 

44-178 

■3;;92 

2^ 

81 

5-412 

2   5-16 

"^'i 

1  111 

45-663 

-3196 

2J 

81 

5-939 

2   7-16 

n 

2    0^ 

47-173 

■  3299 

n 

9 

6-491 

2  9-16 

8  in. 

2    03 
2    11 

48-707 
50-265 

-3409 

3  ill 

9? 

7-068 

21 

-3518 

3i 

93 

7-669 

23 

8ff 

2    1^ 

51-848 

.3629 

H 

IfJi 

8-295 

2J 

8| 

2    11 

53-456 

-3741 

3i 

10| 

8-946 

3  in. 

85 

2     2i 

55-088 

-3856 

3i 

11 

9-621 

3i 

8^ 

2     2| 

56-745 

-3972 

n 

UJ 

10-320 

3i 

8^ 

2     3 

58-426 

.4089 

33 

Hi 

11-044 

3g 

84 

2     3;! 

69-132 

-4209 

3J 

121 

11-793 

3  7-16 

8i 

2     3i 

61-862 

.4331, 

AREAS   OF   CIRCLES. 


113 


Din.  la 

Cir 

in 

Area  in 

Area  in 

Din.  In 

Cir.  in 

Area  in 

Area  of 

Inch. 

ft. 

■  In. 

sq.  inch. 

sq.  ft. 

inch. 

ft. 

in. 

sq.  inch. 

eq.  ft. 

9  in. 

2 

4i 

63-617 

-4453 

14  in. 

3 

"'tF 

153-9.38 

1-0775 

9| 

2 

41 

C5-396 

-4577 

141 

3 

85 

156-699 

1-0968 

n 

2 

5 

67-200 

-4704 

IH 

3 

8i 

159-485 

i  1-1193 

9^ 

2 

51 

69-029 

-4832 

14^ 

3 

n 

162-295 

1-13G0 

91 

2 

H 

70-882 

-4961 

14J 

3 

9J 

165-130 

1-1569 

9| 

2 

61 

72-759 

-5093 

14| 

3 

9| 

167-989 

1  1749 

9? 

2 

6^ 

74-662 

-5226 

14J 

3 

lOi 

170-873 

1-1901 

9^ 

2 

7 

76-588 

-5361 

i^ 

3 

102 

173-782 

1-2164 

]Oin. 

2 

75 

78-540 

•5497 

15  in. 

3 

IH 

176-715 

1-2370 

m 

2 

7j 

80-515 

-5636 

15| 

3 

m 

179-672 

1-2577 

lOi 

2 

8i 

82-516 

-5776 

15i 

3 

111 

182-654 

1-2785 

]0^ 

2 

81 

84-540 

-5917 

152 

4 

Oi 

1S5-661 

1-2996 

lOJ 

2 

85 

80-590 

-6061 

15J 

4 

0| 

188-092 

1-3208 

]0| 

2 

9i 

88-664 

-6206 

15| 

4 

1 

191-748 

1-3422 

103 

2 

95 

90-702 

-6353 

15i 

4 

1^ 

194-828 

1-3637 

]0| 

2 

101 

92-855 

-6499 

151 

4 

11 

197-933 

1-3855 

11  in. 

2 

101 

95-033 

-6652 

16  in. 

4 

2i 

201-062 

1-4074 

Hi 

2 

lOJ 

97-205 

-6874 

161 

4 

25 

204-216 

1-4295 

in 

2 

lU 

9D-402 

-6958 

16J 

4 

3 

207-394 

1-4517 

11h 

2 

11? 

101-623 

-7143 

162 

4 

31 

210-597 

1-4741 

llj 

3 

Oi 

103-809 

-7290 

161 

4 

34 

213  825 

1-4967 

lis 

3 

0^ 

lOG-139 

-7429 

161 

4 

4|  217-077 

1-5195 

Hi 

3 

Og 

108-434 

-7590 

I6i 

4 

45 

220-353 

1-5424 

111 

3 

U 

110-753 

-7752 

16| 
17  in. 

4 

4 

5 

55 

223  654 
226-980 

1-5655 

12  in. 

3 

1| 

113-097 

-7916 

1-5888 

12^ 

3 

2 

115-466 

-8082 

I'^l 

4 

53 

230-330 

1-6123 

12^ 

3 

21 

117-859 

-8250 

17| 

4 

61 

233-705 

1-6359 

122 

3 

2i 

120-276 

-8419 

172 

4 

6J 

237-104 

1-6597 

m 

3 

3i 

122-718 

-8590 

1?^ 

4 

6| 

240-528 

1-6836 

12| 

3 

3S 

125-185 

-8762 

17| 

4 

75 

243-977 

1-7078 

12  J 

3 

4 

127-676 

-8937 

17^ 

4 

7i 

247-'150 

1-7321 

12| 

3 

45 

130-192 

-9113 

171 
18  in. 

4 
4 

8^ 
8^ 

250-947 
254-469 

1-7566 

13  in. 

3 

45 

132-732 

-9291 

1-7812 

13^ 

3 

5i 

133-297 

-9470 

181 

4 

8| 

258-016 

1-8061 

13i 

3 

5a 

137-880 

-9642 

m 

4 

H 

261-587 

1-8311 

13J 

3 

6 

140-500 

-9835 

182 

4 

n 

265-182 

1-8562 

13i 

3 

65 

143-139 

1-0019 

181 

4 

102 

268-803 

1-8816 

13| 

3 

6i 

145-802 

1-0206 

18| 

4 

101 

272-447 

1-9071 

131 

3 

71 

148-489 

1-0294 

18J 

4 

10| 

276-117 

1-9323 

13J 

3 

7i 

151-201 

1-0584 

181 

4 

lU 

279-811 

1-95S6 

114 


CIRCUMFERENCES   AND 


ni.i  iu 

Ci 

r.  In 

Area  in 

Area  ia 

inch, 

fi. 

in. 

sq.   int-li. 

sq.  ft. 

19  in. 

4 

lit 

283-529 

1-9847 

19| 

5 

0 

287-272 

1-9941 

I9i 

5 

0^ 

291-039 

2-0371 

J9J 

5 

0| 

294-831 

2-0637 

191 

5 

H 

298-G48 

2-0904 

19f 

5 

n 

302-489 

2-1172 

in 

6 

2 

30G-355 

2  1443 

19| 

5 

25 

310-245 

2-1716 

20  in. 

5 

21 

314-lGO 

2-1990 

201 

5 

3i 

318-099 

2-2265 

20i 

5 

8! 

322-0G3 

2-2543 

20^ 

5 

4 

32G-051 

2-2822 

20^ 

5 

M 

330-064 

2-3103 

20| 

5 

4:i 

334-101 

2-3386 

20 1 

5 

51 

338-1G3 

2-3G70 

20| 

5 

5 

5^ 

342-250 

2-3956 

21  in. 

5J 

34G-3G1 

2-4244 

21i 

5 

Off 

350-497 

2-4533 

21i 

5 

6J 

354-657 

2-4824 

2U 

5 

71 

358-841 

2-5117 

2I5 

5 

r. 

363-051 

2-5412 

21^ 

5 

n 

367-284 

2-5708 

2U 

5 

8i 

371-543 

2-6007 

211 

5 

8? 

375-826 

2-630G 

22  in. 

5 

91 

380-133 

2-6608 

221 

5 

91 

384-4C5 

2-6691 

221 

5 

9| 

388-822 

2-7016 

22J 

5 

lOi 

393-203 

2-7224 

221 

5 

log 

397-608 

2-7632 

22  i 

5 

11 

402-038 

2-7980 

221 

5 

Hi 

406-493 

2-8054 

221 

5 

111 

410-972 

2-8658 

23  in. 

6 

01 

415-476 

2-8903 

231 

6 

Of 

420-004 

2-9100 

23i 

6 

1 

424-557 

2-9318 

231 

6 

11 

429-135 

2-9937 

231 

6 

H 

433-737 

3-0129 

23| 

6 

21 

438-3G3 

3-0261 

23] 

G 

2ff 

443-014 

3-0722 

23^ 

6 

3 

447- 690 

0-1081 

Dia.  in 

Cir.  in 

Area  In 

Area  io 

ft.    in. 

ft.    in. 

Eq.  inch. 

sq.  ft. 

2     9 

6     3g 

452-390 

3-1418 

2     0{ 

G     41 

4G1-8C4 

3-2075 

2     01 

6     4| 

471-436 

3-2731 

2     01 

6     5i 

481-lOG 

3-34)0 

2     1 

G     61 

490-875 

3-4081 

2     li 

6     71 

500-741 

3-4775 

2  n 

6     81 

510-706 

3-5468 

2    H 

6     81 

520-7G9 

3-6101 

2  2 

6     91 

530-930 

3-6870 

2  21 

6  101 

541-189 

3-7583 

2     2k 

6  111 

551-547 

3-8302 

2     2iJ 

7     0 

562-002 

3-9042 

2     3 

7    03 

572-556 

3-97J1 

2     31 

7     15 

583-208 

4-0500 

2     3| 

7    21 

593-958 

4-1241 

2     3i 

7    31 

604-807 

4-20,J0 

2     4 

7     31 

015-753 

4-2760 

2     41 

7    4i 

626-798 

4-3.J21 

2     4J 

7    51 

637-941 

4-43 J2 

2     41 

7     Gi 

649-182 

4-5083 

2     5 

7     7 

660-521 

4-5861 

2      5:1 

7     71 

671-958 

4-66G5 

2     51 

7     8i 

683-494 

4-7467 

2     5j 

7     91 

695-128 

4-8274 

2     G 

7  101 

706-860 

4-9081 

2     61 

7  11 

718-690 

4-9901 

2     61 

7  11] 

730-618 

50731 

2    6:^ 

8     0} 

742-644 

5-1573 

2     7 

8     11 

754-769 

5-2273 

2     71 

8     21 

766-992 

5-3264 

2     71 

8     21 

779-313 

5-4112 

2     7^ 

8     3] 

791-732 

5-493.2 

2   -8 

8     41 

804-249 

5-585;) 

2     8'[ 

8     5. 

816-865 

5-6729 

2     81 

8     61 

829-578 

5  7G01 

2     81 

8     61 

842-390 

5-8491 

2     9 

8     7|  855-300 

5-9398 

2     91 

8     81 

868-308 

6-0291 

2     91 

8     91 

881-415 

6-12JI 

2     91 

8   10 

894-619 

6-21:^9 

AREAS    OF    CIRCLES. 


1]5 


Dia.  in 

Cir.  In 

Area  in 

Area  In 

Din  in 

c 

r  in 

Area  In 

Area  ia 

ft.  in. 

ft.  in. 

sq.  inch. 

SIJ.  ft. 

ft.  ill. 

ft. 

in. 

sq.  inch. 

sq.  ft. 

2  10 

8  lOi 

907-922 

6-3051 

3  8 

11 

6i 

1530-53 

10-559 

2  lOi 

8  11^ 

921-323 

6-3981 

3  8i 

11 

7 

1537-86 

10-679 

2  10^ 

9  0^ 

934-822 

6-4911 

3  81 

11 

n 

1555-28 

10-800 

2  lOJ 

9  11 

948-419 

6-5863 

3  8i 

11 

8i 

1572-81 

10-922 

2  11 

9  1| 

962-115 

6-6815 

3  9 

11 

9j 

1590-43 

11-044 

2  Hi 

9  2j 

975-908 

6-7772 

3  9i 

11 

lOi 

1608-15 

11-167 

2  111 

9  3^ 

989-800 

6-8738 

3  9| 

11 

m 

1625-97 

11  291 

2  111 

9  4i 

1003-79 

6-9701 

3  95 

11 

115 

1643-89 

11-415 

3  0 

9  5 

1017-87 

7-0688 

3  10 

12 

0| 

1661-90 

11-534 

3  Oi 

9  51 

1032-06 

7-1671 

3  lOi 

12 

H 

1680-02 

11-666 

3  OJ 

9  61 

1046-35 

7-2664 

3  101 

12 

2 

1698-23 

11-793 

3  OJ 

9  7^ 

] 060-73 

7-3662 

3  10^ 

12 

2J 

1716-54 

11-920 

3  1 

9  Si 

1075-21 

7-4661 

3  11 

12 

3s 

1734-94 

12-048 

3  H 

9  9 

1089-79 

7-5671 

3  m 

12 

43 

1753-45 

12-176 

3    1^2 

9  9| 

1104-46 

7-6691 

3  111 

12 

5i 

1772-05 

12-305 

3  11 

9  101 

1119-24 

7-7791 

3  lit 

12 

6 

1790-76 

12-435 

3  2 

9  II3 

1134-12 

7-8681 

4  0 

12 

Qi 

1809-56  12-566 

3  2i 

10  01 

1149-09 

7-9791 

4  Oi 

12 

71 

1828-46  12-097 

3  2| 

10  OJ 

1164-16 

8-0846 

4  01 

12 

8i 

1847-45  12-829 

3  2S 

10  n 

1179-32 

8-1891 

4   0:1 

12 

91 

1866-55 

12-962 

3  3 

10  21 

1194-59 

8-29511 

4  1 

12 

9| 

1885-74 

13-095 

3  3i 

10  3i 

1209-95 

8-4026 

4  U 

12 

m 

1905-03 

13-229 

3  31 

10  4 

1225-42 

8-5091 

4  11 

12 

111 

1924-42 

13-364 

3  31 

10    41 

1240-98 

8-6171 

4   13 

13 

Oi 

1943-91 

13-499 

3  4 

10  51 

1256-64 

8-7269 

4  2 

13 

1 

19G3-50'l3--635 

3  4i 

10  6J 

1272-39 

8-8361 

4  21 

13 

11 

1983-18  13-772 

3  4^ 

10  7i 

1 288-25 

8-9462 

4  2J 

13 

2tt 

2002-96|l3-909 

3  4J 

10  8 

1304-20 

9-0561 

4  2i 

13 

3^ 

2022-84:14-047 

3  5 

10  82 

1320-25 

9-1686 

4  3' 

13 

4i 

2042-821 14-186 

3  5J 

10  91 

1336-40 

9-2112 

4  31 

13 

5 

2062-90 

14-325 

3  5J 

10  lOi 

1352-65 

9-3936 

4  31 

13 

5| 

2083-07 

14-465 

3  52 

10  lU 

1369-00 

9-5061 

4  3i 
4  4 

13 
13 

6i 

7f 

2103-35 

14-606 

3  6 

10  Hi 

1385-44 

9-6212 

2123-72' 14-748 

3  6i 

11  03 

1401-98 

9-7364 

4  41 

13 

8^ 

2144-19' 14-890 

3  6^ 

11  li 

1418-62 

9-8518 

4  41 

13 

8i? 

2104-75  15-033 

3  6J 

11  2i 

1435-36 

9-9671 

4  43 

13 

9^ 

2185-42 

15-176 

3  7 

11  3 

1452-20 

10-084 

4  5 

13 

101 

2206-18j 

15-320 

3  n 

11  31 

1469-14 

10-202 

4  51 

13 

IH 

2227-05 

15-465 

3  n 

11  4i 

1486-17 

10.320 

4  51 

14 

0 

2248-01 

15-611 

3    T£ 

11  5J 

1503-30 

10-439 

4  5J 

14 

0| 

2269  06 

15-757 

116 


CIRCUMFERENCES    AND 


Cia.  In 

Cir 

.in 

Area  in 

Area  in 

Dia-  in 

Ci. 

in 

Area  in 

Area  in 

«.  in. 

ft. 

in. 

sq.  inch. 

sq.  ft. 

ft. 

in. 

ft. 

in. 

6q.  inch. 

Bq.  ft. 

4  6 

14 

u 

2290  22 

15-904 

5 

4 

16 

9 

3216-99 

22-333 

4  61 

14 

25 

2311-48 

16-051 

5 

4i 

16 

9? 

3242-17 

22-515 

4  6h 

14 

H 

2.332-83 

10-200 

5 

4^ 

16 

m 

3267-46 

22-021 

4  6J 

14 

4 

2354-28 

16-349 

5 

H 

16 

Hi 

3292-83 

22-8l]0 

4  7 

14 

M   2375-83 

16-498 

5 

5 

17 

0| 

3318-31 

23-043 

4  7i 

14 

51 

2397-48 

16-049 

5 

51 

17 

01 

3343-88 

23-221 

4  V, 

14 

Ql 

2419-22 

16-800 

5 

51 

17 

I3 

3369-50 

23-330 

4  V^ 

14 

n 

2441-07 

16-951 

5 

5i 

17 

21 

3395-33 

23-578 

4  8 

14 

n 

2463-01 

17-104 

5 

6 

17 

3i 

3421-20 

23-758 

4  8i 

14 

81 

2485-05 

17-257 

5 

6i 

17 

41 

3447-16 

23-938 

4  Si 

14 

H 

2507-19 

17-411 

5 

6h 

17 

41 

3473-23 

24-119 

4  Si 

14 

lOi 

2529-42 

17-565 

5 

Qi 

17 

51 

3499-39 

24-301 

4  9 

14 

11 

2551-76 

17-720 

5 

7 

17 

6,1 

3525-20 

24-483 

4  9i 

14 

lis 

2574-19 

17-876 

5 

n 

17 

n 

3552-01 

24-006 

4  91 

15 

0| 

2596-72 

18-033 

5 

1i   17 

s 

3578-47 

24-850 

4  9-i 

15 

Is 

2619-35 

18-189 

5 

'ii 

17 

8i 

3605-03 

25-034 

4  10 

15 

H 

2642-08 

18-347: 

5 

8 

17 

9f 

3031-08 

25-220 

4  10| 

15 

n 

2664-91 

18-506: 

5 

8i 

17 

log 

3658-44 

25-405 

4  101115 

35 

2087-83 

18-665' 

5 

8^117 

m 

3685-29 

25-592 

4  10^ 

15 

^ 

2710-85 

18-825 i 

5 

8i 

17 

111 

3712-24 

25-779 

4  11 

15 

51,2733-97 

18-0:5 

5 

9 

18 

0? 

3739-28 

25-004 

4  lU 

15 

61 

2757-19 

19-147 

5 

n 

IS 

1^ 

3760-43 

26-155 

4  lU 

15 

6| 

2780-51 

19-309 

5 

n 

18 

2i 

3793-07 

26-344 

4  11;! 

15 

n 

2803-92 

19-471 
19-635 

5 
5 

9i 

10 

18 

31 

3821-02 

26-534 

5  0 

15 

si 

2827-44 

18 

3| 

3848-46 

20-725 

5  0^ 

15 

9i  2851-05 

19-798 

5 

m 

18 

4s 

3875-99 

20-91 6 

5  0} 

15 

10  2874-76 

19-903 

5 

101 

18 

5^ 

3903-63 

27-108 

5  Oi 

15 

lOJ  2898-56 

20-128 

5 

10^ 

18 

H 

3931-36 

27-301 

5  1 

16 

llf  2922-47 

20-294 

5 

11 

18 

7 

3959-20 

27-494 

5  U 

16 

0^ 

2946-47 

20-401 

5 

111 

18 

n 

3987-13 

27-088 

5  li 

16 

1? 

2970-57 

20  029 

5 

11^ 

18 

8| 

4015-10 

27  883 

5  1? 

16 

1| 

2994-77 

20-797 

5 

US 

18 

9? 

4043-28 
40T1-51 

28-078 

5  2 

16 

2"j  3019-07 

20-965 

6 

0 

IS 

10| 

28-274 

5  21 

16 

3|i3043-47 

21-135 

6 

Oi 

18 

ll's 

4099  83 

28-471 

5  21 

16 

4i  3067-96 

21-305 

6 

Oil  18 

115 

4128-25 

28  063 

5  2i 

16 

51 13092-56 

21-476 

6 

03 

19 

01 

4150-77 

28  806 

5  3 

16 

5|'3Jl7-25 

21-647i 

6 

1 

19 

li 

4185-39 

29  005 

5  31  .1.3 

6i;3I42-04 

21-819 

6 

n 

19 

21 

4214-11 

29  204 

5  31  16 

7^13166-92 

21-992 

6 

n 

19 

2| 

4242-92 

29  4iiO 

5  32 

16 

8k 

3191-91 

22-166 

6 

n 

19 

31 

4271-83 

29-0U5 

AREAS   OF    CIKCLES. 


117 


DIa.  In        Cir 

.  in 

Are  ft  la 

Area  in 

Din-  In 

Cii 

.  In 

Area  in 

Areu  In 

ft.    in. 

fi. 

in. 

sq.   inch. 

.q.  ft. 

ft.  in. 

ft. 

in. 

eq.  inch. 

sq.  11. 

6     2 

19 

4i 

4300-85  29-8G7 

6     8 

20  Ui 

502G-2G 

34-906 

6     2i 

19 

5i 

4329-95 J30-0G9 

6     81 

21 

01 

5058-02 

35-125 

6     2| 

19 

6 

4359-lG 

30-271 

6     8^ 

21 

0| 

5089-58 

35-344 

6     2i 

19 

Qi 

4388-47 

30-475 

6     81 

21 

I5 

5121-24 

35-564 

6     3 

19 

'^1 

4417-87 

30-679 

G     9 

21 

2^ 

5153-00 

35-784 

0     3.i 

10 

8iT 

4447-37 

30-884 

6     9i 

21 

n 

5184-86 

36-006 

6     31 

19 

9ij 

4476-97 

31-090 

6     9^ 

21 

4 

5216-82 

36-227 

6     3i 

19 
19 

9i 
lOJ 

4506-67 
4536-47 

31-296 
31-503 

6      9rJ 

21 

42 

5248-87 

36-450 

6     4 

6  10 

21 

5^ 

5281-02 

36-674 

6     4i- 

19 

11^ 

4566-30 

31-710 

6  lOi 

21 

65 

5313-27 

36-897 

6     4^ 

20 

O'r 

4596-35J31-919  | 

6  10^ 

21 

n 

5345-62 

37-122 

6     4i 

20 

U 

4626-44 

32-114 

6  10^ 

21 

n 

5378-07 

37-347 

6     5 

20 

1| 

4656-63 

32-337 

6  11 

21 

83 

5410-62 

37-573 

6     5i 

20 

2:-; 

4G86-92 

32-548 

6   ll'f 

21 

9^ 

5443-26 

37-700 

6     5J 

20 

3i 

4717-30 

32  759 

6  m 

21 

IQl 

5476-00 

38-027 

6     51 

20 

H 

4747-79 

32-970 

6  Hi 

21 

11 

5508-84 

38-256 

6     6 

20 

5 

4778-37 

33-183 

6     6| 

20 

5^ 

4809-05 

33-396 

6     6i 

20 

6i 

4839-83 

33-619 

6     6J 

20 

•?5 

4870-70 

33-824 

6     7 

20 

8| 

4901-68 

34-039 

6     li 

20 

8| 

4932-75 

34-255 

6     7^ 

20 

9^ 

4963-92  34-471  | 

6     U 

20  lOJ 

4995-19 

34-688  1 

118 


CIUCUMFEKENCKS    AND 


Di«.  Ill 

Circum.  in 

Area  in  ft. 

Diam  in 

Circum.  In 

Area  in  ft. 

ft.  and  iu. 

i(.  and  in. 

it.  and  in. 

ft.  and  in. 

7    0 

21 

Hi 

38-4846 

10     0 

31     5 

78^5400 

1 

22 

3 

39-4060 

1 

31     81 

79-8540 

2 

22 

61 

40-3388 

2 

31   llJ- 

81-1795 

3 

22 

9i 

41-2825 

3 

32     2f 

82-5190 

4 

23 

Of 

42-2367 

4 

32     51 

83-8627 

5 

23 

2i 

43-2022 

5 

32     81 

85-2211 

6 

23 

H 

44-1787 

6 

32   llj 

S6-5903 

7 

23 

11 

45-1656 

7 

33     2| 

87-9697 

8 

24 

U 

46-1638 

8 

33     61 

89-3668 

9 

24 

41 

47-1730 

9 

33     9i 

90-7627 

10 

24 

71 

48-1926 

10 

34     0? 

92-1749 

11 

24 

10? 

49-2236 

11 

34     3J 

93-5986 

8     0 

25 

1^ 

50-2656 

11     0 

34     6| 

95-0334 

1 

25 

4| 

51-6178 

1 

34  n 

96-4783 

2 

25 

n 

52-3816 

2 

35     01 

97-9347 

3 

25 

11 

53-4562 

3 

35     41 

99-4021 

4 

26 

21 

54-5412 

4 

35     7i 

100-8797 

5 

26 

5i 

55-6377 

5 

35  lOi 

102-3689 

6 

26 

8f 

56-7451 

6 

36     U 

103-8601 

1 

26 

n^ 

57-8628 

7 

36     4| 

105-3794 

8 

27 

2 -J 

58-99:^0 

8 

36     73 

106-9013 

9 

27 

5J 

60-1321 

9 

36  101 

108-4342 

10 

27 

9 

61-2826 

10 

37     2i 

109-9772 

11 

28 

Oi 

62-4445 

11 

37     5i 

111-5319 

9     0 

28 

3i 

63-6174 

12     0 

37     8f 

113-0976 

1 

28 

6? 

64-8006 

1 

37  Hi 

114-6732 

2 

28 

Sj 

65-9951 

2 

38     21 

116-2607 

3 

29 

Of 

67-2007 

3 

38     52 

117-8590 

4 

29 

n 

68-4166 

4 

38     81 

119-4674 

5 

29 

7 

69-6440 

5 

39     0 

121-0876 

6 

29 

101 

70-8823 

6 

39     3J 

122-7187 

V 

30 

1? 

72-1309 

7 

39     6g 

124-3598 

8 

30 

4i 

72-3910 

8 

39     9i 

126-0127 

9 

30 

7J 

74-6620 

9 

40     0| 

127-6765 

10 

30 

HI 

75-9433 

10 

40     3J 

129-3504 

11 

31 

li 

77-2362 

11 

40     61   1 

131-0360 

AREAS    OF    CIKCLKS. 


iia 


PI».  In 

Circiim  in 

Area  Id  ft. 

ft.  snd  ill. 

li.  nnd  in. 

l.S  0 

4!)  10 

132-7326 

1 

41  U 

134-4391 

2 

41  45 

13G-1574 

3 

41  7| 

137-88G7 

4 

41  10^ 

139-G2G0 

5 

42  1| 

141-3771 

6 

42  4J 

143-1391 

7 

42  8 

144-9111 

8 

42  lU 

146-6949 

9 

43  2i 

148-4896 

10 

43  5^ 

150-2943 

11 

43  81 

152-1109 

14  0 

43  llj 

153-9484 

1 

44  21 

155-7758 

2 

44  6 

157-G250 

3 

44  91 

159-4852 

4 

45  Oi 

16L-3553 

5 

45  31 

1G3-2373 

6 

45  Gt 

1G5-1303 

7 

45  9J 

167-0331 

8 

46  01 

168-9479 

9 

46  4 

170-8735 

10 

46  71 

172-8091 

11 

46  Hi 

174-7565 

15  0 

47  11 

176-7150 

1 

47  4^ 

178-6832 

2 

47  li 

180-G634 

3 

47  lOJ 

182-G545 

4 

48  2i 

184-6555 

5 

48  5| 

18G-G684 

6 

48  8i 

188-G923 

7 

48  m 

190-72G0 

8 

49  2| 

192-7716 

9 

49  5J 

194-8282 

10 

49  8J 

196-8946 

U 

50  0 

198-9730] 

11 


Didin  In 

Circum.  In 

Aran  in  ft  . 

ft.  Hint  in. 

ft.  81 

d  in. 

16  0 

50 

3^ 

201-0624 

1 

50 

Ci 

203-1615 

2 

50 

9ff 

205-2726 

3 

51 

Oh 

207-3946 

4 

51 

3i 

209-5264 

5 

51 

61 

211-0703 

6 

51 

10 

2 13-8  i  51 

7 

52 

n 

215-9896 

8 

52 

M 

218-1662 

9 

52 

n 

220-3537 

10 

52 

101 

222-5510 

11 

53 

u 

224-7603 

17    0 

53 

41 

226-9806 

1 

53 

8 

229-2105 

2 

53 

111 

231-4625 

3 

54 

21 

233-7055 

4 

54 

5J 

235-9682 

5 

54 

8^ 

238-2430 

6 

54 

lU 

240-5287 

7 

55 

2? 

242-8241 

8 

55 

6 

245-1316 

9 

55 

9i 

247-4500 

10 

56 

Oi 

249-7781 

11 

56 

3J 

252-1184 

18  0 

~7 

6J- 

254-4696 

1 

56 

91 

256-8303 

2 

57 

0| 

259-2033 

3 

57 

4 

261-5872 

4 

57 

•71 

263-9807 

5 

57 

lOi 

2G6-3864 

6 

58 

Ij 

268-8031 

7 

58 

4,1 

271-2293 

8 

58 

7| 

273-6678 

9 

58 

lOi 

276-1171 

10 

59 

2 

278-5761 

11 

59 

H 

281-0472 

120 


SIZES    OF    TlN-ATAUn. 


JSizes  of  Tin-ware  in  form  of  Frustrum  of  a  cotic 


r.i». 

Diam. 

Diam. 

Height. 

Siie. 

DIsio. 

IHam. 

Height 

of    top. 

of  bot. 

i 

2  qt. 

of  top. 

of  bot. 

20  qt. 

IH  in 

13    in 

8  in 

9    in 

6    in 

3f  in 

16   " 

18 

Hi 

6i 

3  pt. 

8i 

5f 

2f 

14  u 

15i 

H 

H 

1    " 

H 

4 

as 

10  " 

I4f 

11 

H 

Pie 

9 

7* 

If 

6  " 

12f 

9 

4 

DISH    KETTLES   AND    PAIU. 


Size. 

Diam. 
of  lop: 

Diam. 
of  bot. 

Height. 

Size. 

Diam. 

of  top. 

Diam. 

of  bot. 

Height, 

14  qt. 
10    " 

18   in 

9     in 
1 

9    in 
8 

6  qt, 
2    " 

9J   in 

H   in 
4 

6iin 
4 

COFFEE    POTS 


Size. 

Diam. 

of  top. 

Diam. 
of  bol. 

Height. 

Size, 

Dinm. 
of  top: 

Diam. 

of  bot. 

Heigh., 

1  gal. 

4     in 

7     in 

8^  in 

3   qt. 

3^  in  !  6     in 

8J  in 

WASH    BOWLS. 


of  top. 


L;\  I  ge  Wash  Bowl 11 

Cullndpi' 11 

Small  Wash  Bowl 9i 

Milk  Strainer !    91 


Diam, 

of  bol^ 


5^  in. 

H 
5J 


Height, 


5  in 
5 

3i 
3i 


filZKS    OF   TIN-WARE. 


121 


DIPPERS. 

ElM, 

Dtam, 

of  top; 

Drnm, 
of  bot, 

Height.         Size, 

Diiini, 

of  top; 

Diam; 
of  bol, 

Height; 

i  g'-ll- 

6i  in 

4     in 

4    in      1   pt. 

4j   in 

3f  in 

21  in 

MEASURES. 

Size, 

IMani, 
of lup  ; 

tiam, 

of  bl.t. 

Height, 

Size. 

Diam. 

of  top; 

Dinm, 
of  bot, 

Heighi, 

1     gill, 
i    " 

1    qt. 

6^   in 

4 

3} 

4 

H   in 
8 

5^ 

1      pt. 

2i   in 
2f 

3J    in 
2| 

4iir. 
H 

DBUGOISTS'    AND    LIQUOR   DEALEUS'    MEASURES. 


Size. 

Diam. 

of      topL 

Dinm. 
of  but. 

Ilei-l.t. 

i  Kal.' 

|1       qt. 

Diam. 

of  top. 

Diam. 
of  bot. 

Heighi 

6    gal. 
3      " 
2     " 
I      " 

8       in 
1 
6 
3f 

i;5i-  in 
llj 

8^ 

I2f   in 

8| 
7i 

3iiu 

2i 

2 

H 

6^  in 

H 
4 

H 

0    in 

4 
H 

122 


TABLES    OF    WEIGHT,    ETC. 


American  Lajy  Weled  Iron  Boiler  Flues,  Manufao- 
lured  by  the  Reauixg  Ikon  CoiirANY. 


Outside 

W.  G. 

Weisht  per 

Outside 

\V,  G, 

Weight  per 

Difvnieler. 

Nos. 

Fout.al.oMt, 

Diameier, 

Sir 

Nia: 

Foot,  about 

Uin. 

16 

1  lb. 

11 

4 

H 

15 

1   1-10 

H 

10 

4J 

H 

14 

H 

4 

10 

H 

2 

13 

2 

5 

9 

n 

2i 

12 

2i 

6 

8 

10 

2i 

12 

2| 

7 

7 

13 

2i 

11 

H 

8 

6 

3 

11 

H 

Table  of  Effects  upon  Bodies  by  Heat. 

FAHRKNBEIT. 

Cast  Iron  thoroughly  smelts  at 2754" 


Fine  Gold  melts 

line  Silver  melta 

Copper  melta 

Brass  melts 

Zinc  melts 

Lead  melta 

Bismuth  rai'lts 

Tin  melts 

Tin  and  Bismuth  equal  parts 

Tin  3  parts  Bismuth  5  and  Lcail  2  melt 


1983° 

1850° 

2160° 

1900° 

740° 

594° 

476° 

4'21° 

28;:° 

212° 


■WATER  123 


WEIGHT    OF   WATER. 


l  cubic  inch is  equal  to  .03G17  pounds. 

I'i  ciibic  inches is  equal  to  .434  pounds. 

1  cubic  toot is  equal  to       62.5  pounds. 

1  cubic  foot is  equal  to         7  50  U.  S.  gallons. 

1.8  cubic  feet is  equal  to     112.00  pound.s. 

35. 84  cubic  fiet is  equal  to  2240.00  pounds. 

1  Cylindrical  inch...    is  equal  to  .02842  pounds. 

12  Cyluidrical  inches  .    is  equal  to  .341  pounds. 

1  Cylindiical  foot, . .  .    is  equal  to       49.10  pounds. 

1  Cjiind.ieal  foot, .  .  .   is  equal  to         6.00  U.  S.  gallons. 

2. 282  Cylindrical  feet  ...    is  equal  to     11200  pounds. 

45.64  Cylindrical  feet     ..    is  equal  to  2240.00  pounds. 

11.2  Imperial  gallons    ..    is  equal  to     112.00  pounds. 

224  Imperial  gallons  ...    is  equal  to  224ti.OO  pounds. 

13.44  United  States  galls,   is  equal  to     112.00  pounds. 

268.8  United  States  galls,  is  equal  to  2240.00  pounds. 

Centre  of  pressure  is  at  two-thirds  depth  from  surface. 


EFFECTS    PRODUCED   BY   WATER   IN   AN 
AERIFORM    STATE. 

When  water  in  a  vessel  is  subjected  to  the  action  of  fire  it  readi- 
ly imbibes  the  heat,  or  fluid  p\inciple  of  which  the  fire  is  the  im- 
mediate cause,  and  sooner  or  latter,  according  to  the  intensity  of 
the  heat,  attains  a  temperature  of  212''  Fahrenheit.  If,  at  this 
point  of  temperature,  the  water  bo  not  enclosed,  but  exposed  to 
atmospheric  pressure,  ebullition  will  take  place,  and  steam  or  vapor 
will  ascend  through  the  water,  carrying  with  it  the  superabundant 
heat,  or  that  which  the  water  cannot,  under  such  circumstances  of 
pressure,  absorb,  to  be  retained,  and  to  indicate  a  higher  temper- 
ture. 

Water,  in  attaining  the  aeriform  state,  is  thus  uniformly  confined 
to  the  same  laws,  under  every  degree  of  pressure ;  but,  as  the  pres- 
sure i'^  augmented,  so  is  the  indicated  temperature  proportionately 
elevated.  Hence  the  various  densities  of  steam,  and  correspond 
iiig  drgreea  of  elastic  force. 


124  WATEK. 


PRACTICAL  PROPERTIES    OF   WATER. 


By  analysis  it  is  ascertained,  that  water  is  composed  of  the 
gases  oxygen  and  hydrogen  in  a  state  of  chemical  union  ;  its  dis- 
tinguishing properties,  like  that  of  other  liquids,  being  nearly 
incompressible  gravity,  capability  of  flowing,  and  constant  tend- 
ency to  press  outwards  in  every  direction  ;  also  that  of  being 
easily  changed  by  the  absorption  of  caloric  to  an  aeriform  state  of 
any  required  density  or  degree  of  elastic  force:  hence  the  prin- 
ciple of  the  hydraulic  press,  the  water-wheel,  the  steam  engine,  &(!. 


Effects  produced  by  Water  in  its  Natural  State. 

Because  of  liquids  possessing  the  properties  of  gravity  and 
capability  of  flowing  freely  in  every  direction,  sides  of  vessels, 
flood  gates,  sluices,  &c.,  sustain  a  pressure  equal  to  the  product 
of  the  area  multiplied  by  half  the  depth  of  the  fluid,  and  by  its 
gravity  in  equal  terms  of  unity. 

But  when  a  sluice  or  opening  through  which  a  liquid  may  issue 
is  under  any  given  continued  head,  the  pressure  is  equal  the  pro- 
duct of  the  area  multiplied  into  the  height  from  the  centre  of  the 
opening  to  the  surface  of  the  fluid. 

Example  1. — Required  the  pressure  of  water  on  the  sides  of  a 
cistern  18  feet  in  length,  13  in  width  and  9  in  depth. 

The  terms  of  measurement  or  unity  are  in  feet ;  1  cubic  foot  ol 
water  =  62-5  lbs. ;   hence, 

18  X  9  X  2  +  13  X  9  X  2  —  558  X  4-5  X  62.5  =  156937.5  lbs. 
weight  of  water  on  bottom  =18X18X9X62.5  =  131625  lbs. 

Example  2. — Required  the  pressure  on  a  sluice  S  feet  square, 
and  its  centre  30  feet  from  the  surface  of  the  water 

3  X  3  X  30  X  62.5  =  16875  &s.  pressure. 


HEAT.  1 2? 


HEAT. 


Effects  of  Heat  at  certain  Temperatures. — Griee. 

Tin  and  Bismuth,  equal  parts,  melt  at  283  degrees,  Fahrenheit ; 
tin  melts  at  442  ;  polished  steel  acquires  straw  color  at  460  ;  bis- 
muth melts  at  470;  sulphur  burns  at  500;  oil  of  turpentine  boils 
at  500;  polished  steel  acquires  deep  blue  color  at  680  ;  lead  melts 
at  594  ;  linseed  oil  boils  at  600  ;  quicksilver  boils  at  660  ;  zinc  melts 
at  700;  iron,  bright  red  in  the  dark  at  752  ;  iron,  red-hot  in  twilight 
at  884;  red  heat  fully  visible  in  daylight  at  1077;  brass  melts  at 
3807;  copper  melts  at  4587  ;  silvers  melts  at  4717 ;  gold  melts  at 
5237 ;  welding  heat  of  iron,  from  12777  ;  welding  heat  of  iron,  to 
13427;  greatest  heat  of  smith's  forge  17327;  cast  iron  begins  to 
melt  at  17977  ;  cast  iron  thoroughly  melted  at  20577. 


TEMPERING. 

The  article  after  being  completed,  is  hardened  by  being  heated 
gradually  to  a  bright  red,  and  then  plunged  into  cold  water;  it  is 
then  tempered  by  being  warmed  gradually  and  equably,  either  over 
a  fire,  or  on  a  piece  of  heated  metal  till  of  the  color  corresponding 
to  the  purpose  for  which  it  is  required,  as  per  table  below,  when  it 
is  again  plunged  into  water. 

Corresponding  Temperature. 
A  very  pale  straw  -     430°     Lancets  ) 
Straw      -         -        -     450°     Razors    f 

Darker  straw  -        -     470°     Penknives  >      All  kinds  of  wood  tools 
Yellow     -         -        -    490°     Scissors     \       Screw  taps. 
Brown  yellow  -        -     500°^    Hatchets,  Chipping  Chisels, 
Slightly  tinged  purple  520°|-     Saws. 

Purple      ...     SSO'')    All  kinds  of  percussive  tools. 
Diiik  purple     -        -     550°     „     . 
Blue  "^     \        .        .     570°i    ^P""g^- 
Dark  blue        -        -    600°     Soft  for  saws. 


To  Temper  by  the  Thermometer. 

Put  the  articles  to  be  tempered  into  a  vessel  cantaining  sujBScient 
quantity  to  cover  them,  of  Oil  or  Tallow ;  Sand  ;  or  a  mixture  of  8 
parts  bismuth,  5  of  lead,  and  3  of  tin,  the  whole  to  be  brought  up 
to,  and  kept  up  at  the  heat  corresponding  to  the  hardness  required, 
by  means  of  a  suitable  thermometer,  till  heated  equally  throngh- 
out;  the  articles  are  then  withdrawn  and  plunged  into  cold  water. 

If  no  thermometer  is  available,  it  may  be  observed  that  oil  or 
tallow  begins  to  smoke  at  430°  or  straw  color,  and  that  it  takes 
fire  on  a  light  being  presented,  and  goes  out  when  the  light  is  with- 
drawn, at  570°  or  blue. 


126 


PROPERTIES    OF    AIR. 


EFFECTS   PRODUCED   BY   AIR  IN  ITS  NA- 
TURAL AND  ALSO  IN  A  RAREFIED 
STATE. 

The  weight  or  pressure  of  the  atmosphere  is  equal  to  the  weig]it 
of  a  column  of  water  o4  feet  in  height,  or  to  a  column  of  mercury 
30  inches  in  height,  or  to  14.7  lbs.  average  per  square  inch,  at  a 
mean  temperature.  But  air,  like  all  other  gases,  is  rendered  light- 
er by  the  application  of  heat ;  for  then  the  particles  o*'  the  mass 
are  repelled  from  each  other,  or  rarefied,  and  occupy  a  greater 
space.  Rarefied  air,  being  specifically  lightest,  mounts  above  that 
of  common  density ;  hence  change  of  temperature,  and  the  prin- 
ciple cause  of  winds. 


Table  of  the  Expansion  of  Atmospheric  Air  by  Heat. 


Decrees  of 

Bulk. 

Deg:ree3  of 

Bulk. 

Decrees  of 

Bulk. 

Fahrenheit. 

Fahvenheii. 

Fahrenheit. 

32° 

1000 

650 

1077 

100° 

1 1  52 

3.5 

1007 

70 

1089 

120 

1194 

40 

1021 

75 

1009 

140 

1235 

45 

1032 

80 

1110 

160 

1275 

50 

1043 

85 

1121 

180 

1315 

55 

1055 

90 

1132 

2tiO 

1364 

fiO 

1066 

95 

1142 

212 

1376 

The  pressure  or  gravity  of  the  atmosphere,  being  equal  to  a 
column  of  water  34  feet  in  heicht,  is  the  means  or  principle  on 
which  rests  the  utility  of  the  coninion  pump,  also  of  the  syphon 
and  all  other  such  hydraulic  applications.  In  a  pump,  the  inter- 
nal pressure  on  the  surface  of  the  liquid  is  removed  by  the  action 
of  the  bucket ;  and  as  by  degrees  the  density  becomes  lessened, 
so  the  water  rises  by  the  external  pressure  to  the  above  named 
height;  and  at  such  height  it  will  rcmnin,  unless,  by  some  de- 
rangement of  consi  ruction  taking  place,  the  atmospheric  fluid  is 
allowed  to  enter  and  displace  the  liquid  column.  But  observe,  if 
the  temperature  of  the  water  or  other  liquid  be  so  elevated  that 
eteam  or  vapor  arisi*  through  it,  then,  according  to  the  vapor's  ac- 
cumulation of  density,  may  the  action  of  the  pump  be  partially  or 
wholly  destroyed  ;  and  the  only  means  of  evasion  in  such  cases  is, 
to  place  the  working  bucket  beneath  the  surface  of  the  liquid 
which  is  required  to  be  raised. 


TIN    PLATES. 

127 

Size 

,  Length,  Breadth  and   Weight. 

Eranil  Mark- 

No.  of 
Shoels 

LeiiRtt  nnd 

^v 

iuhl   per 

ill  lii.x. 

Breadth. 

IJux. 

Inches.      Inches. 

Cwt 

qr.    lbs. 

1  c 

225 

14  by  10 

0     0 

^ 

1     X 

225 

1-4  by  10 

1     0 

1     XX 

225 

14  by  10 

1   21 

1    XXX 

225 

14  by  10 

2   14 

. 

1    XXXX 

225 

14  by  10 

■'■ 

3     7 

1    XXXXX 

225 

14  by  10 

2 

0     0 

1    XXXXXX 

225 

14  by  10 

2 

0  21 

. 

D  C 

100 

17  by  I2i 

0 

3  14 

D  X 

100 

IV  by  12i 

1 

0  14 

D  XX 

100 

17  by  12i 

1 

1     1 

D  XXX 

100 

17  bv  12i 

1 

2     0 

D  XXXX 

100 

17  b>  12i 

1 

2  21 

D  XXXXX 

100 

17  bv  12i 

1 

3  14 

D  XXXXXX 

100 

17  by  12^ 

2 

0-    1 

S  D  C 

200 

15  by  11 

1 

I  27 

S  D  X 

200 

15  by  11 

1 

2  20 

S  D  XX 

200 

15  by  11 

1 

3  13 

S  D  XXX 

200 

15  by  11 

2 

0     6 

S  D  XXXX 

200 

15  by  11 

2 

0  27 

S  D  XXXXX 

200 

15  by  11 

2 

1  20 

S  D  XXXXXX 

200 

15  by  11 

2 

2  13 

Crystallized  Tin-Plate. 

Crystallized  tin-plate,  is  a  variegated  primrose  appearance,  pro- 
duced upon  the  surface  of  tin-plate,  by  applying  to  it  in  a  heated 
state  some  dilute  nitro-muriatic  acid  for  a  few  seconds,  then  wash- 
ing it  with  water,  drying,  and  coating  it  with  lacker.  The  figui-es 
are  more  or  less  beautiful  and  diversified,  according  to  the  degree 
of  heat,  and  relative  dilution  of  the  acid.  Place  the  tin-plate 
slightly  heated  over  a  tub  of  water,  and  rub  its  surface  with  a  sponge 
diped  in  a  liquor  composed  of  four  parts  of  aquafortis,  and  two  of 
distilled  water,  holding  one  of  common  salt  sal  ammoniac  in  solu- 
tion. Whenever  the  crysiallino  spangles  seem  to  be  thoroughly 
brought  out,  the  plate  must  be  immersed  in  water,  washed  cither 
with  a  feather  or  a  little  cotton  (taking  care  not  to  rub  off  the  film 
of  tin  that  forms  the  feathering),  forthwith  dried  with  a  low  heat, 
and  coated  with  a  lacker  varnish,  otherwise  it  loses  its  lustre  in  the 
air.  If  the  whole  surface  is  not  plunged  at  once  in  cold  water,  but 
if  it  be  partially  cooled  by  sprinkling  water  on  it,  the  crystalliztion 
will  be  finely  variegattd  with  large  and  small  figures.  Similar  results 
will  be  obtained  by  blowing  cold  air  through  a  pipe  on  the  tinned 
surface,  while  it  is  just  passing  from  the  iused  to  the  solid  state. 


128 


WEIGHTS    OF    LEAT>    PIPES,    ETC. 


List  of  Calibre  and  Weights  of  Lead  Pipe. 


Calibre. 

■Weight 

Av. 

Calibre. 

Weight 

Av. 

per  ?t. 

length. 

per 

foot. 

lengm. 

IhB.        01. 

ft. 

lbs. 

oz 

ft. 

iin 

light    .... 

8 

300 

1|-  in.  medium    . 

5 

4 

28 

Strong  .  .  . 

12 

225 

strong  .  .  . 

6 

4 

24 

ex.   strong 

1     4 

120 

ex.  strong 

7 

2 

21 

1  in 

light  .... 

12 

225 

Ifin.  ex.  light  . 

3 

12 

42 

medium  .. 

1 

150 

light 

4 

8 

33 

strong  .  . . 

1     8 

100 

medium. . 

5 

8 

27 

ex.  strong 

2 

•75 

strong  .  .  . 

6 

8 

23 

J  in 

light  .... 

1 

150 

ex.  strong 

8 

4 

18 

medium  . . 

1     4 

120 

2  in.  ex   light  . 

4 

8 

33 

strong  .  .  . 

1   12 

85 

light 

5 

8 

27 

ex.   strong 

2     7 

60 

medium. . 

7 

21 

f  in 

ex.  light  . 

1     4 

120 

strong  . . . 

8 

18 

light  .... 

1    12 

85 

ex.   strong 

9 

8 

15 

medium  . . 

2     4 

65 

U  in.  3  16  thick 

7 

13 

15 

strong 

2     8 

60 

J  thick   . . 

8 

13 

15 

ex.   strong 

3 

50 

5-16  thick 

13 

11 

15 

|in 

ex.  light  . 

1     8 

ImO 

f  thick  .. 

16 

12 

15 

liglit 

2 

75 

3  in.  waste.    . . 

6 

15 

medium  .. 

2     8 

60 

3  16  thick 

9 

5 

15 

strong  . . . 

S 

50 

i  thick  .. 

12 

10 

15 

ex.   strong 

3  10 

.43 

5  16  thick 

16 

15 

1  in 

ex    light  . 

2     4 

65 

•I  thick  . . 

19 

11 

15 

light   .... 

2   12 

55 

Si^  in.  J  thick     . 

15 

15 

medium  .  . 

3     8 

45 

5-16  thick 

18 

5 

15 

strong  .  .  . 

4 

38 

f  thick   .. 

21 

12 

15 

ex.    strong 

3  12 

42 

1\Q  thick 

26 

41 

15 

U  in 

ex.  light  . 

2  12 

55 

4  in.  waste.  . . . 

5 

6 

15 

light 

3     4 

40 

J  thick   .. 

16 

12 

15 

medium  .. 

4 

38 

5-16  thick 

21 

15 

strong  .  .  . 

4     8 

33 

f  thick   . . 

25 

4 

15 

ex.   strong 

6 

25 

7-16  thick 

80 

15 

1|  in. 

ex.  light  . 

3     8 

45 

4^  in.  waste. . . . 

5 

12 

15 

light  .... 

4     4 

35 

5    in.  waste. . .  . 

8 

15 

Calibre  c&  Weights  of  Fountains  or  Aqueduct  Pipes. 

fsiy  light  Lead  Pipe  for  Hydraulic  Rams,  and  for  conducting  water  at  long  dis- 
tances, under  sliglit  pressure  or  head  of  water. 


i-  inch 
I  inch 
^  inch 
i  inch 


6 

1600 

f  inch 

1     2 

550 

8 

1200 

|1     inch 

1   12 

400 

10 

1000 

li  inch 

2 

250 

12 

900 

1^  inch 

2     4 

200 

■WEIOllTS    OF    riPES,    ETC. 


129 


To  ascertain  the  Weights  of  Pipes  of  various  Metals^ 
and  any  Diameter  required. 


Thich, 

Wr'ght 

Copper. 

Load. 

Thick. 

Wr'ght 

Copper. 

Lead 

ioch. 

Iron. 

Inch. 

Iron. 

1-32 

.326 

.38 

.483 

5-32 

1.627 

1.9 

2.417 

1-10 

.653 

.76 

.967 

8-16 

1.95 

2.28 

2.9 

3-32 

.976 

1.14 

1.45 

7-32 

2.277 

2.6G 

3.383 

1-8 

1.3 

1.52 

1.933 

1-4 

2.6 

3.04 

3.867 

R'TLE. — To  the  interior  diameter  of  the  pipe,  in  inches,  add  the 
thicliness  of  the  metal ;  multiply  the  sum  by  the  decimal  number 
opposite  the  required  thickness  and  under  the  metal's  name  ;  also 
by  the  length  of  tlie  pipe  in  feet ;  and  the  product  is  the  weight  of 
the  pipe  in  pounds. 

1.  Required  the  weight  of  a  copper  pipe,  whose  interior  diameter 
is  2J  inches,  its  length  20  feet,  and  the  metal  \  of  an  inch  in  thick- 
ness. 

2.25  +  .125  =  2.375  X  1.52  x  20  =  72.2  fcs. 


Weight  of  a  Square  Foot  of  Sheel-Iron^  Copper,  and 
Urass,  as  per  JBirmingham  Wire  Gauge. 


Ko.  of 

Iron. 

Copper. 

Brass, 

No.  of 

Iron. 

Galv. 

Copper. 

Brass. 

Guage. 

Guage. 

Iron- 

1 

12.5 

14.5 

13.75 

16 

2.62 

3. 

2.9 

2.75 

2 

12. 

13.9 

13.2 

17 

2.20 

2.69 

2.52 

2.4 

3 

11. 

12.75 

12.1 

18 

1.92 

2.31 

2.15 

2.04 

4 

10.5 

11.6 

11. 

19 

1.75 

2.07 

1.97 

1.87 

5 

9. 

.10.1 

0.61 

20 

1.54 

1.75 

1.78 

1.69 

6 

8.34 

94 

8.93 

21 

1.4 

1.5 

1.62 

1.54 

7 

7.5 

8.7 

8.25 

22 

1.25 

1.32 

1.45 

1.37 

8 

6.86 

7.9 

7.54 

23 

1.13 

1.19 

1.3 

1.28 

9 

6.29 

7.2 

6.86   ' 

24 

1.02 

1.06 

1.16 

1.1 

10 

5  62 

65 

6.18    i 

25 

.9 

1. 

1.04 

.99 

11 

5. 

5.8 

6.5 

26 

.8 

.96 

.92 

88 

12 

4.5 

5.08 

4.81 

27 

.75 

.88 

.83 

.79 

13 

4. 

4.34 

4.12 

28 

.65 

.75 

.74 

.7 

14 

3.23 

3.6 

3.43 

29 

.58 

.69 

.«! 

.61 

15 

2.97 

3.27 

3.1 

UQ 


-V  *- 


WEIGUTS    OF    VARIOUS    SU  INSTANCES. 


Recd'pitulatlon  of  Weights    of  Various  Substances. 


Cast  iron 

Wrought  iron.  . . 

Sccei 

Copper  

L'-.id 

Brass 

Tin   

White  pine    . 

Sale  water  (sea). 
Fresh  waier  . . . . 

Air 

Steam 


Cubic  feet  in  lb3.  I        Cubic  inch  in  lbs. 


450.55 

.2607 

486.65 

.2816 

489.8 

.2834 

555. 

.32118 

708.85 

.41015 

537.75 

.3112 

456. 

.263 

29.56 

.0171 

64.3 

.03721 

62.5 

.03616 

.07529 

.03689 

Cast  Iron  expands  resooo  of  its  length  for  one  degree  of  heat ; 
greatest  change  in  the  shade,  in  this  climate  ;-,-.--  of  its  length  ; 
exposed  to  the  sun's  ravs,  ,-i—  ;  shrinks  in  cooling  from  —  to  . . 
of  its  length  ;  is  crushed  by  a  force  of  93.000  lbs.  upon  a  square 
inch  ;  will  bear,  without  permanent  alteration,  15.300  ibs.  upon 
a  square  inch,  and  an  extension  of  y----  of  its  length.  Weight 
of  modulus  of  elasticity  for  a  base  of  an  inch  square,  18,400,000 
&9.  ;  height  of  modulus  of  elasticity,  5,750,000  feet. 

Wrought  Iron  expands  nyooo  ^^  '^^  length  for  one  degree  of 
heat ;  will  bear,  on  a  square  inch,  without  permanent  alteration, 
17,800  Bbs.,  and  an  extension  in  length  of  ,4^^  ;  cohesive  force  is 
diminished  3-^^  by  an  increase  of  one  degree  of  heat.  Weight 
of  modulus  of  elasticity  for  a  base  of  an  inch  square,  24,920,000 
lbs.  ;  height  of  modulus  of  elasticity  7,650,000  feet. 


\Trie  following  Receipts  are  selected  from  "  Ure's  Dictionary,"  "  Cooley's  Cy- 
clopedia," "  Muspratt'3  Chemistry,"  and  other  valuable  sources.] 


JAPANNING  AND  VARNISHING. 

Japanni.no  is  the  art  of  covering  bodies  by  grounds  of  opaque 
coJors  in  vurnisli,  wliicli  may  be  afterwards  decorated  by  printing 
or  gilding,  or  left  in  a  plain  state.  It  is  also  to  be  looked  upon  in 
another  sense,  as  that  of  ornamenting  coaches,  snuff  boxes,  screens, 
&c.  All  surfaces  to  be  japanned  must  be  perfectly  clean,  and 
leather  should  be  sti'etched  on  frames.  Paper  should  be  stiff  for 
japanning. 

The  French  prime  all  their  japanned  articles,  the  English  do 
not.  This  priming  is  generally  of  common  size.  Those  articles, 
that  are  primed  thus,  never  endure  as  well  as  those  that  receive  the 
japan  coating  on  the  first  operation,  and  thus  it  is  that  those  ar- 
ticles of  japan  work  that  are  primed  witli  size  when  they  are  used 
for  some  time,  crack,  and  the  coats  of  japan  fly  off  in  flakes. 

A  solution  of  strong  isinglass  size  and  honey,  or  sugar  candy, 
makes  a  good  japan  varnish  to  cover  water  colors  on  gold  grounds. 

A  pure  white  priming  for  japanning,  for  the  cheap  method,  is 
made  with  parchment  size,  and  one-third  of  isinglass,  laid  on  very 
thin  and  smooth.  It  is  the  better  for  three  coats,  and  when  the 
last  coat  is  dry,  it  is  prepared  to  receive  the  painting  or  figures. 
Previous  to  the  la.-t  coat,  however,  the  work  should  be  smoothly 
polished.  When  wood  or  leather  is  to  be  japanned,  and  no  prim- 
ing used,  the  best  plan  is  to  lay  on  two  or  three  coats  of  varnish 
made  of  seed-lac  and  resin,  two  ounces  each,  dissolved  in  alcohol 
and  strained  through  a  cloth.  This  varnish  should  be  put  on  in  a 
warm  place,  and  the  work  to  be  varnished  should,  if  po.ssib'e,  be 
warm  also,  and  all  dampness  should  be  avoided,  to  prevent  the 
varnish  from  being  chilled.  When  the  work  is  prepared  with  the 
above  composition  and  dry,  it  is  fit  for  the  proper  japan  to  be  laid 
on.  If  the  ground  is  not  to  be  whits  the  best  varnish  now  to  be 
used  is  made  of  shellac,  as  it  is  the  best  vehicle  for  all  kind  of 
colors.  This  is  made  in  the  proportions  of  the  best  shellac,  five 
ounces,  made  into  powder,  steeped  in  a  quart  of  alcohol,  and  kept 

12  [1311 


K52  PRACTICAL   KECEIPTS. 

at  a  gi'iitlc  heat  for  two  or  three  days  and  shaken  fn'(]iii>ntly.  nftor 
which  '.he  solution  must  be  filtered  througli  a  flannel  bug,  and  kept 
in  a  well  corked  bottle  for  use.  This  varnish  for  hard  japanning 
on  copper  or  tin  will  stand  for  ever,  unless  lire  or  hammer  be  used 
to  burn  or  beetle  it  off. 

The  color  to  bo  used  with  shellac  varnish  may  be  of  any  pig- 
ments whatever  to  give  the  desired  shade,  as  this  varnish  will  mix 
with  tny  color. 

WHITE    JAPAN    GROUND. 

To  form  a  hard,  perfect  white  ground  is  no  easy  matter, 
as  the  substances  which  are  generally  used  to  make  the  japan 
hard,  have  a  tendency,  by  a  number  of  coats,  to  look  or 
become  dull  in  brightness.  One  white  ground  is  made  by 
the  following  composition :  white  flyke  or  lead  washed  over  and 
ground  up  with  a  sixth  of  its  weight  of  starch,  then  dried  and 
mixed  with  the  finest  gum,  ground  up  in  parts  of  one  ounce  gum, 
to  half  an  ounce  of  rectified  turpentine  mixed  and  ground  thor- 
oughly together.  This  is  to  be  finely  laid  on  the  article  to  be  jiip- 
anned,  dried,  and  then  varnished  with  five  or  six  ccats  of  the  fol- 
lowing :  two  ounces  of  the  whitest  seed-lac  to  three  ounces  of  gum- 
anima  reduced  to  a  fine  powder  and  dissolved  in  a  quart  of  alcohol. 
This  lac  must  be  carefully  picked.  Yov  a  softer  varnish  than  this, 
a  little  turpentine  should  be  added,  and  less  of  the  gum.  A  very 
good  varnish  and  not  brittle,  may  be  made  by  dissolving  gum- 
anima  in  nut  oil,  boiling  it  gently  as  the  gum  is  added,  and  giving 
the  oil  as  much  gum  as  it  will  take  up.  The  ground  of  white  var- 
nish may  of  itself  be  made  of  this  varnish,  by  giving  two  or  three 
coats  of  it,  but  when  used  it  should  be  diluted  with  pure  turpen- 
tine. Although  this  varnish  is  not  brittle  it  is  liable  to  be  indent- 
ed with  strokes,  and  it  will  not  bear  to  be  polished,  but  if  well 
laid  on  it  will  not  need  polishing  afterwards  ;  it  also  takes  some 
time  to  dry.  Heat  applied  to  all  oils,  however,  darkens  their 
color,  and  oil  varnishes  for  white  grow  very  yellow  if  not  exposed 
to  a  full  clear  light. 

GUM   COPAL. 

Copal  varnish  is  one  of  the  very  finest  varnishes  for  japan- 
ing  purposes.  It  can  be  dissolved  by  linseed  oil,  rendered  dry  by 
adding  some  quicklime  at  a  beat  somewhat  less  than  will  boil 
or  decompose  the  oil  by  it. 

This  solution,  with  the  addition  of  a  little  turpentine,  forms  a 
very  transparent  varnish,  which,  when  properly  applied  and  slowly 
dried  is  very  bard  and  durable.  This  varnish  is  applied  to  snuff 
boxes,  tea  boards  and  other  utensils.  It  also  preserves  paintings 
and  renders  their  surfaces  capable  of  reflecting  light  more  uni- 
formly. 

If  powered  copal  be  mixed  in  a  mortar  with  camphor,  it  softens 
aad  becomes  a  coherent  mass,  and  if  camphor  be  added  to  alcohol 


PRACTir'AL    RECKIPTS.  133 

it  boi'nincs  an  oxotllciit  solvent  of  oopsil  liy  iuMiii'ji;  the  copal  well 
gioiiml.    ;iiid    cinployinj;    a    tolorabk'    dcgieo    ol'  lioat,  having  tlie 
vessel  well  eorked  whieli  must  have  a  lonif  neek  for  the  allowance 
of  expansion,  and  the  vessel   must  oidy  be  about  onefouitli  lilled 
with  the   mixture.      Copal  can  also  be  incorporated  with  turpen- 
tine, with  one  part  of  powdered  copal  to  twelve  parts  of  pure  tur- 
pentine, subjeead  to  the  heat  of  ii  sand-bath  for  several  days  in 
a  long  necked  mattress,  shaking  it  frequently. 
I      Copal  is  a  good  varnish  for  metals,  such  as  Cm;  the  varnish  mu~t 
I  be  dried  in  an  oven,  each  coat,  and  it  can  be  colored   with  some 
'  substances,  but  alcohol  varnish  will  mix  with  any  coloring  mattei. 
i  For  white  japans  or  varnishes,  we   have  already   shown  that  line 
chalk  or  wliite  lead  was  used  as  a  basis,  and  the  varnishes  coated 
over  it. 

To  japan  or  varnish  wb.ite  leather,  so  that  it  may  be  elastic,  is 
aUogether  a  dift'erent  work  from  varnishing  or  japanning  wood  or 
metal,  or  papier  mache. 

For  white  leather  oil  is  the  principal  ingredient,  as  it  is  well 
known  that  chalk  is  extensively  used  to  give  white  leather  its  pure 
color,  or  speaking  more  philosophically,  its  fair  colorless  whiteness. 
White  leather  having  already  the  basis  of  white  varnish,  it  should 
get  a  light  coat  of  the  pure  varnish,  before  mentioned,  and  dric  d 
well  in  the  oven,  or  a  coat  of  the  oil  copal  will  answer  very  well. 
This  being  well  dried,  boiled  nut  oil  nicely  coated  and  successively 
dried,  will  make  a  most  beautiful  white  varnish  for  leather,  not  li- 
able to  crack.  This  cfuality  takes  a  long  time  to  dry,  and  of  course 
is  more  expensive.  Coarse  varnish  inay  bo  made  of  boiled  linseed 
oil,  into  which  is  added  gradually  the  acetate  of  lead  asadiier. 
This  addition  must  be  done  very  cautiously  as  the  oil  will  be  apt  to 
foam  over. 

A  better  and  more  safe  drying  mixture  than  the  mere  acetate  of 
lead,  is,  to  dissolve  the  acetate  of  lead  in  a  small  quantity  of  water, 
neutralize  the  acid  with  the  addition  of  pipe  clay,  evaporate  the 
seiinnent  to  perfect  dryness,  and  feed  the  oil  when  gently  boiling 
gradually  with  it. 

These  varnishes  or  japans^  as  far  as  described,  have  only  refer- 
ence to  white  grounds. 

There  is  sojae  nice  work  to  be  observed,  and  there  is  much  in 
applying  the  virnishes  at  the  right  time,  knowing  by  the  eye  the 
proper  moment  when  the  mixture  is  perfect,  or  when  to'add  any 
ingredient.     These  things  requite  practice. 

BLACK     GROUNDS. 

Black  grounds  for  japans  may  be  made  by  mixing  ivory 
black  with  shellac  varnish;  or  for  coarse  work,  lamp  black  and 
the  top  coating  of  common  seedlac  vainish.  A  common  black 
japan  may  be  made  by  painting  a  piece  of  work  with  drying 
oil,  (  oil  mixed  with  lead,)  and  putting  the  work  into  a  stove,  not 
100  hot,  but  of  such  a  degree,  gradually  rai^ing  the  heat  and  keep- 


134  PRACTK.'AL   RECEIPTS. 


ing  it  up  for  a  long  time,  so  as  not  to  burn  the  oil  and  make  h 
blister.  This  process  makes  very  fair  japan  and  requires  no  pol- 
ishing. 

BLACK    JAPAN. 

Naples  asphaltura  fifty  pounds,  dark  gum-amime  eight  pounds, 
use,  add  linseed  oil  twelve  gallons,  boil,  add  daiJc  gum  amber  ten 
pounds,  previously  fused  and  boiled  with  linseed  oil  two  gallons, 
add  the  driers,  and  proceed  as  last.     Used  for  wood  or  metals. 

BRUNSWICK    BLACK. 

1.  Foreign  asphaltum  forty-five  pounds,  drying  oil  six  gallons, 
litharge  six  pounds,  boil  as  last,  and  thin  with  twenty  five  gal- 
lons of  oil  of  turpentine.  f/«eci  for  ironwork.  &c.  2.  Black  pitch 
and  gas  tar  asphaltum,  of  each  twenty-five  pounds,  boil  gently 
for  five  hours,  then  add  linseed  oil  eight  gallons,  litharge  and  red 
lead,  of  each  ten  pounds,  boil  as  before,  and  thin  with  oil  of  tur- 
pentine twenty  gallons.     Inferior  to  the  last,  but  cheaper. 

BLUE    JAPAN    GROUNDS. 

Blue  japan  grounds  may  be  formed  of  bright  Prussian  blue.  The 
color  may  be  mixed  with  shellac  varnish,  and  brought  to  a  polish- 
ing state  by  five  or  six  coats  of  varnish  of  seed-lac.  The  varnish, 
however,  is  apt  to  give  a  greenish  tinge  to  the  blue,  as  the  varnish 
has  a  yellowish  tinge,  and  blue  and  yellow  form  a  green.  When- 
ever a  light  blue  is  desired,  the  purest  varnish  must  always  be 
used. 

SCARLET    JAPAN. 

Ground  vermilion  may  be  used  for  this,  but  being  so  glaring  it 
is  not  beautiful  unless  covered  over  with  rose-pink  or  lake,  which 
have  a  good  effect  when  thus  used.  For  a  very  bright  crimson 
ground,  safflower  or  Indian  lake  should  be  used,  always  dissolved 
in  the  alchohol  of  which  the  varnish  is  made.  In  yjlaco  of  this 
lake,  carmine  may  be  used,  as  it  is  more  common.  The  top  coat  of 
varnish  must  always  be  of  the  white  seedlac,  which  has  been  be- 
fore described,  and  as  many  coats  given  as  will  be  thought  prop- 
er ;  it  is  easy  to  judge  of  this. 

YELLOW    GROUNDS. 

If  turmeric  be  dissolved  in  the  spirit  of  wine  and  strained  through 
a  cloth,  and  then  mixed  with  pure  seed-lac  varnish,  it  makes  a  good 
yellow  japan.  Saffron  will  answer  for  the  same  purpose  in  the 
6;:me  way,  but  the  brightest  yellow  ground  is  made  by  a  primary 
coat  of  pure  crome  yellow,  and  coated  successively  with  the  varn- 
ish. Dutch  ])ink  is  used  for  a  kind  of  cheap  yellow  japan  ground. 
If  a  little  driigon's  blood  be  added  to  the  varnish  for  yellow  japan, 
a  most  beautiful  and  rich  salmon  colored  varnish  is  the  result,  and 


PRACTICAL    RECEIPTS.  1  "5 

by  these  two  mixtures  ull  the  shades  of  flesh-colored  japans  are 
produced. 

GREEN   JAPAN    GROUNDS. 

A  good  green  may  be  made  by  mixing  Prussian  blue  along  with 
the  eromiite  of  lead,  or  with  turmeiic,  or  orpimen''  (sulphuret  of 
arsenic)  or  ochre,  only  tlie  two  should  be  ground  together  and  dis- 
solved in  alcohol  and  applied  as  a  ground,  then  coated  with  four 
or  Sve  coats  of  shellac  varnish,  in  the  manner  alre:idy  described. 
A  vei'y  bright  green  is  mnde  by  laying  on  a  ground  of  Dutch 
metal,  or  leaf  of  gold,  and  tlun  coating  it  over  with  distilled  ver- 
digiis  dissolved  in  alcohol,  then  the  varnishes  ou  the  top.  This  is 
a  splendid  green,  brilliant  and  glowing. 

ORANGE    COLORED    GK0UND3. 

Orange  grounds  may  be  made  of  yellow  mixed  with  vermillion 
or  carmine,  just  as  a  bright  or  rather  inferior  color  is  wanted.  The 
yellow  should  always  be  in  quan^'ity  to  make  a  good  full  color,  and 
the  red  added  in  proportion  to  the  depth  of  shade.  If  there  is  not 
a  good  full  body  of  yellow,  the  color  will  look  watery,  or  bare,  as 
it  is  technically  termed. 

PURPLE   JAPAN   GROUNDS. 

This  is  made  by  a  mixture  of  lake  and  Prussian  blue  or  carmine, 
or  for  an  inferior  color  vermilion,  and  treated  as  the  foregoing. 
When  the  ground  is  laid  on  and  perfectly  dried,  a  fine  coat  of  pure 
boillcd  nut  oil  'hen  laid  on  and  perfectly  dried,  is  a  good  method  to 
have  a  Japan,  not  liable  to  crack.  But  a  better  plan  is  to  use  this 
oil  in  the  varnish  given,  the  first  coat,  after  the  ground  is  laid  on, 
and  which  should  contain  considerable  of  pure  terpentine.  In 
every  case  where.oil  is  used  for  any  purpose  for  varnish,  it  is  all  the 
better  if  turpentine  is  mixed  with  it.  Turpentine  enables  oils  to 
mix  with  either  alcohol  or  water.     Alkalies  have  this  property  also. 

BLACK    JAPAN. 

1.  Asphaltum  three  ounces,  boiled  oil  four  quarts,  burnt  umber 
eight  ounces.  Mix  by  heat,  and  when  cooling  thin  with  turpentine. 
2.  Amber  twelve  ounces,  asphaltum  two  ounces;  fuse  by  heat,  add 
boiled  oil  half  a  pint,  resin  two  ounces;  when  cooling  add  sixteen 
ounces  oil  of  turpentine.     Both  are  used  to  varnish  metals. 

JAPAN  BLACK  FOR  LEATHER. 

1 .  Burnt  umber  four  ounces,  true  asphaltum  two  ounces,  boiled 
oil  two  quarts.  Dissolve  the  asphaltum  by  heat  in  a  little  of  the 
oil,  add  the  burnt  umber  ground  in  oil,  and  the  remainder  of  the 
oil,  mix,  cool  and  thin  with  turpentine.  Flexible.  2.  Rhellnc  one 
p.u  f,  wood  naphtha  f.jur  parts,  dissolve,  and  color  with  lampblack. 
Indexible. 


inO  PRVfTlCAI,    RECEIPTS. 


TItAKSPARENT    JAPAN. 

Oil  of  turpentine  four  ounces,  oil  of  lavender  three  ounces,  cam» 
plior  one-half  dracinn,  copal  one  ounce;  dissolve.  Used  to  japan 
im,  but  quick  copal  varnish  is  mostly  used  instead. 

JAPANNERS'    COPAL    VARNISH. 

Pale  African  copal  seven  pounds,  fuse,  add  clarified  linseed  oil 
one  half  gallon,  boil  for  five  minutes,  remove  it  into  he  topen  air, 
add  boiling  oil  of  turpentine  three  gallons,  mix  well,  strain  it  into 
the  cistern,  and  cover  it  up  immediately.  Used  to  varnish  furni- 
ture, and  by  japanners,  coacemakers,  &c.  Dries  in  15  minutes, 
and  may  be  polished  as  soon  as  hard. 

TORTOISE    SHELL    JAPAN. 

This  varnish  is  prepared  by  taking  of  good  linseed  oil  one  gal- 
lon, and  of  umber  half  a  pound,  and  boiling  them  together  until 
the  oil  becomes  very  brown  and  thick,  when  they  are  strained 
through  a  cloth  and  boiled  again  until  the  composition  is  about 
the  consistence  of  pitch,  when  it  is  fit  for  use.  Having  prepared 
this  varnish,  clean  well  the  copper  or  iron  j)!ate  or  vessel  that  is 
to  be  varnished,  (japanned.)  and  then  lay  vermillion,  mixed  with 
shellac  varnish,  or  with  drying  oil,  diluted  with  turpentine,  very 
thinlv  on  the  places  intended  to  imitate  the  clean  parts  of  the  tor- 
toise shell.  When  the  vermillion  is  dry  brush  over  the  whole  with 
the  above  umber  varnish  diluted  to  a  due  consistence  with  tur- 
pentine, and  when  it  is  set  and  firm,  it  must  be  put  into  a  stove 
and  undergo  a  strong  heat  for  a  long  time,  even  two  weeks  will 
not  hurt  it.  This  is  the  ground  for  those  beautiful  snuff  boxed 
and  tea  boards  which  are  so  much  admired,  and  those  grounds  can 
be  decorated  with  all  kinds  of  paintings  that  fancy  may  suggest, 
and  the  work  is  all  the  better  to  be  finished  in  an  annealing  oven. 

PAINTING   JAPAN   WORK. 

The  colors  to  be  painted  are  tempered,  generally,  in  oil,  T.hich 
should  have  at  least  one-fourth  of  its  weight  of  gum  sandarach,  or 
mastic  dissolved  in  it,  and  it  should  be  well  diluted  with  turpen- 
tine, that  the  colors  may  be  laid  on  thin  and  evenly.  In  some 
instances  it  does  well  to  put  on  water  colors  or  grounds  of  gold, 
which  a  skilful  hand  can  do  and  manage  so  as  to  make  the  woik 
appear  as  if  it  was  embossed.  These  water  colors  are  best  prepar- 
ed by  means  of  isinglass  size,  mixed  with  honey,  or  sugar  candy. 
These  colors  when  laid  on  must  receive  a  number  of  upper  coata 
of  the  varnish  we  have  described  before. 

JAPANNING    OLD    TEA-TRATS. 

First  clean  them  thoroughly  with  soap  and  water  and  a  little  rot- 
ten stone ;  then  dry  them  by  whiping  and  exposure  at  the  fire. 
Now,  get  seme  good  copal  varnish,  mix  with  it  some  bronze  pow- 


rUACTICAL  RECEIPTS.  137 

der,  and  apply  with  a  brush  to  the  denuded  parts.  After  which 
set  the  lea-tray  in  an  oven  at  a  heat  of  212°  or  300"  until  the  var- 
nish is  dry.     Two  coats  will  make  it  equal  to  new. 

JAPAN   FINISHING. 

TIio  finishing  part  of  japanning  lies  in  laying  on  and  polishing 
the  outer  coats  of  varnish,  which  is  necessary  in  all  painted  or 
simply  ground  colord  japan  work.  When  brightness  and  clearness 
arc  wanted,  the  white  kind  of  varnish  is  necessary,  for  seed-lac 
varnish,  which  is  the  hardest  and  most  tenacious,  imparts  a  yellow 
tinge.  A  mixed  varnish,  we  believe,  is  the  best  for  this  purpose, 
that  is,  for  combining  hardness  and  purity.  Take  then  three 
ounces  of  seed-lac.  picked  very  carefully  from  all  sticks  and  dirt 
and  washing  it  well  with  cold  water,  stirring  it  up,  pouring  it  off, 
and  continuing  the  process  until  tliu  water  i-uns  oft'  perfectly  pure. 
Dry  it  and  then  reduce  it  to  powder,  and  put  it  with  a  pint  of  al- 
cohol into  a  bottle,  of  which  it  must  occupy  only  two  thirds  of  ita 
space.  This  mixture  must  be  shaken  well  together  and  ihc  bottle 
kept  at  a  gentle  heat  (being  corked)  until  the  lac  be  dissclvcd. 
When  this  is  the  case,  the  clear  must  be  poured  off,  and  the  re- 
mainder strained  through  a  cloth,  and  all  the  clear,  strained  and 
poured,  must  be  kept  in  a  well  stopped  bottle.  The  manner  of 
using  this  seed-lac  varnish  is  the  same  as  that  before  dtsciibcd, 
and  a  fine  polishing  varnisii  is  made  by  mixing  this  with  pure 
white  varnish.  The  pieces  of  work  to  be  varnished  for  finishing 
should  be  placed  near  a  stove,  or  in  a  warm,  dry  room,  and  one 
coat  should  be  perfectly  dry  before  the  other  is  applied.  The  varn- 
ish is  applied  by  proper  brushes,  beginning  at  the  middle,  passing 
the  stroke  to  one  end  and  with  the  other  stroke  from  the  middle  to 
the  other  end.  Great  skill  is  displayed  in  laying  on  these  coats  of 
varnish.  If  possible  the  skill  of  hand  should  never  cross,  or  twice 
pass  over  in  giving  one  coat.  When  one  coat  is  dry  another  must 
be  laid  over  it,  anil  so  on  successively  for  a  number  of  coats,  so 
that  the  coating  should  be  sufficiently  thick  to  stand  fully  all  the 
polishing,  so  as  not  to  bare  the  surface  of  the  colored  work.  When 
a  sufficient  number  of  coats  are  thus  laid  on,  the  work  is  fit  to  be 
polished,  which,  in  common  cases,  is  commenced  with  a  rag  dipped 
in  finely  powdered  rotten  stone,  and  towards  the  end  of  the  rub- 
bing a  little  oil  should  be  used  along  with  the  powder,  and  when 
the  work  appears  fine  and  glossy  a  little  oil  should  be  used  alone 
to  clean  off  the  powder  and  give  the  work  a  still  brighter  hue.  In 
very  fine  work,  French  whiting  should  be  used,  which  should  be 
washed  in  water  to  remove  any  sand  that  might  be  in  it.  Pumice 
stone  ground  to  a  very  fine  powder  is  used  for  the  first  part  of 
polishing,  and  the  finishing  done  with  whiting.  It  is  always  best 
to  dry  the  varnish  of  all  japan  work  by  heat.  For  wood  work,  heat 
must  be  sparingly  used,  but  for  metals  the  varnish  should  be  dried 
in  an,  oven,  also  for  papier  mache  and  leather.  The  metal  will 
Btanti  the  greatest  heat,  and  care  must  be  taken  not  to  darken  by 


138 


PRACTICAL    RECEIPTS. 


too  high  a  temperature.  When  gold  size  is  nsed  in  guilding  for 
japau  work,  where  it  is  desired  not  to  liave  the  gold  shine,  or  ap- 
pear burnished,  the  gold  size  should  be  used  with  a  little  of  the 
spirits  of  turpentine  and  a  little  oil,  but  when  a  considerable  d«- 
giee  of  lustre  is  wanted  without  burnishing  and  the  pripiiration 
necessary  for  it,  a  little  of  the  size  along  with  oil  alone  should  l)C 
used. 


VARNISHES,— MISCELLANEOUS. 

Different  substances  are  employed  for  making  varnish,  the  ob- 
ject being  to  produce  a  liquid  easily  applied  to  the  surface  of  cloth, 
paper  or  metal,  which,  when  dry,  will  protect  it  with  a  tine  skin. 
Gums  and  resins  are  the  substances  employed  for  making  varn- 
ishes; they  are  dissolved  either  in  turpentine,  alcohol,  or  oil,  in  a 
close  stone  ware,  glass  or  metal  vessel,  exposed  ro  a  low  heat,  as 
the  case  may  require,  or  cold.  The  alcohol  or  turpentine  dissolv- 
es the  gum  or  resin,  and  holds  them  in  soluiion,  and  after  the  up- 
plication  of  the  varnish,  this  mixture  being  mechanical,  the  moist- 
ure of  the  liquid  evaporates,  and  the  gum  adheres  to  the  article  to 
which  it  is  applied. 

The  choice  of  linseed  oil  is  of  peculiar  consequence  to  the  var- 
nish-maker. Oil  from  fine  full-grown  ripe  seed,  when  viewed- in  a 
vial,  will  appear  limpid,  pale,  and  brilliant;  it  is  mellow  and 
sweet  to  the  taste,  has  very  little  smell,  is  specifically  lighter  than 
impure  oil,  and,  when  clarified,  dries  quickly  and  firmlv,  and  doe.s 
not  materially  change  the  color  of  the  varnish  when  made,  but  ap- 
pears limpid  and  brilliant. 

The  following  arc  the  chief  Resins  employed  in  the  manufacture 
of  Varnishes 

AMUKH. 

This  resin  is  most  distinguished  for  durability.  It  is  usuiiilv  <  !' 
some  shade  of  yellow,  traiispari'nt,  hard  and  moderately  toui^ii. 
Heated  in  air,  it  fuses  at  about  649°  ;  it  burns  with  a  clear  llaiue, 
emitting  a  pleasant  odor. 

AMME. 

This  is  imported  from  the  East  Indies.  The  large,  transparent, 
pale-yellow  pieces,  with  vitreous  fracture,  are  best  suited  for  var- 
nish. Infef  ior  qualities  are  employed  for  manufacturing  gold-size 
or  j.ipanblack.  Although  superior  to  amber  in  its  capacity  for 
drying,  and  cq\ial  in  hardness,  varnish  made  from  anime  deepens 
In  color  on  exposure  to  air,  and  is  very  liable  to  crack.  It  is, 
however,  much  used  for  mixing  with  copal  varnish. 


rRACTICAL  RECEIPTS.  139 


This  is  a  gura-resin  but  little  used  in  varnishes,  on  account  of 
its  costliness. 

COLOPHONY. 

This  resin  is  synonymous  with  arcanson  and  rosin.  When  th® 
resinous  juce  of /"i?;?**  iSi/lvesiris  and  other  varities  is  distilled, 
colophony  remains  in  the  retort.  Its  dark  color  is  due  to  the 
ac-tion  of  the  lire.  Dissolved  in  linseed  oil,  or  in  turpentine  by 
the  aid  of  heat,  colophony  forms  a  brilliant,  hard,  but  brittle 
varnish. 


This  is  a  gum-resin  of  immense  importance  to  the  varnish-maker. 
It  consists  of  several  minor  resins  of  diiferent  degrees  of  solubility. 
In  durability,  it  is  only  second  to  amber.  When  made  into  var- 
nish, the  better  sorts  become  lighter  in  color  by  exposure  to  air. 

Copal  is  generally  imported  in  large  lamps  about  the  size  of 
potatoes.  The  clearest  and  palest  are  selected  for  what  is  called 
hodi/-c/um  ;  the  second  best  forms  carriage-gum;  whilst  the  lesidue, 
freed  from  the  many  impurities  with  which  it  is  associated,  con- 
stitutes tvorst  quality,  fitted  only  for  japan-black  or  gold  size. 

In  alcohol,  copal  is  but  little  soluble  ;  but  it  is  said  to  become 
more  so  by  reducing  it  to  a  fine  powder,  and  exposing  it  to  atmos- 
pheric influences  for  twelve  months.  Boiling  alcohol  or  spirit  of 
turpentine,  when  poured  upon/t<s«Z  copal,  aeeoniplishes  its  com- 
plete solution,  piovided  the  solvent  be  not  added  in  too  large  ])ro- 
portions  at  a  time.  The  addition  of  camphor  also  promotes  the 
solubility  of  copal ;   so  likewise  does  oil  of  rosemary. 

DAMMARA. 

This  is  a  tasteless,  inodorous,  whitish  resin,  easily  soluble  in  oils. 
It  is  not  so  hard  as  mastic,  with  which  it  forms  a  good  admixture. 

EI.EMI. 

This  is  a  resin  of  a  yellow  color,  semi-transparent,  and  of  faint 
fragrance.  Of  the  two  resins  which  it  contains,  one  is  crystalliz- 
able  and  soluble  in  cold  alcohol. 

LAC. 

This  constitutes  the  basis  of  spirit-varnish.  The  resin  is  soluble 
in  strong  alcohol  aided  bv  heat.  Its  solution  in  ammonia  may  be 
used  as  a  varnish,  when  the  articles  coated  with  it  are  not  expos- 
ed more  than  an  hour  or  two  at  a  time  to  water. 

MASTIC. 

This  is  a  soft  resin  of  considerable  lustre.  The  two  sorts  in  com- 
merce are,  in  tears  and  the  common  mastic;  the  foimer  is  the 
purer  of  the  two.  It  consists  of  two  resins,  one  of  which  is  solu- 
ble in  dilute  alcohol.     With  oil  of  turpentine,  it  forms  a  very  pale 


140  PRACTICAL    RECEIPTS. 

varnish,  of  great  lustre,  which  flows  readily,  and  works  easily. 
Moreover,  it  can  be  readily  removed  by  fiiction  with  the  hand; 
hence  its  use  for  delicate  work  of  every  description. 

SANDARACH. 

This  is  a  pale,  odorous  resin,  less  hard  than  lac,  with  which  it  is 
often  associated  as  a  spirit-varnish.  It  consists  of  three  resins 
differing  as  to  solubility  in  alcohol,  either,  and  turpentine.  It 
forms  a  good  palo  varnish  for  light  colored  woods  ;  when  required 
to  be  polished,  Venice  turpentine  is  added  to  give  it  body. 

Of  the  solvents  of  these  various  resins,  little  need  be  said.  In 
the  manufacture  of  varnishes,  great  care,  as  well  as  cleanliness,  are 
required.  Tiie  resins  should  be  washed  in  hot  water,  to  free  them 
from  particles  of  dust  and  dirt;  they  should  be  dried  and  assorted 
according  to  their  color,  reserving  the  lightest  shades  for  the  best 
kinds  of  varnish. 

The  Unseed-o'd  should  be  as  pale  colored,  and  as  well  clarified  as 
possible.  New  oil  always  contains  mucilage,  and  more  or  less  of 
foreign  matters;  as  these  prevent  the  regular  absoiption  of  oxy- 
gen, the  oil  requires  preliminary  treatment.  The  common  plan  is 
to  boil  it  with  litharge ;  but  such  od  varnish  is  inferior  to  that 
prepared  with  sulphate  of  lead. 

The  best  method  is  to  rub  up  linseed-oil  with  dry  sulphate  of 
lead,  in  suflBcient  quantity  to  form  a  milky  mixture.  After  a 
week's  exposure  to  the  light,  and  frequent  shaking,  the  mucus  de- 
posits with  the  sulphate  of  lead,  and  leaves  the  oil  perfectly  clear. 
The  precipitated  slime  forms  a  compact  membrane  over  the  lead, 
hardening  to  such  an  extent  that  the  clarified  oil  may  be  readily 
poured  otf. 

TURPENTINE. 

This  in  of  very  extensive  use.  The  older  it  is,  the  more  ozoni- 
zed, the  better  it  is.  Turpentine  varnishes  dry  much  more  readily 
than  oil  varnishes,  are  of  a  lighter  color,  more  flexible  and  cheap. 
They  arc,  however,  neither  so  tough  nor  so  durable. 

ALCOHOL. 

This  is  employed  as  the  solvent  of  sandarach  and  of  lac.  The 
stronger,  cceter is  paribus,  the  better. 

NAPHTHA  AND  METHYLAMED  SPIRIT  OF  WINE. 

These  are  used  for  the  cheaper  varnishes.  Their  smell  is  dis- 
agreeable. The  former  is,  however,  a  bettersolvent  of  resins  thau 
alcohol. 

SPIRIT    TARNISHES. 

These  varnishes  may  be  readily  colored — red,  by  dragon's  blood  ; 
yellow,  by  gamboge.  If  a  colored  varnish  is  required,  clearly  no 
account  need  bo  taken  of  the  color  of  the  resins.  Lac  varnish  may 
be  bleached  by  Mr.  Lemming's  process: — Dissolve  five  ounces  of 
shellac  in  a  (juart  of  spirit  of  wine  ;   boil    for  a    few   minntes    with 


rUACTlOAL    IlECKIPTS.  MI 

ten  ounces  of  well  burnt  ami  recently-lieated  animal  i'li«i,eoai, 
when  a  small  ([UMntity  of  the  solution  should  be  drawn  off  and  filt- 
ered :  if  not  colorless,  a  little  more  charcoal  should  be  added. 
When  all  tinge  is  removed,  press  the  liquor  through  silk,  as  linen 
absorbs  more  varnish  ;  and  afterwards  filter  it  through  fine  blot- 
ting-paper. Dr.  Hare  proceeds  as  follows: — Dissolve  in  an  iron 
kettle  about  one  part  of  pearlash  in  about  eight  parts  of  water, 
add  one  part  of  shell  or  seed  lac,  and  iieat  the  whole  to  ebullition. 
When  the  lac  is  dissolved,  cool  the  solution,  and  impregnate,  it 
with  chlorine  gas  till  the  hic  is  all  precipitated.  The  prccipitaie 
is  white,  but  the  color  deepens  by  washing  and  consolidation. 
Dissolved  in  alcohol,  lac  bleached  by  this  process  yields  a  varnish 
which  is  as  free  from  color  as  any  copal  varnish. 

One  word  in  conclusion  with  reference  to  all  spirit  varnishes.  A 
damp  atmosphere  is  sufficient  to  occasion  a  milky  deposit  of  rc-^in, 
owing  to  the  dduted  spirit  depositing  a  portion:  in  such  case  the 
varnish  is  said  to  be  chilled. 

ESSENC";  VARNISHES. 

They  do  not  differ  essentially  in  their   manufacture  from   spirit 
'  varnishes.  The  polish  produced  by  them  is  more  durable,  although 
they  take  a  longer  time  to  dry. 

OIL   TABNISUES. 

The  most  durable  and  lustrous  of  varnishes  are  composed  of  a 
mi.xture  of  resin,  oil,  and  spirit  of  turpentine.  The  oils  most  fre- 
quently employed  arc  linseed  and  walnut ;  the  resins  chiefly  copal 
and  amber. 

The  (Irving  powder  of  the  oil  having  been  increased  by  litharge, 
red-lead,  or  by  sulphate  of  lead,  aud  a  jvidicious  selection  of  copal 
having  been  made,  it  is  necessary,  according  to  Booth,  to  bear  in 
mind  the  following  precautions  before  proceeding  to  the  manufac- 
ture of  varnish:— I.  That  oil  varnish  is  not,  a  solution,  but  _  an  in- 
timate mixture  of  resin  in  boiled  oil  and  spirit  of  turpentine.  ^  2. 
That  the  resin  must  be  completely  fused  previous  to  the  addition 
of  the  boiled  or  prepared  oil.  3.  That  the  oil  must  be  heated  from 
250°  to  300°.  4.  That  the  spirit  of  turpentine  must  be  added 
gradually,  and  in  a  thin  stream,  while  the  mixture  of  oil  and  resin 
is  still  hot.  5.  That  the  varnish  be  made  in  dry  weather,  other- 
wise moisture  is  abrorbed,  and  its  transparency  and  drying  quality 
impaired. 

The  heating  vessel  must  be  of  copper,  with  a  riveted  and  not  a 
soldered  bottom.  To  proiiiote  the  admixture  of  the  copal  with  tho 
hot  oil,  the  copal — carefully  selected,  and  of  nearly  uniform  fusi- 
bility— is  separately  heated  with  continuous  stirring  over  a  char- 
coal fire.  Good  management  is  required  to  prevent  the  copal 
from  burning  or  beeommg  even  high  colored.  When  completely 
fused,  the  heated  oil  should  be  gradually  poured  in  with  constant 
stirring.  The  rx-ac^  amount  of  oil  required  must  be  determined  by 
experiment.     If  a  drop  upon  a  plate,  on  cooling,    assumes  such    a 


TRACTICAL    IlECKIPTS. 

consistency  as  to  bo  penctiated  by  the  nail  witliout   cnicking,    the 
niixturu  is  (iomplete  ;   but  if  it  cracks,  nioit'  oil  must  bi'  added. 

The  spirit  of  turppiitino  previously  healed  is  added  in  a  thin 
stream  to  tlie  former  mixture,  care  being  taken  to  keep  up  the 
heat  of  all  the  parts. 

LACKER. 

This  is  used  for  wood  or  brass  work,  and  is  also  a  varnish.  For 
brass,  the  proportions  are  half  a  pound  of  pale  shell  l:tc  to  one 
gallon  of  .spirit  of  wine.  It,  is  better  prepared  without  the  aid  of 
heat,  by  simple  iind  repeated  agitation.  It  should  then  be  h  f i  to 
clear  itself,  and  separated  from  tiie  thicker  portions  and  from  all 
impurities  by  decantatlon.  As  it  darkens  on  exposure  to  light,  the 
latter  should  be  exc'uded.  It  need  scarcely  be  said  that  the  color 
will  be  also  modified  by  that  of  the  lac  employed. 

1.       COPAL  VARNISHES. 

1.  Oil  of  turpentine  one  pint,  set  the  bottle  in  a  water  bath, 
and  add  in  small  portions  at  a  time,  three  ounces  of  powdeied 
copal  that  has  been  previously  jnelted  by  a  gentle  heat,  and  dropped 
into  water  ;  in  a  few  days  decant,  the  clear.  Z^Hes  slowly,  but  la* 
very  pale  and  durable.  Used  for  pictures,  &c.  2.  Pale  hard  copal 
two  pounds ;  fuse,  add  hot  drying  oil  one  p'ut,  boil  as  before 
directed,  and  thin  with  oil  of  turpentine  three  pint;s,  or  as  much 
as  sufficient.  Very  pale.  i>>7fs  hard  in  12  to  24  hours.  3  Clear- 
est and  palest  African  copal  eight  pounds;  fuse,  add  hot  and  pale 
drying  oil  two  gallons,  boil  till  it  strings  strongly,  cool  a  little, 
and  thin  with  hot  rectified  oil  of  turpentine  three  gallons,  and 
immediately  strain  into  the  store  can.  Very  fine.  Both  the  above 
arc  used  for  pictures.  4.  Coarsely-powdered  copal  and  glass,  of 
each  four  ounces,  alcohol  of  90  per  cent  one  pint,  cnmphor  one- 
half  ounce;  heat  it  in  a  water  bath  so  that  the  ))nbbles  may  be 
counted  as  they  rise,  observing  frequently  to  stir  the  mixture  ; 
when  cold  decant  the  clear,  i/sa/ for  pictures.  5.  Copal  melted 
and  dropped  into  water  three  ounces,  gum  sandarach  six  ounces, 
mastic  and  Chio  turpentine  of  each  two  and  one  half  ounces, 
powdered  ghiss  four  ounces,  alcohol  of  85  percent,  one  quart;  dis- 
solve by  a  gentlo  heat.     Used  foi  metal,  chairs,  &c. 

All  copal  varnishes  are  hard  and  durable,  though  loss  so  than 
those  made  of  amber,  but  they  have  the  advantage  over  the  latter 
of  being  paler.  They  are  applied  on  coaches,  pietu.'cs,  polished 
metal,  wood,  and  other  objects  requiring  good  durable  varnish 

2.       COPAL    VARNISH. 

Hard  copal,  300  parts !  drying  linseed  or  nut  oil,  from  125  to 
250  parts  ;  oil  of  turpentine,  GOO  ;  these  three  sub-stances  are  to 
be  put  into  three  separate  vessels  ;  the  copal  is  to  be  fused  by  a 
somewhat  sudden  application  of  heat ;  the  drying  oil  is  to  be  heat  - 
edin  a  tenipei-aiurc  a  little  luider  ■bullirion,  and  is  to  be  added 
l»y  sni  dl  portions  at  a  time  to  t!ie  melted  copal.     When    this  com 


PRACTICAL    KICCEIPTS.  143 

bin'.tio:i  is  m.iilo,  and  tlu>  IwMt  a  little  abated,  the  csscnee  of  tur- 
pentine, likewise  previously  iieatod,  is  to  be  introdueed  by  degrees; 
some  of  tlie  volatile  oil  will  be  dissipated  at  first,  but  more  being 
aiUk'd,  the  union  will  take  place.  Great  care  must  be  taken  to 
prevent  the  turpentine  vapor  from  catching  fire,  which  might 
occasion  serious  accidents  to  the  operator.  When  the  varnisli  i? 
m:tdj  and  has  cooled  down  to  about  180  degrees  of  Fah.,  it  may 
be  strained  through  a  filter,  to  separate  the  impurities  and  undis- 
solved copal.  Almost  all  varnish  makers  think  it  indispensable  to 
combine  the  drying  oil  with  the  copal  before  adding  the  oil  of 
turpentine,  but  in  this  they  are  mistaken.  Boiling  oil  of  turpen- 
tine combines  very  readily  with  fused  copal ;  and,  in  some  cases, 
it  would  probably  be  preferable  to  commence  the  operation  with 
it,  adding  it  in  successive  small  quantities.  Indeed,  the  whitest 
copal  varnish  can  be  made  only  in  this  way:  for  if  the  drying  oil 
has  been  heated  to  nearly  its  boiling  point,  it  becomes  colored, 
and  darkens  the  varnish. 

This  varnish  improves  in  clearness  by  keeping.  Its  consistence 
may  be  varied  by  varying  the  proportions  of  the  ingredients 
within  moderate  limits.  Good  varnish,  applied  in  summer,  should 
become  so  dry  in  twenty-four  hours  that  the  dust  will  not  stick  to 
it  nor  receive  an  impression  from  the  fingers.  To  render  it  suffi- 
ciently dry  and  hard  for  polishing,  it  must  be  subjected  for  several 
days  to  the  heat  of  a  stove. 

3.       COPAL    VARNISHES. 

1.  Melt  in  an  iron  pan  at  a  slow  heat,  copal  gum  powdered, 
eight  parts,  and  add  balsam  copaiva,  previously  warmed,  two 
parts.  Then  remove  from  the  fire,  and  add  spirits  of  turpentine, 
also  warmed  beforr'hand,  ten  parts,  to  give  the  necessary  consist- 
ence. 2.  Prepared  gum  copal  ten  parts,  gum  mastic  two  paits, 
finely  powdered,  arc  mixed  with  white  turpentine  and  boiled  lin- 
seed oil,  of  each  one  part,  at  a  slow  heat,  and  with  spirits  of  tur- 
pentine twenty  parts.  8.  Prepared  gum-copal  ten  parts,  white 
turpentine  two  parts,  dissolve  in  spirits  of  turpentine. 

Gum-copal  ia prepared  or  made  more  soluble  in  spirits  of  tur- 
pentine, by  melting  the  powdered  crude  gum,  afterwards  ag^ia 
powdering,  and  allowing  lo  stand  fo:'  some  time  loosely  covered. 

CABI.NET     VARNISH. 

Copal,  fused,  fourteen  pounds;  linseed  oil,  hot,  one  gallon; 
turpentine,  hot,  three  gallons.  Properly  boiled,  such  a  varnish 
will  dry  in  ten  minutes. 

TABLE    TARNISH. 

Damma  resin,  one  pound;  spirits  of  turpentine,  two  pounds  ; 
pamplior,  two  hundr.d  grains.     Di'^^.'st  th'^  mixture  for  twenty-four 
hours.     TiM'  decxuted  porlioii  is  fit  for  iuimediatc  use. 
13 


144  PRACTICAL    UECEIPT3. 


COMMON    TABLE    VARNISH. 

Oil  of  turpentine,  one  pound;  bees'  wax,  two  ounces;  coloplj 
ony,  one   drachm. 

COPAL  Varnish   fok  /nside  work. 

1.  Pounded  and  oxidixcd  copal,  twenty-four  parts;  spirit  of  tiir 
f.ontine,  forty  parts  ;  camphor,  one  part. — 2.  Flexible  Copal  Vnr- 
nish.  Copal  in  powder,  sixteen  parts;  camphor,  two  parts;  oil  of 
lavender,  ninety  parts. 

Dissolve  the  camphor  in  the  oil,  heat  the  latter,  and  stir  in  the 
copal  in  sutcessive  portions  until  complete  solution  takes  place. 
Thin  with  sufl&cieut  turpentine  to  make  it  of  pioper  coasistence. 

BEST  BODY  COPAL  VARNISH  FOR  COACH  MAKERS,  &C. 

This  is  intended  for  the  body  parts  of  coaches  and  other  similar 
vehicles,  intended  for  polishing.  Fuse  eight  lbs.  of  fine  African 
gum  copal,  and  two  gallons  of  clarified  oil,  boil  it  very  slowly  for 
four  or  five  hours,  until  quite  stringy,  mix  with  throe  gallons  and 
a  half  of  turpentine;  strain  off  and  pour  it  into  a  cistern.  If  this 
is  too  slow  in  drying,  coach  makers,  painters  and  varnish-makers 
have  introduced  to  two  pots  of  the  preceding  varnish,  one  made 
as  follows-  eight  lbs.  of  fine  pale  gum-animc,  two  gallons  of  clari- 
fied oil  and  three  and  a  half  gallons  of  turpentine.  To  be  boiled 
four  hours. 

COPAL  POLISH. 

Digest  or  shake  finely  powdered  gum  copal  four  parts,  and  gum 
camphor  one  part,  with  cither  to  form  a  semi-fluid  mass,  and  then 
digest  with  a  sufiBoient  quantity  of  alcohol, 

WHITE  SPIRIT  VARNISH. 

Sandarach,  250  piirts ;  mastic,  in  tear.-,  64;  elemi  resin,  32; 
turpentine,  6-1 ;  alcohol  of8'.  per  cent,  1000  pai'ts,  by  measure. 
The  turpentine  is  to  be  added  after  the  resins  are  dissolved.  This 
is  a  brilliant  varnish,  but  not  so  hard  as  to  bear  polishing. 

WHITE  HARD  SPIRIT  VARNISHES. 

1.  Gum  sandarach  five  pounds,  camphor  one  ounce,  rectified 
spirit  65  over  proof)  two  gallons,  washed  and  dried  coarsely- 
pounded  glass  two  pounds ;  proceed  as  in  making  mastic  varnish  ; 
when  strained  add  one  quart  of  very  pale  turpentine  varnish.  Very 
fine.  2.  Picked  mastic  and  coarsely-ground  glass,  of  each,  four 
ounces,  sandarach  and  pale  clear  Venice  turpentine,  of  each  three 
ounces,  alcohol  two  pounds;  as  last.  3.  Gum  sandarach  one 
pound,  clear  Strasburg  turpentine  six  ounces,  rectified  spirit  (65 
over  p. oof)  three  pints-  dissolve.  4.  Mastic  in  tears  two  ounces, 
sandarach  eight  ounces,  gum  elemi  one  ounce,  Strasburgh  or  Scio 
turpentine  (genuine)  four  ounces,  rectified  spirit  (65  over  proo*) 
one  quart.      Used  on  metals,  iic      Polishes  well. 


PRACTICAL     REfiCIPTJl  J  45 


WIIITK    VARNISH. 

1.  Tender  copal  seven  and  one-half  ounces,  camphor  one  ounce, 
fllcohol  of  i)5  per  cent,  one  quurt ;  dissolve,  then  add  mastic  two- 
ounces,  Venice  turpentine  one  ounce ;  dit'solve  and  strain.  Ve'v 
v.liite,  drying,  and  capable  of  bein;^  polished  when  hard.  Used  for 
toys.  2.  Sandarach  eight  (iunc!^s,  mastic  two  ounces,  Caiuida 
balsam  four  ounces,  alcohol  one  quart.  Uned  on  paper,  wood,  oi 
linen. 

SOFT    BRILLIANT     VARNISH. 

Sandarach  six  ounces,  elemi  (genuine)  four  ounces,  anime  one 
ounce,  camphor  one-half  ounce,  rectified  spirit  one  'quart;  as 
before. 

The  above  spirit  varnishes  are  chiefly  applied  to  objects  of  the 
toilette,  as  work-boxes,  card-cases,  &c.,  but  are  also  suitable  to 
ether  aiticle.s,  whether  of  paper,  wood,  linen,  or  metal,  that  re- 
quire a  brilliant  and  quick-drying  varnish.  They  mostly  dry  al- 
most as  soon  as  applied,  and  are  u-^ually  hard  enough  to  polish  in 
21  hours.  Spirit  varnishes  are  less  durabl-j  and  more  li.able  to 
crack  than  oil  varnishes. 

BROWN  HARD  SPIRIT  VARNISUES. 

1.  Sandarach  four  ounces'  pale  seed  Inc,  two  ounces,  elemi 
(true)  one  ounce,  ah  ohoi  one  quart ;  digest  with  agitation  till  dis- 
solved, then  add  Venice  turpentine  two  ounces.  2.  (luni  sandar- 
ach three  pounds,  shellac  two  pounds,  rectified  spirit,  (€3  over 
proof,)  two  gallons ;  dissolve,  add  turpentine  varni>h  one  quart; 
agitate  well  and  strain.  Very  fine.  ?>.  Seed  lac  and  yeilow  resin, 
of  each  one  and  one-half  pounds,  rectified  spirit  two  gallons. 

TO    PREPARE  A  V^  RNISII  FOR  COATING  METAL*. 

Digest  one  part  of  bru'sed  copal  in  two  partsof  absolute  alcohol; 
but  as  this  varnish  dries  too  quickly  it  is  preferable  to  take  one 
part  of  copal,  one  part  of  oil  of  rosi-mary,  and  twu  or  three  paits 
of  absolute  alcohol.  This  gives  a  cl<  ar  varnish  as  limpid  as  water. 
It  should  be  applied  hot,  and  when  dry  it  will  be  found  hard  and 
durable. 

TO  VARNISH  ARTICLES  OF    IRON    AND  STEEL. 

Dissolve  10  parts  of  clear  grains  of  mastic,  5  parts  of  camphor, 
1.^  parts  of  sandarach,  and  5  of  oil  mi,    in    a  sufficient   quantity  of 
alcohol,  and  apply  tliis  varnish  without  heat.     The  articles  will  not 
only  be  preserved  from  rust,  but  the  varnish  will   retain   its  trans 
parency  and  the   metallic   brilliancy  of  the  articles   will  not   b    ' 
obscured. 

VARNISH    FOR    IRON    WORK. 

Dissolve,  in  about  two  lbs.  of  tar  oil,  lialf  a  pound  of  asphaltum, 
autl  a  like  quant. Cy  of  pounds  d  iisin,  ini.x   hot    in    an  iron   kettle. 


146  PKACTTCAL    RECEIPTS. 

oare  being  takon  to  prevent  any  contact  with  the  flame.  When 
cold  the  varnish  is  readv  for  use.  This  varnish  is  for  out-door 
wood  and  iron  work,  not  for  japanning  leatlier  or  cloth. 

BLACK  VARMSn  FOR  IRON  WORK. 

Asphaltuni  forty-eight  pounds,  fusi-,  add  boiled  oil  ten  galIo7is, 
red  lead  and  lith:irge,  of  each  seven  pounds,  dried  and  powdered 
'  wliite  copperas  three  pounds,  boil  for  two  hours,  then  add  dark 
gum  amber  (fused)  eight  puuiids,  liot  linseed  oil  two  gallons,  boil 
for  two  hours  longer,  or  till  a  little  of  the  mass,  when  cooled, 
may  be  rolled  into  pills,  then  withdraw  the  heat,  and  afterwards 
thin  down  with  oil  of  turpentine  thirty  gallons.  i/sc(iforthe  iron- 
work of  carriagijs,  and  other  nice  purposes. 

BRONZE    VARNISH    FOR    STATUARY. 

Cut  best  hard  soap  fifty  parts,  into  fine  shaving*?,  dissolve  in 
boihng  water  two  parts,  to  whieh  add  the  solution  of  blue  vitriol 
fifteen  parts,  in  pure  water  sixty  parts.  Wash  the  copper-soap 
with  water,  dry  it  at  a  very  slow  heat,  and  dissolve  it  in  spirits  ol 
turpentine. 

AMBER    VARNISHES. 

1.  Amber  one  pound,  pale  boiled  oil  ten  ounces,  turpentine  one 
pint.  Render  tht-  amber,  placed  in  an  iron  pot,  semi-liquid  by 
heat;  then  add  the  oil,  mix,  remove  it  from  the  ti;e,  and  when 
cooled  a  little,  s'.ir  ill  the  turpentine.  2.  To  the  amber,  melted  as 
above,  add  two  ounces  of  sh  Uae,  and  proceed  as  before. 

This  varnish  is  ratlier  dark,  but  remarkably  tough.  The  first 
form  is  the  best.  It  is  used  for  the  same  purposes  as  copal  var- 
nish, and  form- an  excellent,  article  for  covering  wood,  or  any 
other  substance  not  of  a  white  or  pale  cotor.  It  dries  well,  and  is 
very  hard  and  durable. 

AMBER    VARNISH,    BLACK. 

Amber  one  pound,  boiled  oil  one-half  pint,  powdered  asphaltu/n 
six  ounces,  oil  of  turpentine  one  pint.  Melt  the  amber,  as  before 
described,  thun  add  the  asphalium,  previously  mixed  with  the  cold 
oil,  and  afterwards  heated  very  hot,  mix  well,  remove  the  vessel 
from  the  fire,  and  when  cooled  a  little  add  the  turpentine,  also 
made  warm. 

Each  of  the  above  varnishes  should  be  reduci  d  to  a  proper  con- 
sirtLcnee  with  more  turp  ntiiie  if  requir.  d.  The  last  form  produces 
the  beautiful  black  vnrni.sh  used  by  the  coaehmiikers.  Some  manu- 
faeturers"omit  the  whole  or  part  of  the  asphalium,  and  u.se  the 
same  quantity  of  clear  black  rosin  instead,  in  which  case  the  color 
i.  brought  up  by  lampblack  reduced  to  an  impalpable  powder,  or 
previously  ground  verv  fine  with  a  little  boiled  oil.  The  varnish 
made  in  this  way,  hicks,  however,  that  richness,  brilliancy,  and 
depth  of  blackness  imparted  by  asphaUuiu. 


PRACTICAL  RECEIPTS.  147 


▲MBKB    TARNISII£S. 

f.  (Pale.)  Amber  pale  and  transparent  six  pounds,  fuse,  add  hot 
clftnfied  linseed  oil  two  gallons,  boil  till  it  strings  strongly,  cool  a 
little,  and  add  oil  of  turpentine  four  gallons.  Pale  as  copal  var- 
nish; Roon  becomes  v(>ry  hard,  and  is  the  most  durable  of  oil  var- 
nishes; but  requires  time  before  it  is  fit  for  polishing.  When 
wanted  to  dry  and  harden  quicker,  "drying"  oil  may  be  substituted 
for  linseed,  or  "driers"  mav  be  add:d  during  the  boiling.  2. 
Amber  one  pound ;  melt,  add  Scio  turpentine  one  half  pound, 
transparent  white  resin  two  ounces,  hot  linseed  oil  one  pint,  and 
afterwards  oil  of  tuipentine  as  muih  as  sufficient;  as  above. 
Very  tough.  3.  (//an/. )  Melted  umber  four  ounces,  hot  boiled  oil 
oue  quart-  as  before.  4.  {Pale.)  Very  pale  and  transparent  amber 
four  ounces,  clarified  lidseod  oil  and  oil  of  turpentine,  of  each  one 
pint ;  as  before 

Amber  varnish  is  suited  for  all  purposes,  where  a  very  hard  and 
durable  oil  varnish  is  required.  The  paler  kind  is  superior  to 
copal  varnish,  and  is  often  mixed  wiih  the  latter  to  increase  it3 
hardness  and  durability. 

BLACK  VARNISH. 

Heat  to  boiling  linseed  oil  varnish  ten  parts,  with  burnt  umber 
two  parts,  and  powdered  asphaltum  one  part,  and  when  cooled 
dilute  witb  spirits  of  turpentine  to  the  required  consiste^nce. 

VARNISn  FOR  CERTAIN  PARTS  OF  CARRIAGES. 

Sandarach,  190  parts;  pale  shellac,  95  ;  resin,  Tio  ;  turpentine, 
190  ;  alcohol,  at  85  per  cent,  loOO  parts,  by  measure. 

COACH    VARNISH. 

Mix  shellac  sixteen  parts,  white  turpentine  three  parts,  lamp- 
black sufficient  quantity,  and  digest  with  alcohol  ninety  parts,  oil 
of  lavender  four  parts. 

MAHOGANY     VARNISH. 

Sorted  gum-anime  eight  pounds,  clarified  oil  three  gallons, 
liiharge  and  powc'ered  dried  sugar  of  lead,  of  each  one-lbunh 
pound  ;  boil  till  it  strings  well,  then  cool  a  little,  thiu  with  oil  oi 
turpentine  five  and  one-half  gallons,  and  strain. 

TARNISH  FOR  CABINET  MAKERS. 

Pale  shellac,  750  parts;  masiic,  64;  alcohol,  of  90  per  cent,  1000 
parts  by  measure.  The  solution  is  made  in  the  cold,  with  the  aid 
of  frequent  stirring.  It  is  always  muddy,  and  is  employed  without 
being  filtered.  With  the  same  resins  and  proof  spirit  a  varnish  is 
made  for  the  bookbinders  to  do  over  their  morocco  leather. 


148  PRACTICAL    RECEIPTS. 


CEMENT  VARNISH    FOR    WATER-TIGHT    LUTING. 

White  tuipentine  fourteen  parts,  shellac  eighteen  parts,  resi» 
Bix  parts,  digest  with  alcohol  eighty  parts. 

THE  VARNISH  OF  WATIN  FOR  GILDED  ARTICLES. 

Gum-lac,  in  grain,  12.5  parts;  gamboge,  125;  dragon's  blood, 
125;  annotto,  125  ;  saffron,  32.  Each  resin  must  be  dissolved  in 
1000  parts  by  measure,  of  alcohol  of  90  per  cent;  two  separate 
tinctures  must  be  made  with  the  dragon's  blood  and  annotto,  in 
1000  parts  of  such  alcohol ;  and  a  propei  proportion  of  each  phouJd 
be  added  to  the  varnish,  according  to  the  shr.de  of  golden  color 
wanted. 

CHEAP  OAK  VARNISH. 

Clear  pale  resin  three  and  one-half  pounds,  oil  of  turpentine  one 
gallon;  dissolve.  It  may  be  colored  darker  by  adding  a  little  fine 
lampblack. 

VARNISH  FOR   WOOD-WORK. 

Powdered  gum  sandar-ach  eight  parts,  gum  mastic  two  parts, 
eeed-lac  eight  parts,  and  digest  in  a  warm  place  for  some  days 
with  alcohol  twenty-four  parts,  and  finally,  dilute  with  sufficient 
alcohol  to  the  required  consistence. 

DARK     VARNISH    FOR  LIGHT  WOODWORK. 

Pound  up  and  digest  shellac  sixteen  parts,  gum  sandarach  thiity- 
two  parts,  gum  mastic  (juniper  eight  parts,  gum  clenii  eight  parts, 
dragon's  blood  four  parts,  annotto  one  part,  with  white  turpentine 
sixteen  parts,  and  alcohol  two  hundred  and  fifty-six.  Dilute  with 
alcohol  if  required. 

VARNISH  FOR     INSTRUMENTS. 

Digest  seedlac  one  part,  with  alcohol  seven  parts,  and  filter. 

VARNISH  FOR    THF    WOOD  TOYS  OF  SPA. 

Tender  capal,  75  parts;  mastic,  12.5  ;  Yenice  turpentine,  6.5; 
alcohol,  of  95  per  cent,  100  parts  by  measure  ;  water  ounces,  for 
example,  if  the  other  parts  be  taken  in  ounces.  The  alcohol  must 
be  fir.«t  made  to  act  upon  the  copal,  with  the  aid  of  a  little  oil  of 
lavender  or  camphor,  if  thought  fit;  and  the  solution  being  passed 
through  a  linen  ''loth,  the  mastic  must  be  intoduced.  After  it  is 
dissolved,  the  Venice  turpentine,  previously  melted  in  a  water- 
bath,  should  be  added  ;  the  lower  the  temperature  at  which  these 
operations  are  carried  on,  the  more  beautiful  will  the  varnish  be. 
This  varnish  ought  to  be  very  white,  very  drying,  and  capable  of 
being  smoothed  with  pumice-stone  and  polished. 

VARNISHES   FOR    FURNITURE. 

The  simplest,  and  perhaps  the  best,  is  the  solution  of  shellac 
only,  but  many  add  gums  sandarach,    mastic,    copal,    arable,    bon- 


rnATTirAL  receipts.        149 

jainin,  kc,  fioiii  the  idoa  tliat  tliey  eontribiito  to  the  effect.  Gum 
urabic  is  certainly  never  requiied  if  the  solvent  be  pure,  because 
it  is  insoluble  in  either  rectified  spirit  or  rectified  wood  nnplulia, 
the  menstrua  employed  in  dissolving  the  gums.  As  spiiit  is  sel- 
dom used  on  account  of  its  expense,  most  of  the  following  are 
mentioned  as  solutions  in  napiitha,  but  spirit  can  be  subsiiiuted 
when  thought  proper. 

1.  Shellac  one  and  a  half  pounds,  naphtha  one  gallon  ;  dit^solve, 
and  it  is  ready  without  filtering.  2  Shellac  twelve  ounces,  cop.. I 
tiiree  ounces,  (or  an  equivalent  of  varnish) ;  dissolve  in  one  gallon 
of  naphtha.  3.  Shellac  one  and  a  half  pounds,  seed-lac  and  saiid- 
aracli  each  founr  ounces,  mastic  two  ounces,  rectified  spirit  one 
gallon;  dissolve.  4.  Shellac  two  pounds,  benzoin  four  ounces, 
spiiit  one  f'allon.  6.  Shellac  ten  ounces,  seed-lac,  sandarach,  and 
copal  varnish  of  each,  six  ounces,  benzoin  three  ounces,  naphtha 
one  gallon. 

To  darken  polish,  benzoin  and  dragon's-blood  are  used,  turmeric 
and  other  coloring  matters  are  also  added;  and  to  make  it  lighier 
it  is  necessary  to  use  bleached  lac,  though  some  endeavor  to  give 
this  effect  by  adding  oxalic  acid  to  the  ingredients,  it,  like  guui 
arable,  is  insoluble  in  good  spirit  or  naphtha.  For  all  ordinary 
purposes  the  first  form  is  best  and  least  troublesome,  while  its 
appearance  is  equal  to  any  other. 

TO    FRENCH    POLISH. 

The  wood  must  be  plac3d  level,  and  sand-papered  until  it  \s  quite 
smooth,  otherwise  it  will  not  polish.  Then  provide  a  rubber  of 
cloth,  list,  or  sponge,  wrap  it  in  a  soft  rag,  so  as  to  leave  a  handle 
at  the  back  for  your  hand,  shake  the  bottle  against  the  rubber,  and 
in  the  middle  of  the  varnish  on  the  rag  place  with  your  finger  a 
little  raw  linseed  oil.  Now  commence  rubbing,  in  small  ciieular 
strokes,  and  continue  until  the  pores  are  fiilled,  charging  the  rub- 
ber with  varnish  and  oil  as  required,  until  the  whole  wood  has  had 
one  coat.  When  dry  repeat  the  process  once  or  twice  until  the 
surface  appears  even  and  fine,  between  each  coat  using  fine  sand- 
paper to  smooth  down  all  irregularities.  Lastly,  use  a  clean  rub- 
ber with  a  little  strong  alcohol  only,  which  will  remove  the  oil 
and  the  cloudine  'S  it  causes  ;  when  the  work  will  be  complete. 

rUKNITURE   POLISHES. 

New  wood  is  often  French-polished,  Or  the  following  may  be 
tried : 

Melt  three  or  four  pieces  of  sandarach,  each  the  size  of  a  wal- 
nut, add  one  pint  of  boiled  oil,  and  boil  together  for  one  hour. 
While  cooling  add  one  drachm  of  venice  turpentine,  and  if  to  thick 
a  little  oil  of  turpentine  also.  Apply  this  all  over  the  furniture, 
and  after  some  hou;'S  rub  it  off;  rub  the  furniture  daily,  without 
applying  fresh  varnish,  except  about  once  in  two  months.  Water 
does  not  injure  this  polish,  and  any  stain  or  scratch  may  be  again 
covered,  which  cannot  be  done  with  French-polish. 


150  PEACTICAL    EECEIPTS. 


FURNITURE    GLOSS. 


To  give  a  gloss  to  household  furniture,  various  compositions  are 
used,  known  as  wax,  polish,  creams,  pastes,  oils,  &c.  The  follow- 
ing are  some  of  the  forms  used  : 


FURNITURE    CREAM. 


Bees-wax  one  pound,  soap  four  ounces,  pearlash  two  ounces,  soft 
water  one  gallon  ;  boil  together  until  mixed. 


FURNITURE    OILS. 

1.  Acetic  acid  two  drachms,  oil  of  lavender  one-half  drachm, 
rectified  spirit  one  drachm,  linseed  oil  four  ounces.  2.  Linseed  oil 
one  pint,  alkanct  i"oot  two  ounces  ;  heat,  strain,  and  add  lac  var- 
nish one  ounce.  8.  Linseed  oil  one  pint,  rectified  spirit  two 
ounces,  butter  of  antimony  four  ounces. 

FURNITURE    PASTES. 

1.  Beeswax,  spirit  of  turpentine,  and  linseed  oil,  equal  parts: 
melt  and  cool.  2.  Bees-wax  four  ounces,  turpentine  ten  ounces, 
alkanet  root  to  color ;  melt  and  strain.  3.  Bees-wax  one  pound, 
linseed  oil  five  ounces,  alkanet  root  one-half  ounce  ;  melt,  add  five 
ounces  of  turpentine,  strain  and  cool.  4.  Bees-wax  four  ounces, 
resin  one  ounce,  oil  of  turpentine  two  ounces,  Venetian  red  to  color. 

ETCHING   TARNISHES. 

1.  White  wax,  two  ounces;  black  and  Burgundy  pitch,  of  each 
p.ie-half  ounce ;  melt  together,  add  by  degrees  powdered  asphul- 
tum  two  ounces,  and  boil  till  a  drop  taken  out  on  a  plate  will  breuk 
when  cold  by  being  bent  double  two  or  three  times  between  the 
fingers;  it  must  then  be  poured  into  warm  water  and  made  into 
small  balls  for  use.  2.  {Hard  Varnish.)  Linseed  oil  and  mastic,  of 
each  four  ounces  ;  melt  together.  3.  {Soft  Varnish.)  Soft  linseed 
oil,  four  ounces;  gun  benzoin  and  white  wax,  of  each  one-half 
ounce  ;  boil  to  two-thirds. 

VARNISH    FOR   ENGRAVINGS,    MAPS,    ECT. 

Digest  gum  sandarach  twenty  parts,  gum  mastic  eight  parts, 
camphor  one  part,  with  alcohol  forty-eight  parts.  The  map  or  en- 
graving must  previously  receive  one  or  two  coats  of  gelatine. 

VARNISH    TO    FIX    FNGRAVINGS    OR    LITIIOGUAPHS    ON   WOOD. 

For  fixing  engravings  or  lithographs  upon  wood,  a  varni-h  called 
mordant  is  usee  in  France,  which  differs  from  others  chiefly  in  con- 
taining more  Venice  turpentine,  to  make  it  sticky  ;  it  consists  of 
sandarach,  250  parts;  mastic  in  tears,  64;  rosin,  125;  Venice  tur- 
pentine, 250  ;  alcohol,  1000  parts  by  measure. 

VARNISHES    FOR    OIL    PAINTINGS  AND    LITHOGRAPHS. 

1.  Dextrine  2  parts,  alcohol  1  part,  water  6  parts.  2.  Varnish 
for  drawings   iuhI   ruliogrnphs :   dcxtiine   2  parts,    alcohol   |  part, 


PRACTICAL    KECEIPTS.  151 

water  2  part^.  These  should  be  prepared  previously  with  two  or 
three  coata  of  thin  starch  or  rice  boiled  and  strained  through  a 
cloth. 

Varnish  for  oil  paintings. 

Digest  at  a  slow  heat  gum  sandaruch  two  parts,  gum  mastic  four 
parts,  balsam  copaiva  two  parts,  white  turpentine  three  parts,  with 
spirits  of  turpentine  four  parts,  alcohol  (95  per  cent)  50  56  parts. 

BEAUTIFUL    TAR.\ISH    FOR    PAINTINGS    AND    PICTURES. 

Honey,  1  pint ;  the  whites  of  two  dozen  fresh  hen's  eggs ;  1 
ounce  of  good  clean  isinglass,  20  grains  of  hydrate  of  potassium  i 
ounce  of  chloride  of  sodium  ;  mix  together  over  a  gentle  heat  of 
80  or  90  degrees  Fah.  ;  be  careful  not  to  let  the  mixture  remain 
long  enough  to  coagulate  the  albumen  of  the  eggs;  stir  the  mix- 
ture thoroughly  then  bottle.  It  is  to  be  applied  as  follows:  one 
table  spoonful  of  the  varnish  added  to  half  a  table  spoonful  of 
good  oil  of  turpentine,  then  spread  on  the  picture  as  soon  as  mixed. 

MILK    OF    WAX. 

Milk  of  wax  is  a  valuable  varnish,  which  may  be  prepared  as  fol- 
lows : — Melt  in  a  porcelain  capsule  a  certain  quantity  of  white  wax, 
and  add  to  it,  while  in  fusion,  an  equal  quantity  of  spirit  of  wine, 
of  sp.  grav.  0-830;  stir  the  mixture,  and  pour  it  upon  a  large 
porphyry  slab.  The  granular  mass  is  to  be  converted  into  a  paste 
by  the  muller,  with  the  addition,  from  time  to  time,  of  a  little  al- 
cohol ;  and  as  soon  as  it  appears  to  be  smooth  and  homogeneous, 
water  is  to  be  introduced  in  small  quantities  successively,  to  the 
amount  of  four  times  the  weight  of  the  wax.  This  emulsion  is  to 
be  then  passed  through  canvas,  in  order  to  separate  such  particles 
as  may  be  imperfectly  incorporated.  The  milk  ot  wax,  thus  pre- 
pared, may  be  spread  with  a  smooth  brush  upon  the  surface  of  a 
painting,  allowed  to  dry,  and  then  fused  by  passing  a  hot  iron 
(salamander)  over  its  surface.  When  cold,  it  is  to  be  rubbed  with 
a  linen  cloth  to  bring  out  the  luster.  It  is  to  the  unchangeable 
quality  of  an  encaustic  of  this  nature,  that  the  ancient  paintings 
upon  the  walls  of  Herculaneum  and  Pompeii  owe  their  freshness 
at  the  present  day. 

CRYSTAL    VARNISHES. 

1.  Genuine  pale  Canada  balsam  and  rectified  oil  of  turpentine, 
equal  parts ;  mix,  place  the  bottle  in  warm  water,  agitate  well,  set 
it  aside,  in  a  moderately  warm  place,  and  in  a  week  pou/  off  the 
clear.  f/W  for  maps,  prints,  drawings,  and  other  articles  of  pa- 
per, and  also  to  prepare  tracing  paper,  and  to  transfer  engravings. 
2.  Ma«tic  three  ounces,  alcohol  one  pint ;  dissolve.  Used  to  fix 
pencil  drawings. 

ITALIAN    VARNISHES. 

1.  Boil  Scio  turpentine  till  brittle,  powder,  and  dissolve  in  oil  ol 
turpentine.  2.  Ciinada  balsam  and  clear  white  resin,  of  each  six 
ounces,  oil  of  turpentine  one  quart;  dissolve,     r/sa/ for  prints,  &o 


162  PRACTICAL    RECEIPTS. 


BlZE,    OR    VARNISH,    FOR    PRINTERS,     ETC. 

Best  pale  glue  and  white  curd  soap,  of  each  4  ounces;  hot 
water  3  pints;  dissolve,  then  add  powdered  alum  2  ounces.  Used 
to  size  prints  and  pictures  before  coloring  them. 

MASTIC    VARNISHES. 

1.  (Fuie.)  Very  pale  and  picked  gum  mastic  five  pounds,  glass 
pounded  as  small  as  barh-y,  and  well  washed  and  dried  two  and 
one-half  pounds,  rectified  turpentine  two  gallons  ;  put  them  into  a 
clean  four  gallon  stone  or  tin  bottle,  bung  down  securely,  and  keep 
rolling  it  backwards  and  forwards  pretty  smartly  on  a  counter  or 
any  other  solid  place  for  at  least  four  hours;  when,  if  the  gum  is 
all  dissolved,  the  varni-h  may  be  decanted,  strained  through  mus- 
lin into  another  bottb,  and  allowed  to  settle.  It  should  be  kept 
for  six  or  nine  months  before  use,  as  it  thereby  gets  both  tougher 
and  clearer.  2.  (Second  Qualiiy.)  Mastic  eight  pounds,  turpentine 
four  gallons;  dissolve  by  a  genth'  heat,  and  add  pale  turpentine 
varnish  one  half  gallon.  3.  Gum  mastic  six  ounces,  oil  of  turpen- 
tine one  quart;  dissolve. 

Mastic  varnish  is  used  for  pictures,  &c. ;  when  good,  it  is  tough, 
hard,  brilliant,  and  colorless.  Should  it  get  ^^  chilled  "  one  pound 
of  well-washed  silicious  sand  should  be  made  moderately  hot,  aril 
added  to  each  gallon,  whicli  must  then  be  well  agitated  for  five 
minutes,  and  a'terwards  allowed  to  settle. 

INDIA-RUBBER  VARNISHES. 

1.  Cut  up  one  pound  of  India  rubber  into  small  pieces  rnd  dif- 
fuse in  half  a  pound  of  sulphuric  ether,  which  is  done  by  digi  ^f- 
ing  in  :t  glass  flask  on  a  sand  bath.  Then  add  one  pound  pale  lin- 
seed oil  varnish,  previously  healed,  and  after  settling,  one  pound 
of  oil  of  turpentine,  also  heated  beforehand.  Filter,  while  yd 
warm,  into  bottles.     Dries  slowly. 

2.  Two  ounces  India  rubber  finely  divided  and  digested  in  the 
same  way,  with  »  quarter  of  a  pound  of  camphcne,  and  half  an 
ounce  of  naphtha  or  benzole.  When  dissolve  add  one  ounce  of 
copal  varnish,  which  renders  it  more  dural)le.  Principally  for  gild- 
ing. 

3.  In  a  wide  mouthed  glass  bottle,  digest  two  ounces  of  India 
rubber  in  fine  shavings,  with  one  pound  5f  oil  of  turpentine,-  dur- 
ing two  days,  without  shaking,  then  stir  up  with  a  wooded  spatula. 
Add  another  pound  of  oil  of  (urpentiiie,  and  digest,  with  frequent 
agitation,  until  all  is  dissolved.  Then  mix  a  pound  and  a  half  of 
this  solution  with  two  pounds  of  very  white  copal-oil  varnish,  and 
a  pound  and  h  half  of  well  boiled  linseed  oil,  shake  and  digest  in 
a  sand  bath,  until  they  have  united  into  a  good  varnish. — For  mor- 
occo leather. 

4.  Four  ounces  India  rubber  in  fine  shavings  are  dissolved  in  a 
covcied  jar  by  means  of  a  sand  bath,  in  two  pounds  of  crude  ben- 


rKACTICAL    llECEIl'TS.  l')3 

zolf,  and  thcii  mixed  with  four  pounds  of  hot  linseed  oil  varnish, 
and  a  half  pcuiul  of  oil  of  tur[)L'ntin('.     Dries  very  well. 

5.  Flexible  l'«r«is/t.— Melt  one  pound  of  rosin,  and  add  gradu- 
ally half  a  pound  of  India  rubber  in  very  fine  shavings,  and  stir 
until  cold.  Then  heat  again,  slowly,  add  one  pound  of  linseed  oil 
varnish,  heated,  and  filter. 

6.  ^no^/ipr.— Dissolve  one  pound  of  gum  dammar,  and  a  half 
pound  of  India  rubber,  in  very  small  pieces,  in  one  pound  of  oil  of 
turpentine,  by  m^ans  of  a  water  bath.  Add  one  pound  of  hot  oil 
varnish  imd  filter. 

7.  India  rubber  in  small  pieces,  washed  and  dried,  are  fused  for 
three  hours  in  a  close  vessel,  on  a  gradually  heated  sand  bath  On 
removing  from  the  sand  bath,  open  the  vessel  and  stir  for  ten 
minutes,  then  close  again,  and  repeat  the  fusion  on  the  following 
day,  until  small  globule  appear  on  the  surface.  Strain  through  a 
wire  sieve. 

8.  Varnish  for  Water  proof  Goods  — Let  a  quarter  of  a  pound  of 
India  rubber,  in  small  pieces,  soften  in  a  half  pound  of  oil  of  tur- 
pentine, then  add  two  pounds  of  boiled  oil,  and  let  the  whole  boil 
for  two  hours  over  a  slow  coai  fire.  When  dissolved,  add  again  six 
pounds  of  boiled  linseed  oil  and  one  pound  of  litharge,  and  boil 
until  an  even  liquid  is  obtained      It  is  applied  warm. 

9.  Gutta  Percha  Varnish. — Clean  a  quarter  of  a  pound  of  Gutta 
Percha  in  warm  water  from  adhering  impurities,  dry  well,  dissolve 
in  one  pound  of  rectified  rosin  oil,  and  add  two  pounds  of  linseed 
oil  varnish,  boiling  hot.  Very  suitable  to  prevent  metals  from 
oxidation. 

BLACK  VAUMSn  FOR  HARNESa 

Digest  shellac  twelve  p.ms,  white  turpentine  five  parts,  gum 
sandarach  two  parts,  lam[)bhiek  one  part,  with  spirits  of  turpen* 
tine  four  parts,  alcohol  ninety-six  parts. 

BOILED    OIL    OR   LI\SEED-OIL    VARNISH. 

Boil  linseed  oil  sixty  parts,  with  litharge  two  parts,  and  white 
vitriol  one  part,  each  finely  powdered,  until  all  water  is  evaporated. 
Then  set  by.  Or,  rub  up  borate  of  manganese  four  parts,  with 
some  of  the  oil,  then  add  linseed  oil  three  thousand  parts,  and 
heat  to  boiling. 

DAMMAR  VARNISH. 

Gum  dammar  ten  parts,  gum  sandaraeh  five  parts,  gum  mastic 
one  ])art,  digest  at  a  low  heat,  occasionally  shaking,  with  spirits  of 
turpentine  twenty  parts.  Finally,  add  more  spirits  of  turpentine 
.o  give  the  consistence  of  syrup. 

COMMON  VARNISH. 

Digest  shellac  one  part,  with  alcohol  seven  or  eight  parts. 

WATERPROOF    VARNISHES. 

Take  one  pound  of  flowers  of  sulphur  and  one  gallon  of  linseei 
oil,  and  boil  them  together  until  they   are    tlioioiiglily   combined. 


134  rUACIICAI.    rvECKIl'TS, 

This  forms  a  good  varnish  for  waterproof  toxtile  fabrics.  Another 
is  made  with  four  pounds  oxjdo  of  lead,  two  pounds  of  lampblack, 
five  ounces  of  sulphur,  and  ten  pounds  of -India  rubber  dissolved 
in  turpentine.  These  substances,  in  such  proportions,  are  boiled 
together  until  they  arc  thoroughly  combined.  Coloring  matters 
may  be  mixed  with  them.  Twilled  cotton  may  be  rendered  water- 
proof by  the  application  of  the  oil  sulphur  varnish.  It  should  be 
applied  at  two  or  three  different  times,  and  dried  after  each  opera- 
tion. 

VAKNISHES    FOR    BALLOONS,    GAS   BAGS,    ETC. 

1.  India  rubber  in  shavings  one  ounce ;  mineral  naphtha  two 
lbs.  ;  digest  at  a  gentle  heat  in  a  close  vessel  till  dissolved,  and 
strain.  2.  Digest  one  pound  of  Indian  rubber,  cut  small,  in  six 
pounds  of  oil  of  turpentine  for  7  days,  in  a  warm  place.  Put  the 
mixture  in  a  water  bath,  heat  until  thoroughly  mixed,  add  one  gallon 
of  warm  boiled  drying  oil,  mix,  and  strain  when  cold.  3.  Linseed 
oil  one  gallon  ;  dried  white  copperas  and  sugar  of  lead,  each  three 
ounces;  litharge  eight  ounces  ;  boil  with  constant  agitation  till  it 
strings  well,  then  cool  slowly  and  decant  the  clear.  If  too  thick, 
thin  it  with  quicker  drying  linseed  oil. 

GOLD    VARNISn. 

Digest  shellace  sixteen  parts,  gum  sandarach,  mastic,  of  each 
three  parts,  crocus  one  part,  gum  gamboge  two  parts,  all  bruised, 
with  alcohol  one  hundred  forty  four  parts.  Or,  digest  seed-lec, 
sanda.r.ch,  mastic,  of  each  eight  parts,  gamboge  two  parts,  drag- 
on's blood  one  part,  white  turpentine  six  parts,  turmeric  four  parts, 
bruised,  with  alcohol  one  hundred  twenty  parts. 

WAINSCOT    TARNISH    FOR    HOUSE    PAINTING    AND    JAPANNING. 

Anime  eight  pounds;  clarified  linseed  oil  three  gallons;  litharge 
one-fourth  pound;  acetate  of  lead  one-half  pound;  sulphate  of  cop- 
per one-fourth  pound. 

All  these  materials  must  be  carefully  but  thoroughly  boiled  to- 
gether untill  the  mixture  becomes  quite  stringy,  and  then  five  and 
a  half  gallons  of  heated  turpentine  stirred  in.  It  can  be  easily 
deepened  in  color  by  the  addition  of  a  little  gold-size. 

,       IRON    WORK    BLACK. 

Put  48  Bbs.  asphaltura  into  an  iron  pot,  and  boil  for  4  hours ; 
during  the  first  2  hours,  introduce  7  Bis.  litharge,  3  lbs.  dried  cop- 
peras, and  10  galls,  boiled ;  add  l-8th  lb.  run  of  dark  gum,  with  2 
galls,  hot  oil.  After  pouring  the  oil  and  gum,  continue  the  boiling 
2  hours,  or  until  it  will  roll  into  hard  pills,  like  Japan.  When  cool, 
thin  it  off  with  80  galls,  turpentine,  or  until  it  is  of  proper  con- 
sistence. 

BLACK    JAPAN    VARNISH. 

Bitumen,  2  ounces ;  lampblack,  1  ounce ;  Turkey  umber,  -J 
ounce  ;  acetate  of  lead  ^  ounce ;  Venice  turpentine,  i  ounce ;  boil- 


PRACTICAL  RKCEJPTS.  155 

ed  oil,  I'i  ounces.  Molt  the  turpentine  and  oil  together,  carefully 
stiriiiji;  in  the  rest  of  the  ingredients,  previously  powdered.  Siui- 
met  all  together  for  ten  miniites. 

Tinware  is  japanned  with  Colored  Copal  Varnish,  and  then  bak- 
ed in  an  oven  until  the  varnish  becomes  perfectly  dry  and  hard. 
Varnishes  may  be  colored  with  any  of  the  pigments  used  in  oil 
painting. 

LEATHER  TARNISH. 

Durable  leather  varnish  is  composed  of  boiled  linseed  oil,  in 
which  a  drier,  such  as  litharge,  has  been  boiled.  It  is  colored  with 
lampblack.  This  varnish,  is  used  for  making  enamelled  leather. 
Common  leather  varnish,  which  is  used  as  a  substitute  for  black- 
ing, is  made  of  thin  lac-varnish  colored  with  ivory  black. 

VARNISH   FOR   SMOOTH    MOULDING    PATTERNS. 

Alcohol,  1  gall.;  Shell  Lac,  1  lb.;  Lamp  or  Ivory  Black,  suflScient 
to  color  it. 

FINE    BLACK   VARNISH    FOR    COACHES. 

Melt  in  an  Iron  pot,  Amber,  32  ozs.;  Resin,  6  ozs.;  Asphaltum, 
6  ozs.;  Drying  Linseed  Oil,  1  pt.;  when  partly  cooled  add  Oil  of 
Turpentine,  warmed  1  pt. 


LACKERS. 

GOLD   LACKER. 

Put  into  a  clean  four  gallon  tin,  one  pound  of  ground  turmeric, 
one  and  a  half  ounces  of  gamboge,  three  and  a  half  pounds  of  pow- 
dered gum  sandarach,  three  quarters  of  a  pound  of  shellac,  and  two 
gallons  of  spirits  of  wine.  When  shaken,  dissolved,  and  strained, 
add  one  pint  of  turpentine  varnish,  well  mixed. 

RED    SPIRIT     LACKER. 

Made  exactly  as  the  gold  lacker  with  these  ingredients ;  two 
gallons  of  spirits  of  wine,  one  pound  of  dragon's  blood,  three 
pounds  of  Spanish  annotto,  three  and  a  quarter  pounds  of  gum 
sandarach,  and  two  pints  of  turpentine. 

PALE    BRASS    LACKER. 

Two  galls,  spirits  of  wine  ;  3  oz.  Cape  aloes ;  cut  small  1  fi>.  fine 
pale  shellac ;  1  oz.  gamboge,  cut  small ;  no  turpentine  ; — varnish 
made  exactly  as  before.  But  observe,  that  those  who  make  lack- 
ers frequently  want  some  paler  and  some  darker  ;  and  sometimes 
inclining  more  to  the  particular  tint  of  certain  of  the  component 
ingredients.  Therefore,  if  a  4  oz.  phial  of  a  strong  solution  of 
each  ingredient  be  prepared,  a  lacker  of  any  tint  can  be  produced 
at  anv  time. 
14 


156  peac;tical  ekckipts. 


LACKER    FOB    TIN. 

Any  good  lacker  laid  upon  tin  gives  it  the  appearance  of  copper 
or  brass.  It  is  made  by  coloring  lac-vii,rnish  with  turmeric  to  im- 
part the  color  of  brass  to  it,  and  with  annotto,  to  give  it  the  color 
of  copper.  If  a  tin  plate  is  dipped  into  molten  brass,  the  latter 
metal  will  adhere  to  it  in  a  coat. 

LACKER    TARNISH. 

A  good  lacker  is  made  by  coloring  lac-varnish  with  turmeric 
and  annotto.  Add  as  much  of  these  two  coloring  substances  to 
the  varnish  as  will  give  it  the  proper  color;  then  squeeze  the  var- 
nish through  a  cotton  cloth,  when  it  forms  lacker. 

DKEP  GOLD  COLORED  LACKER. 

Seed-lac  three  ounces,  turmeric  one  ounce,  dragon's  blood  one- 
fourth  ounce,  alcohol  one  pint ;  digest  for  a  week,  frequently  shak- 
ing, decant  and  filter. 

Lackers  are  used  upon  poIii?hed  metals  and  wood  to  impart  the 
appearance  of  gold.  If  yellow  is  required,  use  turmeric,  aloes, 
saffron,  or  gamboge  ;  for  red,  use  annotto,  or  dragon's  blood,  to 
color.  Turmeric,  gamboge,  and  dragon's  blood,  generally  afford  a 
BuflScient  range  of  colors. 

LACKERS    FOR    PICTURES,    METAL,     WOOD    OR   LEATHER. 

1.  Seed-lac  eight  ounces,  alcohol  one  quart ;  digest  in  a  close 
vessel  in  a  warm  situation  for  three  or  four  days,  then  decant  and 
strain.  2.  Substitute  lac  bleached  by  chlorine  for  seedlac.  Both 
are  very  tough,  hard,  and  durable  ;  the  last  almost  colorless. 

DIRECTIONS    FOR    MAKING    LACKER. 

Mix  the  ingredients  ana  let  the  vessel  containing  them  stand  in 
the  sun,  or  in  a  place  slightly  warmed  three  or  four  days,  shaking 
it  frequently  till  the  gum  is  dissolved,  after  which  let  it  settle  from 
twentv-four  to  forty-eight  hours,  when  the  clear  liquor  may  he 
poured  off  for  use.  Pulverized  glass  is  sometimes  used  in  making 
lacker,  to  carry  down  the  impurities. 

LACKER   FOR    DIPPED    BRASS. 

Alcohol,  proof  specific  gravity  not  less  than  95-xOOths,  2  galls.; 
?eed-lac,  1  lb.;  gum  copal,  1  oz.;  English  saffron,  1  oz.;  annotto, 
I  oz. 

LACKER    FOR    BRONZED    BRASS. 

To  one  pint  of  the  above  lacker,  add.  gamboge,  1  oz  ;  and  after 
mixing  it  add  an  equal  quantity  of  the  first  lacker. 

DEEP  GOLD  COLORED  LACKER. 

Best  alcohol,  40  ozs. ;  Spanish  annotto,  8  grs. ;  turmeric,  2  drs. ; 
ehel-lac  i  oz.  ;  red  ganders,  12  grs.  ;  when  dissolved  add  spirits  ol 
turpentine,  30  drops. 


PRACTICAL     RECEIPTS.  157 

OOLn    CIII.ORKD    LACKER,    FOU    BRASS    NOT    DIPPED. 

Alcohol  4  galls.  ;  turmeric,  3  lbs.  ;  gamboge,  3  ozs.  ;  gum  san- 
daracli,  7  lbs.  ;   shellac,  1  J  lb.  ;   turpentine  varnish,  1  pint. 

GOLD    COLORKI)    LACKICR    FOR    DIPPKD    BRASS. 

Alcoliol,  36  ozs.  ;  seed-lac,  <>  ozs.  ;  amber,   2  ozs.  ;  gum  gutta, 

2  ozs. ;  I'ed  sandal  wood,  24  grs.  ;  dragon's  blood,  60  grs.  ;  Oriental 
saffron,  36  grs, ;   Pulverized  glass,  4  ozs. 

GOOD  LACKER  FOR  BRASS. 

Seed-lac,  6  czs. ;  amber  or  copal,  2  ozs.  ;  best  alcohol,  4  galls. ; 
pulverized  glass,  4  ozs. ;  dragon's  blood,  40  grs. ;  extract  of  red 
sandal  wood  obtained  by  water,  30  grs. 

LACKER    FOR    DIPPED    BRASS. 

Alcohol  12  galls.  ;  seed-lac,  9  lbs. ;  turmeric,  1  lb.   to  a  gallon  of 
the  above  mixture .  Spanish  saffron,  4  ozs. 
The  saffron  is  to  be  added  for  bronze  work. 

GOOD    LACKER. 

Alcohol,  8  ozs.;  gamboge,  1  oz.;  shell  lac,  3  ozs.;  annotto,  1  oz.; 
Eolution  of  3  ozs.;  of  seed  lac  in  1  pint  of  alcohol ;  when  dissolved 
add  ^  oz.  Venice  turpentine,  Joz  dragon's  blood,  will  make  it  dark; 
keep  it  in  a  warm  place  four  or  five  days. 

PALE  LACKER  FOR  TIN  PLATE. 

Best  alcohol,  8  ozs.;  turmeric,  4  drs.;  hay  saffron,  2  scs.;  dragon 
blood,  scs.;  red  sanders,  1  scs.;  shell  lac,  1  oz.;  gum  sanderach,  2 
drs.;  gum  mastic,  2  drs.;  canada  balsam,  f  drs.;  when  dissolved  adc 
spirits  of  turpentine,  80  drops. 

RED  LACKER  FOR  BRASS. 

Alcohol,  8  galls.;  dragon's  blood,  4  lbs.;  Spanish  annotto,  12  lbs.; 
gum  sanderach,  13  lbs.;  turpentine,  1  gall. 

PALE    LACKER    FOR     BRASS. 

Alcohol,  2  galls.;  cape  aloes  cut  small,  3  ozs.;  pale  shellac,  1 
lb.;  gamboge,  1  oz. 

REST    LACKER   FOR    BRASS. 

Alcohol,  4  galls.,  shell  lac,  2  lbs.;  amber  gum,  1  lb.;  copal,  20 
0Z3.;  seed  lac,  3  lbs.;  saffron,  to  color;  pulverized  glass,  8    ozs. 

COLOR   FOR    LACKER. 

Alcohol,  1  qt.;  annotto,  4  ozs. 

LACKER    FOR    PILOSOPniCAL    INSTRUMENTS. 

Alcohol,  80  ozs.;  gum  gutta,  3  ozs.;  gum  sandarac,  8  ozs.,  gum 
elemi,  8  ozs.;  dragon's  blood,  4  ozs;  seed  lac,  4  ozs.;  terra  mcrita, 

3  ozs.;  saffron,  8  grs.;  pulverized  glass,  12  oz.s. 


158  PRACTICAL    RECEIPTS. 


MISCELLANEOUS  CEMENTS. 


ARMENIAN    OR    DIAMOND    CEMENT. 

This  article,  so  much  esteemed  for  uniting  pieces  of  broken 
glass,  for  repairing  precious  stones,  and  for  cementing  them  to 
watch  cases  .and  other  ornaments,  is  made  by  soaking  isinglass  in 
water  until  it  becoms  quite  soft,  and  then  mixing  it  with  spirit  in 
which  a  little  gum  mastic  and  ammoniacum  have  been  dissolved. 

The  jewellers  of  Turkey,  who  are  mostly  Armenians,  have  » 
singular  method  of  ornamenting  watch  cases,  &c.,  with  diamonds 
and  other  precious  stones,  by  simply  glueing  or  cementing  them 
on.  The  stone  is  set  in  silver  or  gold,  and  the  lower  part  of  the 
metal  made  flat,  or  to  correspond  with  the  part  to  which  it  is  to 
be  fixed ;  it  is  then  wanned  gently,  and  has  the  glue  applied, 
which  is  so  very  strong  that  the  parts  so  cemented  never  separate  ; 
this  glue,  which  will  strongly  unite  bits  of  glass,  and  even  polished 
steel,  and  may  be  applied  to  a  variety  of  useful  purposes,  is  thus 
made  in  Turkey : — Dissolve  five  or  six  bits  of  gum  mastic,  each 
the  size  of  a  laige  pea,  in  as  much  spirits  of  wine  as  will  suiBce  to 
render  it  liquid ;  and  in  another  vessel,  dissolve  as  much  isinglass, 
previously  a  little  softened  in  water,  (though  none  of  the  water 
must  be  used.)  in  French  brandy  or  good  rum,  as  will  make  a  two- 
ounce  vial  of  very  strong  glue,  adding  two  small  bits  of  gum 
albanum,  or  ammoniacum,  which  must  be  rubbed  or  ground  till 
they  are  dissolved.  Then  mix  the  whole  with  a  sufficient  heat. 
Keep  the  glue  in  a  vial  closely  stopped,  and  when  it  is  to  be  used, 
set  the  vial  in  boiling  water.  Some  persons  have  sold  a  composi- 
tion under  the  name  of  Armenian  cement,  in  England  ;  but  this 
composition  is  badly  made  •,  it  is  much  too  thin,  and  the  quantity 
of  mastic  is  much  too  small. 

The  following  are  good  proportions :  isinglass,  soaked  in  water 
and  dissolved  in  spirit,  two  ounces,  (thick) ;  dissolve  in  this  ten 
giains  of  very  pale  gum  ammoniac,  (in  tears,)  by  rubbing  them  to- 
gether ;  then  add  six  large  tears  of  gum  mastic,  dissolved  in  the 
least  possible  quantity  of  rectified  spirit. 

Isinglass,  dissolved  in  proof  spirit,  as  above,  three  ounces;  bot- 
toms of  mastic  varnish  (thick  but  clear)  one  and  a  half  ounces  ; 
mix  well. 

When  carefully  made  this  cement  resists  moisture,  and  dries  col- 
orless. As  usually  met  with,  it  is  not  only  of  very  bad  quality,  but 
gold  at  exorbitant  prices. 

CEMKNT  FOR   MENDING    EARTHERN    AND    GLASS    WARE. 

1.  Heat  the  article  to  be  mended,  a  little  above  boiling  water 
heat,  then  apply  a  thin  coating  of  gum  shellac,  on  both  surfaces 
of  the  broken  vessel,  and  when  cold  it  will  be  as  strong  as  it  \va3 


PRACTICAL    RECEIPTS.  159 

oviginnlly.     2.  Dissolve  gum  shellac  in  alcohol,  apply  the  solution, 
and  hind  the  parts  firmly  together  until  the  cement  is  perfectly  dry. 

CEMENT    FOR    STONEWARE. 

Another  cement  in  which  an  analogous  substance,  the  curd  or 
caseum  of  milk  is  employed,  is  made  by  boiling  slices  of  skim-milk 
cheese  into  a  gluey  consistence  in  a  great  quantity  of  water,  and 
then  incorporating  it  with  quicklime  on  a  slab  <vi'Ji  a  muller,  or  in 
a  marble  mortar.  When  this  compound  is  applied  warm  to  brok- 
en edges  of  stoneware,  it  unites  them  very  firmly  after  it  is  cold 

IRON-RUST    CEMENT. 

The  iron-rust  cement  is  made  of  from  fifty  to  one  hundred  parts 
of  iron  borings,  pounded  and  silted,  mixed  with  one  part  of  sal- 
ammoniac,  and  when  it  is  to  be  applied  moistened  with  as  much 
water  as  will  give  it  a  pasty  consistency.  Formerly  flowers  of  sul- 
pliur  were  used,  and  mucii  more  sal-ammoniac  in  making  this  ce- 
ment, but  with  decided  disadvantage,  as  the  union  is  effected  by 
oxidiznient,  consequent  expansion  and  solidification  of  the  iron 
powder,  and  any  hetrogeneons  matter  obstructs  the  effect.  The 
best  proportion  of  sal-ammoniac  is,  I  believe,  one  per  cent  of  the 
iron  borings.  Another  composition  of  the  same  kind  is  made  by 
mixing  four  parts  of  fine  borings  or  filings  of  iron,  two  parts  of 
potter's  clay,  and  one  part  of  pounded  potsherds, and  making  them 
into  a  paste  with  salt  and  water.  Wlien  this  cement  is  allowed  to 
concrete  slowly  on  iron  joints,  it  becomes  very  hard. 

FOR    MAKING    ARCHITECTURAL    ORNAMENTS    IN    RELIEF. 

For  making  architectur.al  ornaments  in  relief,  a  moulding  com- 
position is  formed  of  chalk,  glue,  and  paper  paste.  Even  statues 
have  been  made  with  it,  the  paper  aiding  the  cohesion  of  the  mass. 


Mastics  of  a  resinous  or  bituminous  nature,  which  must  be 
eoftened  or  fused  by  heat,  are  the  following: — 

varley's  mastic. 

Mr.  S.  Varleys's  consists  of  sixteen  parts  of  whiting  sifted  and 
thoroughly  dried  by  a  red  heat,  adding  when  cold  a  melted  mix- 
ture of  sixteen  parts  of  black  rosin  and  one  of  bees'-wax,  and  stir- 
ring well  during  the  cooling. 

electrical  and  chemical  apparaths  cement. 

Electrical  and  chemical  apparatus  cement  consists  of  5  lbs.  of 
rosin,  1  of  bees'-wax,  1  of  red  ochre,  and  two  table-spoonsful  of 
Paris  plaster,  all  melted  together.  A  clieaper  one  for  cementing 
voltaic  plates  into  tvooden  troughs  is  made  with  6  pounds  of  rosin, 
1  pound  of  red  ochre  ^  of  a  pound  of  plaster  **f  Paris,  and  J  of  a 


IGO  PEACTICAL   RECEIPTS. 

a  pound  of  linseed  oil.  The  ochre  and  the  plaster  of  Paris  should 
be  calcined  beforehand,  and  added  to  the  other  ingredients  in  tlicir 
molted  state.  The  thinner  stratum  of  cement  that  is  into-posed, 
the  stronger,  generally  speaking,  is  the  junction. 

CEMENT    FOR    IRON    TUBES,    BOILERS,    ETC. 

Finely  powdered  iron  sixty-six  parts,  sal-ammoniac  one  part, 
water  a  sufficient  quantity  to  form  into  paste. 

CEMENT  FOR  ITORT,  MOTHER  OF  PEARL,  .  ETC. 

Dissolve  one  part  of  isinglass  and  two  of  white  glue  in  thirty  of 
water,  strain  and  evaporate  to  six  parts.  Add  one-thirtietli  part 
of  gum  mastic,  dissolved  in  half  a  part  of  alcohol,  and  one  part  of 
white  zinc.     When  required  for  use,  warm  and  shake  up. 

CEMENT    FOR    HOLES    IN    CASTINGS. 

The  best  cement  for  this  purpose  is  made  by  mixing  one  part  of 
sulphur  in  powder,  two  parts  of  sal-ammoniac,  and  eighty  parts  of 
clean  powdered  iron  turnings  Sufficient  water  must,  be  add 'd  to 
make  it  into  a  thick  paste,  which  should  be  pressed  into  the  lioles 
or  seams  which  are  to  be  filled  up.  The  ingredients  composing 
this  cement  should  be  kept  separate,  and  not  mixed  until  requin'd 
for  use.  It  is  to  be  applied  cold,  and  the  casting  should  not  be 
used  for  two  or  three  days  afterv/ards. 

CEMENT    FOR    COPPERSMITHS    AND    ENGINEERS. 

Boiled  linseed  oil  and  red  lead  mixed  together  into  a  putty  are 
often  used  by  coppersmiths  and  engineers,  to  secure  joints.  Tiie 
washers  of  leather  or  cloth  are  smeared  with  this  mixture  in  a  pas- 
ty state. 

A  CHEAP  CEMENT. 

Melted  brimstone,  either  alone,  or  mixed  with  rosin  and  brick 
dust,  forms  a  tolerably  good  and  very  cheap  cement. 

plumber's    CEMENT. 

Plumber's  cement  consists  of  black  rosin  one  part,  brick  dust 
two  parts,  well  incorporated  by  a  melting  heat. 

cement    for    BOTTLE-CORKS. 

The  bitumious  or  black  cement  for  bottle-corks  consists  of  pitch 
hardened  by  the  addition  of  rosin  and  brick-dust. 

CHINA    CEMENT. 

Take  the  curd  of  milk,  dried  and  powdered,  ten  ounces ;  quick- 
lime one  ounce ;  camphor  two  drachms.  Mix,  and  keep  in  closely 
stopped  bottles.  When  used,  a  portion  is  to  be  mixed  with  a  little 
water  into  a  paste,  to  be  applied  quickly. 


PRACTICAL    RECEIPTS.  161 


CEMENT    FOR   LEATHER. 

A  mixture  of  India-rubber  and  sholl-lac  varnish  makes  a  very 
adiiesive  leather  cement.  A  strong  solution  of  common  isinglass, 
with  a  little  diluted  alcohol  added  to  it,  makes  an  excellent  cement 
for  leather. 

MARBLE    CEMENT. 

Take  plaster  of  paris,  and  soak  it  in  a  saturated  solution  of 
alum,  then  bake  the  two  in  an  oven,  the  same  as  gvpsura  is  baked 
to  make  it  plaster  of  paris  ;  after  which  they  are  ground  to  pow- 
der. It  is  then  used  as  wanted,  being  mixed  up  with  water  like 
plaster  and  applied.  It  sets  into  a  very  hard  composition  capable 
of  taking  a  very  high  polish.  It  may  be  mixed  with  various 
coloring  minerals  to  produce  a  cement  of  any  color  capable  of 
imitating  marble. 

A    GOOD    CEMENT. 

Shellac  cMssolved  in  alcohel,  or  in  a  solution  of  borax,  fornu  a 
pretty  good  cement. 

CEMENT    FOR    MARBLE    WORKERS    AND  COPPERSMITHS. 

White  of  egg  alone,  or  mixed  with  finely  sifted  quicklime,  rvill 
answer  for  uniting  objects  which  are  not  exposed  to  moi  ture. 
The  latter  combination  is  very  strong,  and  is  much  employed  for 
joining  pieces  of  spar  and  marble  ornaments.  A  similar  composi- 
tion is  used  by  coppersmiths  to  secure  the  edges  and  rivets  of 
boilers;  only  bullock's  blood  is  the  albuminous  matter  used  instead 
of  white  of  egg. 

TRANSPARENT  CEMENT  FOR  GLASS. 

Dissolve  one  part  of  India-rubber  in  64  of  chloroform,  then  add 
gum  mastic  in  powder  14  to  24  parts,  and  digest  for  two  days  with 
frequent  shaking.     Apply  with  a  camels-hair  brush. 

CEMENT  TO  MEND  IRON  POTS  AND  PANS. 

Take  two  parts  of  sulphur,  and  one  part,  by  weight,  of  fine  black 
lead ;  put  the  sulphur  in  an  old  iron  pan,  holding  it  over  the  fiie 
until  it  begins  to  melt,  then  add  the  lead ;  stir  well  until  all  ia 
mixed  and  melted ;  then  pour  out  on  an  iron  plate,  or  smooth 
stone.  When  cool,  break  into  small  pieces.  A  sufficient  quantity 
of  this  compound  being  placed  upon  the  crack  of  the  iron  pot  to 
be  mended,  can  be  soldered  by  a  hot  iron  in  the  same  way  a  tin- 
smith solders  his  sheets.  If  there  is  a  small  hole  in  the  pot,  drive 
a  copper  rivet  in  it  and  then  solder  over  it  with  this  cement. 

CEMENT    TO   RENDER  CISTERNS    AND    CASKS    WATER    TIOHT. 

An  excellent  cement  forresisting  moisture  is  made  by  incorporat- 
ing thoroughtly  eight  parts  of  melted  g'ue,  of  flic  consistence  used 
by  carpenters,  with  four  parts  of  linseed  oil,  boiled  into  varnish 
with  litharge.     This  cement  hardens  is  about  loi ty-iij^ht  hours, 


IGU^^Va''     •"  PRACTICAL   RECEIPTS. 

and  renders  the  joints  of  wooden  cisterns  and  casks  air  and  water 
tiglit.  A  compound  of  gljie  with  one-fourtli  its  weight  of  Venice 
turpentine,  made  as  above,  serves  to  cement  glass,  inctal  and  wood, 
to  one  another.  Fresh-made  cheese  curd  and  old  skim-milk  cheese, 
boiled  in  water  to  a  slimy  consistence,  dissolved  in  a  solution  of 
bicarbonate  of  potash  are  said  to  form  a  good  cement  for  glass  and 
porcelain.  The  gluten  of  wheat,  well  prepared,  is  silso  a  good 
cement.  White  of  eggs,  with  flour  and  water  well-mixed,  and 
smeared  over  linen  cloth,  forms  a  ready  lute  for  steam  joints  in 
email  apparatus. 

CEMKNT    FOR    REPAIRING     FRACTURED     BODIES     OF    ALL    KINDS. 

White  lead  ground  upon  a  slab  with  linseed  oil  varnish,  and  kept 
out  of  contact  of  air,  affords  a  ctmcnt  capable  of  repairing 
fractured  bodies  of  all  kinds.  It  requires  a  few  weeks  to  harden. 
When  stone  or  iron  are  to  be  cemented  together,  a  compound  of 
equal  parts  of  sulphur  with  pitch  answers  very  well. 

CEMENT  FOR  CRACKS  IN  WOOD. 

Make  a  paste  of  slacked  lime  one  part,  rye-meal  two  parts,  with 
a  sufBcient  quantity  of  linseed  oil.  Or,  dissolve  one  part  of  glue 
in  sixteen  parts  of  water,  and  when  almost  cool  stir  in  sawdust 
and  prepared  chalk  a  sufBcient  quantity.  Or,  oil-varnish  thickened 
with  a  mixture  of  equal  parts  of  white-lead,  red  lead,  litharge,  and 
chalk. 

CEMENT    FOR   JOINING   METALS    AND    WOOD. 

Melt  rosin  and  stir  in  calcined  plaster  until' reduced  to  a  paste, 
to  which  add  boiled  oil  a  sufficient  quantity,  to  bring  it  to  the  con- 
sistence of  honey;  apply  warm.  Or,  melt  rosin  180  parts,  and  stir 
in  burnt  umber  30,  calcined  plaster  15,  and  boiled  oil  8  parts. 

GAS    fitters'    CEMENT. 

Mix  together,  resin  four  and  one-half  parts,  wax  one  part,  and 
Venetian  red  three  parts. 

IMPERVIOUS  CEMEMT  FOR  APPARATUS,  CORKS,  ETC. 

Zinc-white  rubbed  up  with  copal  varnish  to  fill  up  the  inden- 
tures ;  when  dry,  to  be  covered  with  the  same  mass,  somewhat 
thinner,  and  lastly  with  copal  varnish  alone. 

CEMENT  FOR  FASTENING  BRASS  TO  GLASS  VESSELS. 

Melt  rosin  150  parts,  wax  80,  and  add  burnt  ochre  30,  and  cal- 
cined plaster  2  parts.     Apply  warm. 

CEMENT    FOR    FASTENIKG    BLADES,    FILES,    ETC. 

Shellac  two  parts,  prepared  chalk  one,  powdered  and  mixed. 
The  opening  for  the  blade  is  filled  with  this  powder,  the  lower  end 
of  the  iron  heated  and  pressed  in. 

HYDRAULIC    CEMENT    PAINT. 

If  hydraulic  cement  be  mixed  with  oil,  it  forms  a  first-rate  anli- 
combustible  and  excellent  water-proof  paint  for  roofs  of  buildings, 
ouihouscs,  walls,  &c. 


PRACTIOAL    RECEirXS.  '^S / r^     163        '    '"     :' 

MISCELLANEOUS  RECEIPTS. 

PAINT    FOR    COATING    WIRE    WORK. 

Boil  good  linseed  oil  with  as  much  litharge  as  will  make  it  of  the 
consistency  to  be  laid  on  witn  the  brush ;  add  lampblack  at  the 
rate  of  one  part  to  every  ten,  by  weight  of  the  litharge;  boil  three 
hours  over  a  gentle  fire.  The  first  coat  should  be  thinner  thaa  the 
following  coats. 

RAZOR    PASTE. 

1.  Levigated  oxide  of  tin  (prepared  putty  powder)  1  oz.  ;  pow- 
dered oxalic  acid  1-4  oz. ;  powdered  gum  20  grs. ;  make  it  into  a 
stiff  paste  with  water,  and  evenly  and  thinly  spread  it  over  the 
strop.  With  very  little  fiiction,  this  paste  gives  a  fine  edge  to  the 
razor,  and  its  efficiency  is  still  further  increased  by  moistening  it. 

2.  Emery  reduced  to  an  impalpable  powder  2  parts ;  spermaceti 
ointment  1  part;  mix  together,  and  rub  it  over  the  strop. 

3.  Jewellers'  rouge,  blacklead,  and  suet,  equal  parts ;  mix. 

CUTTING    GLASS. 

To  cut  bottles,  shades,  or  other  glass  vessels  neatly,  heat  a  rod 
of  iron  to  redness,  and  having  filled  your  vessal  the  exact  height 
you  wish  it  to  bo  cut,  with  oil  of  any  kind,  you  proceed  very  grad- 
ually to  dip  the  red  hot  iron  into  the  oii,  which,  heating  all  along 
the  surface,  suddenly  the  glass  chips  and  cracks  riglit  round,  when 
you  can  lift  oif  the  upper  portion  clean  by  the  surface  of  the  oil. 

PREPARED    LIQUID    GLUE. 

Take  of  best  white  glue  16  ounces;  white  lead,  dry,  4  ounces; 
fain  water  2  pints;  alcohol  4  ounces.  With  constant  stirring  dis- 
solve the  glue  and  lead  in  the  water  by  means  of  a  water-bath. 
Add  the  alcohol,  and  continue  the  heat  for  a  few  minutes.  Lastly 
pour  into  bottles  wh.le  it  is  hot. 

LIQUID    GLUES. 

Dissolve  33  parts  of  best  (  Buffalo )  glue  on  the  steam  bath  in  a 
porcelain  vessel,  in  36  parts  of  water.  Then  add  gradually  stirring 
Gonstantlv,  3  parts  of  aqua  fortis,  or  as  much  as  is  suffcient  to  pre- 
vent the  glue  from  hardening  when  cool.  Or  dissolve  one  part  of 
powdered  alum  in  120  of  water,  add  120  parts  of  glue,  lU  of  acetic 
acid  and  40  of  alcohol,  and  digest. 

MARINE    GLUE. 

Dissolve  4  parts  of  India  rubber  in  34  parts  of  coal  tar  naphtha 
— aiding  the  solution  with  heat  and  agitation,  add  to  it  64  parts  of 
powdered  shellac,  which  must  be  heated  in  the  mixture,  till  the 
whole  is  dissolved.  While  the  mixture  is  hot  it  is  poured  upon 
metal  plates  in  sheets  like  leather.     When  required  for  use,  it  ia 


16  t  PRACTICAL    RECEIPTS. 

heated  in  a  pot,  till  soft,  and  then  applied  witli  «,  hrnsh  to  the  sur- 
faces to  be  joined.  Two  pieces  of  wood  joined  with  this  glue  can 
scarcely  be  sundered. 

DEXTRINE,    OU    BRITISH    GDM. 

Dry  potatostareh  heated  from  300°  to  eOC  until  it  becomes 
brown,  soluble  in  cold  water,  and  ceases  to  turn  blue  with  icdin<-. 
Used  by  calico  printers  and  others,  instead  of  gura  ai'abic. 

A    LIQUID    GLUE    THAT    KEEPS    FOR    YEARS. 

Dissolve  2  pounds  good  glue  in  2  1-9  pints  hot  water  ;  add  grad- 
ually, Y  oz.  nitric  acid,  and  mix  well. 

SEALING-WAX    FOR    FRUIT-CANS. 

Beeswax,  ^  oz. ;  English  vermillion,  \^  ozs. ;  gum  shellac,  2  J  ozs. ; 
rosin,  8  ozs.  Take  some  cheap  iron  vessel  that  you  can  always  keep 
for  the  purpose,  and  put  in  the  rosin  and  melt  it,  and  stir  in  the 
vermillion.  Then  add  the  shellac,  slowly,  and  stir  that  in,  and 
afterward  the  beeswax.  When  wanted  for  use  at  any  after  time, 
set  it  upon  a  slow  fire  and  molt  it  so  you  can  dip  bottle-nozzh  s, 
in.  For  any  purpose,  such  as  an  application  to  trees,  where  you 
want  it  tougher  than  the  above  preparation  will  make  it,  add  a 
little  more  beeswax,  and  leave  out  the  vermillion. 

If  the  vermillion  is  left  out  in  the  above,  the  wax  will  be  all  the 
better  for  it,  as  it  is  merely  used  for  coloring  purposes. 

FUSIBLE    METAL. 

1.  Bismuth  8  parts;  lead  5  parts;  tin  3  parts;  melt  together 
Melts  below  212  degrees  Fahr.  2.  Bismuth  2  parts;  lead  5  parts; 
tin  3  parts.  Melts  in  boiling  water.  3.  Lead  3  parts;  tin  2  parts; 
bismuth  5  parts;  mix.     Melts  at  197  deg.  Fahr. 

Remarks.  The  above  are  used  to  make  toy-spoons,  to  surprise 
children  by  their  melting  in  hot  liquors  ;  and  to  f  rm  pencils  for 
writing  on  asses'  skin,  or  paper  prepared  by  rubbing  burnt  harts- 
horn into  it. 

METALLIC    CEMENT. 

M.  Greshiem  states  that  an  alloy  of  copper  and  mercury,  pre- 
pared as  follows,  is  capable  of  attaching  itself  firmly  to  the  surfaces 
of  metal,  glass,  and  porcelain.  From  twenty  to  thirty  parts  of 
finely  divided  copper,  obtained  by  the  reduction  of  oxide  of  copiier 
with  hydrogen,  or  by  precipitation  from  solution  of  its  snlphnte 
with  zinc,  are  made  into  a  paste  with  oil  of  vitrol  and  seventy  parts 
of  mercury  added,  the  whole  being  well  triturated.  When  the 
amalgamation  is  complete,  the  acid  is  removed  by  washing  with 
boiling  water,  and  the  compound  allowed  to  cool.  In  ten  or  twelve 
hours,  it  becomes  sufficiently  hard  to  receive  a  brilliant  polish,  and 
to  scratch  the  surface  of  tin  or  gold.  By  heat  it  assumes  the  con- 
sistence of  wax;  and,  as  it  does  not  contract  on  cooling,  M.  Gresh- 
iem recommends  its  use  by  dentist*  for  stopping  teeth. 


PRACTICAL   RECEIPTS.  164 


ARTIFICIAL   OOLIt. 

This  is  a  new  motallic  alloy  which  is  now  very  extensively  used 
in  France  as  a  substitute  for  gold.  Furt^  copper  100  parts,  zinc,  oi 
preferably  tin  17  parts,  magnesia  6  parts,  sal  ammoniac  3-6  parts, 
quick  lime  1-8  parts,  tartar  of  commerce;  9  parts,  are  mixed  as  fol. 
lows:  The  copper  IS  first  melted,  then  the  magnesia,  sai  ammoniac, 
!ime,  and  tartar,  arc  tlicu  added,  sepaiately  and  by  degrees,  in  the 
form  of  powder;  the  whole  is  now  briskly  stirred  f)r  about  half  an 
hour,  so  as  to  mix  thoroughly;  and  then  thi^  zinc  is  added  in  small 
grains  by  throwing  it  on  the  surface  and  stirring  till  it  is  entir'?iy 
fused;  the  crucible  is  then  covered  and  tlu;  fusion  maintained  for 
about  33  minutes.  The  surface  is  then  skimmed  and  the  alloy  is 
ready  for  cafting. 

It  has  a  fine  grain,  is  malleable  and  takci  a  splendid  polish.  It 
does  not  corrode  readdy,  and  for  many  puiposes  is  an  excellent 
substitute  for  gold.  When  tarnished,  its  brilliancy  can  be  restor- 
ed by  a  little  acidulated  water.  If  tin  be  employed  instead  of  zinc 
the  alloy  will  be  more  brilliant.  It  is  very  much  used  in  France, 
and  must  ultimately  attain  equal  popularity  here. 

OR-MOLtT. 

The  or-mclu  of  the  brass  founder,  popularly  known  as  an  imita* 
tion  of  red  gold,  is  extensively  used  by  the  French  workmen  in 
metals.  It  is  generally  found  in  combination  wiUi  grate  and  stove 
work.  It  is  composed  of  a  greater  portion  of  coppor  and  \cs3  zinc 
than  ordinary  brass,  is  cleaned  readdy  by  means  of  acid,  and  is  bur- 
nished with  facility.  To  give  this  material  the  rich  appearance,  it 
is  not  unfrequently  brightened  up  after  "dipping"  (that  is  cleaning 
in  acid)  by  means  of  a  scratch  brush  (a  brush  made  of  fine  brass 
wire),  the  action  of  which  helps  to  produce  a  very  brilliant  gold-like 
surface.     It  is  protected  from  tarnish  by  the  application  of  lacker, 

BLANCHED   COPPER. 

Fuse  8  ounces  of  copper  and  ^  ounce  of  neutral  arsenical  salt  with 
a  flux  made  of  calcined  borax,  charcoal  dust  and  powdered  glass. 

BROWNING    GUN   BARRELS. 

The  tincture  of  iodine  diluted  with  onedialf  its  bulk  of  water,  is 
a  superior  liquid  for  browning  gun  barrels. 

SILVERING    POWDER   FOR   COATING   COPPER. 

Nitrate  of  silver  30  grains,  common  salt  30  grains,  cream  of  tar- 
tar o^  drachms;  mix,  moisten  with  water,  and  apply. 

ALLOY   FOR  JOURNAL   BOXES. 

The  best  alloy  for  journal  boxes  is  composed  of  copper,  24  lbs. ; 
tin,  24  lbs.  ;  and  antimony,  8  lb.  Melt  the  copper  first,  then  add 
the  tin,  and  lastly  the  antimony.  It.should  be  first  run  into  ingots, 
then  melted  aud  cast  in  the  form  required  for  the  boxes. 


166  PRACTICAL    RECKIPTS, 


ALLOY  FOR  BELLB  OF  CLOCKS. 


The  bt'lls  of  the  pendules,  or  ornamental  clocks,   made  in  Paris, 
are  composed  of  copper  72.00,  tin  2fi.56,  iron  1.44,  in  100  parts. 


AN    ALLOY    FOIl    TOOLS. 


An  alloy  of  1000  parts  of  copper  and  14  of  tin  is  said  to  furnisli 
tools,  which  hardened  and  sharpened  in  the  manner  of  the  ancients, 
afford  an  edge  nearly  equal  to  that  of  steel. 


ALLOY    FOR    CYMBALS    AND    GONGS. 


An  alloy  for  cymbals  and  gongs  is  made  of  100  parts  of  copper 
with  about  25  of  tin.  To  give  this  compound  the  sonorous  proper- 
ty in  the  highest  degree,  the  piece  should  be  ignited  after  it  is  cast, 
and  then  plunged  immediately  into  cold  water 


SOLDER    FOR    STEEL    JOINTS. 


Silver  19  pennyweights,  copper  1  pennyweight,   brass  2  penny- 
weights.    Melt  under  a  coat  of  charcoal  dust. 


SOFT   GOLD   SOLDER. 


Is  composed  of  four  parts  gold,  one  of  silver,  and  one  of  copper. 
It  can  be  made  softer  by  adding  brass,  but  the  solder  becomes 
more  liable  to  oxidize. 


Allow  dull  files  to  lay  in  diluted  sulphuric  acid  until  they  are 
bit  deep  enough. 

TO    PRETENT    RUSTING. 

Boiled  linseed  oil  will  keep  polished  tools  from  rusting  if  it  is 
allowed  to  dry  on  them.  Common  sperm  oil  will  prevent  them 
from  rusting  for  a  short  period.  A  coat  of  copal  varnish  is  fre- 
quently applied  to  polished  tools  exposed  to  the  weather. 

TO   GALVANIZE. 

Take  a  solution  of  nitro-muriate  of  gold  (gold  dissolved  in  a  mix- 
ture of  aquafortis  and  muriatic  acid)  and  add  to  a  gill  of  it  a  pint 
of  ether  or  alcohol,  then  immerse  your  copper  chain  in  it  for  about 
15  minutes,  when  it  will  be  coated  with  a  film  of  gald.  The  cop- 
per must  be  perfectly  clean  and  free  from  oxyd,  grease,  or  dirt,  or 
it  will  not  take  on  the  gold. 


niACTICAL    IIKlKIPTS.  IG'3 

VEixow  BRASS,  FOR  TURNING. — {Oommon  atlicle.) 

Copper,  20  lbs.  ;  zinc,  10  lbs.  ;.  lead  from  1    to   5    ozs.     Put  in 
the  lead  last  before  pouring  off. 

RED    BRASS,    FOR   TURNING. 

Copper,  24  lbs. ;  zinc,  5  lbs. ;  lead,  8  ozs.     Put  in  the  lead  last 
before  pouring  off. 

RED    BRASS,    FREE,    FOR   TURNING. 

Copper,  160  lbs. ;  zinc,  50  lbs. ;  lead,  10  lbs. ;  antimony,  44  ozs. 

ANOTHER  BRASS,  FOR  TURNING. 

Copper,  82  lbs. ;  zinc,  10  lbs. ;  lead,  1  lb. 

BEST    RED    BRASS,    FOR   FINE    CASTINGS. 

Copper,  24  lbs. ;  zinc,  5  lbs. ;  bismuth,  1  oz.      Put   in    the    bis- 
Kiuih  last  before  pouring  off. 

BRONZE    METAL. 

Copper,  7  lbs.  ;  zinc,  3  lbs.;  tin,  2  lbs. 

BRONZE    METAL. 

Copper,  1  lb. ;  zinc,  12  lbs.  ;  tin,  8  lbs. 

BELL  METAL,  FOR  LARGE  BELLS. 

Copper,  100  lbs. ;  tin  from  20  to  25  lbs. 

BELL  METAL,  FOR  SMALL  BELLS. 

Copper,  3  lbs.  ;   tin,  1  lb. 

COCK    METAL. 

Copper,  20  lbs. ;    lead,  8  lbs. ;  litharge,  1  oz.  ;  antimony,  3  ozs. 


BRITANNIA. 

HARDENING    FOR    BRITANNIA. 

To  be  mixed  separately  from  the. other  ingredients.     Copper,  'i 
lbs. ;  tin,  1  lb. 

GOOD    BRITANNIA    METAL. 

Tin,  150  lbs.  ;  copper,  3  lbs. ;   antimony,  10  lbs. 

BRITANNIA   METAL,    2d    QUALITY. 

Tin,  140  lbs.  ;   copper,  3  lbs.  ;  antimony,  9  lbs. 

BRITANNIA    METAL,    FOR    CASTING 

Tin,  210  ]!..-. ;  copper,  4  lbs. ;  antimony,  12  lbs. 
15 


168  PKACTICAL    RECEIPTS. 

BRITANNIA    METAL,  FOR    SPINNI.NO. 

Tin,  100  lbs. ;  Britannia  hardening,  4  lbs. ;  antimony,  4  lbs 

BRITANNIA    METAL,    FOR   REGISTERS. 

Tin,  100  lbs.  ;  hardening,  8  lbs. ;  antimony,  8  lbs. 

BEST    BRITANNIA   FOR   SPOUTS. 

Tin,  140  lbs.  ;  copper,  3  lbs. ;  antimony,  6  lbs. 

BEST    BRITANNIA    FOR    SPOONS. 

Tin,  100  lbs.  ;  hardening,  5  lbs.  ;  antimony,  10  lbs. 

BEST    BRITANNIA,    FOR    HANDLES. 

Tin,  140  lbs. ;  copper,  2  lbs. ;  antimony,  5  lbs. 

BEST    BRITANNIA,    FOR   LAMPS,    FILLERS,    AND    BPOUTS. 

Tin,  300  lbs.  ;  copper,  4  lbs.  ;  antimony,  15  lbs. 

CASTING. 

Tin,  100  lbs.  ;  hardening,  5  lbs.  ;  antimony,  5  lbs. 

LINING    METAL,    FOR    BOXES    OF    RAILWAY    CARS. 

Mix  tin,  24  lbs.  ;  copper,  4  lbs. ;  antimony,  8  lbs.  (for  a  harae*? 
log);  then  add  tin,  72  lbs. 

FINE    SILVER    COLORED    METAL. 

Tin,  100  lbs.  ;  antimony,  8  lbs.;  copper,  4  lbs.  ;  bismuth,  1  lb. 

GERMAN    SILVER,    FIRST    QUALITY    FOR    CASTING. 

Copper,  50  lbs. ;  zinc,  25  lbs.  ;  nickel,  25  lbs. 

GERMAN    SILVER,    SECOND    QUALITY    FOR    CASTING. 

Copper,  50  lbs. ;  zinc,  20  lbs.;  nickel,  (best  pulverized,)  10  IbSv 

GERMAN    SILVER,    FOR    ROLLING. 

Copper,  60  lbs. ;  zinc,  20  lbs. ;  nickel,  25  lbs. 

GERMAN    SILVER,    FOR    BELLS    AND    OTHER    CASTINGS. 

Copper,  60  lbs.  ;  zinc,  20  lbs. ;    nickel,   20  lbs.  ;    lead,  3   lbs  : 
iron,  (that  of  tin  plate  being  best,)  2  lbs. 

IMITATION    OF    SILVER. 

Tin,  3  ozs. ;  copper,  4  lbs. 

PINCHBECK. 

Copper,  5  lbs. ;  zinc,  1  lb. 

TOMBAC. 

Copper,  16  lbs.  ;  tin,  1  lb.  ;  zinc,  1  llx 

RED    TOMBAC. 

Copper,  10  lbs. ;  zinc_  1  lb 


PRACTICAL  RECEIPTS,  169 

BRITANNIA    METAL. 

Brass,  4 ;  tin,  4  parts ;  when  fused,  add  bismuth,  4 ;  and  anti- 
niony,  4  parts.  This  composition  is  added  at  discretion  to  melted 
t'n.  " 

HAKD    WHITE    METAL. 

Slieet  brass,  32  ozs.  ;  lead,  2  ozs.  j  tin,  2  ozs. ;  zinc,  1  oz. 

METAL    FOR    TAKING   IMPRESSIONS. 

Lead,  3  lbs. ;  tin,  2  lbs.  ;  bismuth  5  lbs. 

SPANISH    TCTANIA. 

Iron  or  steel,  8  ozs.  ;  antimony,  16  ozs.  ;  nitre,  3  ozs.  Mdt 
«<.d  harden  8  ozs.  tin  with  1  oz.  of  the  above  compound. 

ANOTHER    TDTANIA. 

Ji^timony,  4  ozs. ;   ar.^enic,  1  oz.  ;  tin,  2  lbs. 

FUSIBLE    ALLOT,    WHICH    MELTS    IN    BOILING    WATER. 

Bismuth,  8  ozs.  ;  tin,  3  ozs. ;  lead,  5  ozs. 

FUSIBLE    ALLOY,    FOR    SITERING    GLASS. 

Tin,  6  ozs. ;  lead,  10  ozs.  ;  bismuth,  21  ozs.  ;  mercury,  a  email 
quaniity. 


SOLDERS. 

SOLDER    FOR    GOLD. 

Gold,  6  pwts. ;  silver,  1  pwt.  ;  copper,  2  pwts. 

SOLDER    FOR    SILVER,    FOR    THE    USE    OF    JEWELLER'S. 

Fine  silver,  19  pwts.  ;  copper,  1  pwt.  ;  sheet  brass,  10  pw(s. 

WHITE    SOLDER,    FOR    SILVER. 

Silver,  1  oz.;  tin,  1  oz. 

WHITE    SOLDER,    FOR    RAISED    BRITANNIA    WARE. 

Tin,  100  lbs.,  copper,  3  ozs.  ;  to  make  it  free,  add  lead,  3  ozj. 

BEST    SOFT    SOLDER,  FOR    CAST    BRITANNIA    WARE. 

Tin,  8  lbs.  ;  lead,  5  lbs. 

YELLOW   SOLDER,    FOR    BPvASS,    OR    COPPER. 

Copper,  1  lb  ;  zinc,  1  lb. 

YELLOW    SOLDER,    FOR   BRASS   OR   COPPER. 

(Stronger  than  the  last.)  Copper,  32  lbs.  ;  zinc,  29  lbs.;  tin  1  lb. 

SOLI.ER,    FOR    COPPER. 

Copper,  10  llis.  ;   zinc,  '.)  lbs. 


170  PRACTICAi.    RECEIPTS. 

BLACK   SOLDER. 

Copper,  2  lbs. ;  zinc,  S  lbs.  ;  tin,  2  ozs. 

BLACK   SOLDKR. 

Sheet  brass,  20  lbs.  ;  tin,  6  lbs. ;  zinc,  1  lb. 

SILVER    SOLDER,    FOR    PLATED    MBTAJ. 

Fine  silver,  1  oz. ;   brass,  10  pwts. 

plumber's    SOLDER. 

Lead,  2 ;  tin,  1  part. 

tinman's    SOLDER. 

Lead,  1 ;  tin,  1  part. 

pewterer's  solder. 
Tin,  2 ;  lead,  1  part. 

HARD    SODDEB 

Copper,  2 ;  zinc,  1  part 


YELLOW    DIPPING    METAL. 

Copper,  32  lbs.  ;  zinc,  2  lbs.  ;  soft  solder,  2J  ozs. 

QUICK   BRIGHT   DIPPING   ACID,  FOR  BRASS  WHICH  HAS  BEEN  ORMOLOUD. 

Sulphuric  acid  1  gall. ;  nitric  acid,  1  gall. 

DIPPING    ACID. 

Sulphuric  acid,  12  lbs. ;  nitric  acid,  1  pint;  nitre,  4  lbs. ;  soot, 
2  handfuls ;  brimstone,  2  ozs.  Pulverize  the  brimstone  and  soak 
it  in  water  an  hour.     Add  the  nitric  acid  last. 

GOOD    DIPPING    ACID,    FOR    CAST    BRASS. 

Sulphuric  acid,  1  qt.,  nitre,  1  qt.;  water,  1  qt.  A  little  muriatic 
acid  may  be  added  or  omitted. 

DIPPING   ACID. 

Sulphuric  acid,  4  galls. ;  nitric  acid,  2  galls. ;  saturated  solution 
of  sulphate  of  iron  (copperas),  1  pint;  solution  of  suphate  of  cop- 
per, 1  qt. 

ORMOLU   DIPPING   ACID,    FOR   SHEET   BRASS. 

Sulphuric  acid,  2  galls.  ;  nitric  acid,  1  pt.  ;  muriatic  acid  1  pt.  ; 
water,  1  pt. ;  nitre,  12  lbs.  Put  in  the  muriatic  acid  last,  a  little 
at  a  time  and  stir  the  mixture  with  a  stick. 

ORMOLU   DIPPING    ACID,    FOR    SHEET    OR    CAST    BRASS. 

Sulphuric  acid,  1  gall. ;  sal  ammoniac,  1  oz.  ;  sulphur,  (in  flour,) 
1  oz. ;  blue  vitriol,  1  oz.  ;  saturated  solution  of  zinc  in  nitric  acid, 
mixed  with  an  equal  quantity  of  sulphuric  acid,  1  gall. 

TO    PREPARE    BRASS    WORK    FOR    ORMOLU   DIPPING. 

If  the  work  is  oily,  boil  it  in  lye  ;  and  if  it  is  finished  work,  filed 
or  turned,  dip  it  in  old  acid,  and  it  is  then  ready  to  bo  ormeloed; 


PRACTICAL    RECEIPTS.  l7l 

t>'**  U'  it  is  iinfinlslictl,  ami  free  from  oil,  pickle  it  in  strong  sul- 
phuric acid,  dip  in  pure  nitric  acid,  and  then  in  the  old  acid,  after 
which  it  will  be  ready  for  ormeloing. 

TO    KEPAIR    OLD    NITRIC    ACID    ORMOLU    DIPS. 

If  the  work  after  dipping  appears  coarse  and  spotted,  add  vitriol 
till  it  answers  the  purpose.  If  the  work  after  dipping  appears  too 
smooth,  add  muriatic  acid  and  nitre  till  it  gives  the  right  appear- 
ance. 

The  other  ormolu  dips  should  be  repaired  according  to  the  re- 
ceipts, putting  in  the  proper  ingredients  to  strengthen  them  They 
should  not  be  allowed  to  settle,  but  should  be  stirred  often  while 
using. 

VINEGAR    BRONZE    FOR    BRASS. 

Vinegar,  10  galls.  ;  blue  vitriol,  3  lbs. ;  muriatic  acid,  3  lbs.  ; 
corrosive  sublimate,  4  grs. ;  sal  ammonia,  2  lbs. ;  alum,  8  ozs. 

BROWN    BRONZE    DIP. 

Iron  scales,  1  lb.;  arsenic,  1  oz.  muriatic  acid,  1  lb.;  zinc,  (solid,) 
I  OZ.     Let  the  zinc  be  kept  in  only  while  it  is  in  use. 

GREEN    BRONZE     DIP. 

Wine  vinegar,  2  qts. ;  verditer  green,  2  ozs. ;  sal  ammoniac,  1 
oz. ;  salt,  2  ozs.  ;  alum,  -J-  oz. ;  French  berries,  8  ozs.  ;  boil  the 
Ingredients  together. 

AQUAFORTIS    BRONZE    DIP. 

Nitric  acid,  8  ozs. ;  muriatic  acid,  1  qt. ;  sal  ammoniac,  2  ozs. ; 
alum,  1  oz. ;  salt,  2  ozs.  ;  water,  2  galls.  Add  the  salt  after  boil- 
ing the  other  ingredients,  and  use  it  hot. 

OLIVE    BRONZE    DIP,    FOR    BRASS. 

Nitric  acid,  3  ozs;  muriatic  acid,  2  ozs;  add  titanium  or  palla- 
dium ;  when  the  metal  is  dissolved  add  2  galls,  pure  soft  water  to 
each  pint  of  the  solution. 

BROWN    BRONZE    PAINT    FOR    COPPER   VESSELS. 

Tincture  of  steel,  4  ozs. ;  spirits  of  nitre,  4  ozs. ;  essence  of  den- 
(li,  4  ozs. ;  blue  vitriol,  1  oz. ;  water  I  pint.  Mix  in  a  bottle.  Ap- 
l)ly  it  with  a  line  brush,  the  vessel  being  full  of  boiling  water  var- 
nish after  the  application  of  the  bronze. 

BRONZE    FOR    ALL    KINDS    OF    METAL. 

Muriate  of  ammonia  (sal  amoniac),  4  drs. ;  oxalic  acid,  1  dr.; 
vinegar,  1  pint.  Dissolve  the  oxalic  acid  first.  Let  the  work  be 
clean.  Put  on  the  bronze  with  a  brush,  repeating  the  operatio*; 
as  many  times  as  may  be  necessary. 

BRONZE  PAINT  FOR  IRON  OR  BRASS. 

Chrome  green,  2  lbs. ;  ivory  black,  1  oz. ;  chrome  yellow,  1  oz. ; 
good  japan,  1  gill ;  grind  all  togi^her  and  mix  with  linseed  oil. 


172  PUACTlC'Al.    KECEIPTS. 

TO    BRONZE    GUN    BARRELS. 

Dilute  nitric  acid  with  water  and  rub  the  gun  barrels  with  it; 
lay  them  by  for  a  few  days,  then  rub  them  with  oil  and  polish  them 
with  bees-wax. 

SILVERING    BY    HEAT. 

Dissolve  1  oz.  of  silver  in  nitric  acid;  add  a  small  quantity  of 
salt;  then  wash  it  and  add  sal  ammoniac,  or  6  ozs.  of  salt  and  white 
vitriol;  also  J  oz.  of  corrosive  sublimate,  rub  them  together  till 
they  form  a  paste,  rub  the  piece  which  is  to  be  silvered  with  the 
paste,  heat  it  till  the  silver  runs,  after  which  dip  it  in  a  weak  vitriol 
pickle  to  clean  it. 

MIXTURE    FOR    SILVERINfJ. 

Dissolve  2  ozs.  of  silver  with  3  grains  of  corrosive  sublimate; 
add  tartaric  acid,  4  lbs. ;  salt,  8  qts. 

SEPARATE    SILVER    FROM    COPPER. 

Mix  sulphuric  acid  1  part ;  nitric  acid,  1  part ;  water,  1  part  boil 
the  metal  in  the  mixture  till  it  is  dissolved,  and  throw  in  a  li'cie 
salt  to  cause  the  silver  to  subside. 

SOLVENT  FOR  GOLD. 

Mix  equal  quantities  of  nitric  and  muriatic  acids. 

CniNESE    WHITE    COPPER. 

Copper,  40.4  ;  nickel,  31.6  ;  zinc,  25.4;  iron,  2.6  parts. 

MANnEIM  GOLD. 

Copper,  3 ;  zinc,  1  part  and  a  small  quantity  of  tin. 

ALLOY  OF  THF  STANDARD    JIEASURES  USED  BY  TOE  BRITISH    GOVERMErT 

Copper  576 ;  tin,  69 ;  and  brass,  48  parts. 

BATH    METAL. 

Brass,  32 ;  and  zinc,  9  parts. 

SPECULHM    METAL. 

Copper,  6  ;  tin,  2  ;  and  arsenic,  1  part  or,  copper,  7 ;  zinc,  H  : 
and  tin,  4  parts. 

BLANCHED     COPPER. 

Copper,  3  ;  and  arsenic,  -J-  part. 

COMMON    PEWTER. 

Tin,  4 ;  Lead,  1  part. 

BEST     PEWTER. 

Tin,  100  ;  antimony,  17  parts. 

A    METAL    THAT    EXPANDS    I\     COOLING. 

Lead,  9  ;  antimony,  2;  bismuth,  1  part.  This  metal  is  very  use 
ful  in  filing  small  defects  in  iron  castings,  &c. 

queen's    METAL. 

Tin,  9;  antimony,  1  ;    bismuth,  1  ;   lead,  1  pm-t. 

MOCK     PLA'lINUM. 

Brass,  8  ;  zinc,  5  paits. 


PllACTlCAL    RECEIPTS.  173 


MOCK    fiOLD. 


Fuse  togotiior  copper,  16;  plutimim,  7 ;  zinc,  1  part.  When 
etcel  is  alloyed  witli  1-500  part  of  platinum,  or  with  1-000  part  of 
silver,  it  is  rendered  much  harder,  more  malleable,  and  better 
adapted  for  every  kind  of  cutting  instrument. 

Note. — In  making  alloys,  earn  must  be  taken  to  have  the  more 
infusible  metals  melted  first,  and  afterwards  add  the  others. 

COMPOSITION    USED    IN    WELDING    CAST    STEEL. 

Borax,  10;  sal  ammoniac,  1  part;  grind  or  pound  them  roughly 
together  ;  then  fuse  them  in  a  metal  poi  over  a  clear  fire,  taking 
care  to  continue  the  heat  until  all  spume  has  disappeared  from  tlie 
surface.  When  the  liquid  appears  clear,  the  composition  is  ready 
to  be  poured  out  to  cool  and  concrete  ;  afterwards  being  ground  lo 
a  line  powder,  it  is  ready  for  use.  To  use  this  composition,  the 
steel  to  be  welded  is  raised  to  a  heat  which  may  be  expressed  by 
"  bright  yellow;"  it  is  then  dipped  among  the  welding  powder,  and 
again  placed  in  the  fire  until  it  attains  the  same  degree  of  heat  as 
before,  it  is  then  ready  to  be  placed  under  the  hammer. 

CAST    lEON   CEMENT. 

Clean  borings,  or  turnings,  of  cast  iron,  16  ;  sal  ammoniac,  2  ; 
flour  of  suiphur,  1  part;  mix  them  well  together  in  a  mortar  and 
keep  them  dry.  When  required  for  use,  tnke  of  tlie  mixture  1  ; 
clean  borings,  20  parts ;  mix  thoroughly,  and  add  a  sufficient 
quantity  of  water.  A  little  grindstone  dust  added  improves  ihe 
cement. 

KLUID    FOR    TINNING    IRON,    COPPER,    BRASS    AND    ZINC. 

To  1  quart  of  muriatic  acid  add  small  pieces  of  zinc,  until  bub- 
bles cease  to  rise  ;  add  2  ounces  ground  sal  ammoniac.  For  tin 
add  2  parts  water. 


174   STKEXGTII  OF  MATEKIALS — GKIF.U  AND  OTHERS. 

STRENGTH    OF    MATERIALS. 

\^From  Grier^s  Mechanic's  Calculator,  c&c] 

Bar  of  Iron. — The  average  breaking  weight  of  a  Bar  of 
Wrought  Iron,  1  inch  sqiuive,  is  25  tons  ;  its  dasticity  is  destroy- 
ed, however,  by  about  two-fifths  of  that  weight,  or  10  tons.  It  is 
extended  within  the  limits  of  its  elasticity,  .0(10096,  or  onc-ten- 
thousundth  part  of  an  inch  for  every  ton  of  strain  per  square  inch 
of  sectional  area.  Hence,  the  greatest  constant  load  should  never 
exceed  one-fifth  of  its  breaking  weight  or  5  tons  for  every  square 
incli  of  sectional  area. 

The  lateral  strength  of  wrought  iron,  as  compared  with  cast 
iron  is  as  14  to  9.  Mr.  Barlow  finds  that  wrought  iron  bars,  3 
inches  deep,  11-2  inches  thick,  and  33  inches  between  the  sup- 
ports, will  carry  4  1-2  tons. 

Bridgss. — The  greatest  extraneous  load  on  a  square  foot  is  about 
120  pounds. 

Floors. — The  least  load  on  a  square  foot  is  about  160  pounds. 

KooFS. — Covered  with  slate,  on  a  square  foot,  51   1-2  pounds. 

Beams. — When  a  beam  is  supported  in  the  middle  and  oaded  at 
each  end,  it  will  bear  the  same  weight  as  when  supported  at  both 
ends  and  loaded  in  the  middle;  that  is,  each  end  will  bear  half  the 
weight. 

Cost  Tror)  Beams  should  not  be  loaded  to  more  than  one-fifth  of 
their  ultimate  strength. 

The  strength  of  similar  beams  varies  inversely  as  their  lengths ; 
that  is,  if  .  beam  10  feet  long  will  support  1000  pound.s,  a  similar 
beam  20  feet  long  would  support  only  500  pounds. 

A  beam  supported  ar  one  <nd  will  sustam  only  one-fourth  part 
the  weight  which  it  would  if  supported  a    both  ends. 

When  a  beam,  is  fixed  af  both  ends,  and  loaded  in  the  middle,  it 
will  bear  one-half  more  than  it  will  when  loose  at  both  ends. 
When  the  beam  is  loaded  uniformly  throughout  it  w^ill  bear  double. 
When  the  beam  is  fixed  at  both  ends,  and  loaded  uniformly,  it 
will  bear  triple  the  weight. 

In  any  beam,  standing  obliquely,  or  in  a  sloping  direction,  its 
Btrengh  or  strain  willtaeequal  to  that  of  a  beam  of  the  same  breadth, 
thickness,  and  material,  but  only  of  the  length  of  the  horizontal 
distance  between  the  points  of  support. 

In  the  construction  of  beams,  it  is  necessary  that  their  form 
should  be  such  that  they  will  be  equally  strong  throughout.  If  a 
beam  be  fixed  at  one  end,  and  loaded  at  the  other,  and  the  breadth 
uniform  throughout  its  length,  then,  that  the  beam  may  be  equally 
strong  throughout,  its  form  must  be  that  of  a  parabola.  This  form 
is  generally  used  in  the  beams  of  steam  engines. 

When  a  beam  is  regularly  diminished  towards  the  points  that  are 
least  strained,  so  that  all  the  sections  are  similar  figures,   wlicther 


STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS GRIEK  AND  OTHERS.   1  75 

it  be  supported  at  each  end  and  loaded  in  tlie  middle,  or  supported 
in  'Jic  middle  and  loaded  at  each  end,  the  outline  should  be  a  cubic 
parabola. 

When  a  beam  is  supported  at  both  ends,  and  is  of  the  same 
breadth  throughout,  then,  if  the  load  be  uniformly  distributed 
throiighotit  the  length  of  the  beam,  the  line  bounding  the  compress- 
ed side  should  be  a  semi-ellipse. 

The  same  form  should  bo  made  use  of  for  the  rails  of  a  wagon  way, 
whi're  they  have  to  resist  the  pressure  of  a  load  rolling  o\er  them. 

8iniilar^/a/esof  the  same  thickness,  either  supported  at  the  ends 
or  all  round,  will  carry  the  the  same  weight  either  uniformly 
di.-Jtribuied  or  laid  on  sinilar  points,  whatever  bo  their  extent. 

The  lateral  strength  of  any  beam,  or  bar  of  wood,  stone,  metal,  &c., 
is  in  proportion  to  its  breadth  multiplied  by  depthf.  In  square 
beams  the  lateral  strengths  are  in  proportion  to  the  cubes  of  the 
sidL's,  and  in  general  of  like-sided  beams  as  the  cubes  of  the  similar 
sides  of  the  section. 

The  lateral  strength  of  any  beam  or  bar,  one  end  being  fixed  in  the 
wall  and  the  other  projecting,  is  inversely  as  the  distance  of  the 
weight  from  the  section  acted  upon ;  and  the  strain  upon  any  sec- 
tion is  directly  as  the  distance  of  the  weight  from  that  section. 

The  absolute  strength  of  ropes  or  bars,  pulled  lengthwise,  is  in 
proportion  to  the  squares  of  their  diameters.  All  cylindiical  or 
prismatic  rods  are  equally  strong  in  every  part,  if  they  are  equally 
thick,  but  if  not  they  will  break  where  the  thickness  is  least. 

The  strength  of  a  tube,  or  hollow  cylinder,  is  to  the  strength  of  a 
solid  one  as  the  difference  between  the  fourth  powers  of  the  ex- 
terior and  interior  diameters  of  the  tube,  divided  by  the  exterior 
diameter,  is  to  the  cube  of  the  diameter  of  a  solid  cylinder, — the 
quantity  of  matter  in  each  being  the  same.  Heuce,  from  this  it 
will  be  found,  that  a  hollow  cylinder  is  one-half  stronger  than  a 
solid  one  having  the  same  weight  of  materiaL 

The  strength  of  a  column  to  resist  being  crushed  is  directly  as 
the  square  of  the  diameter,  provided  it  is  not  so  long  as  to  have  a 
chance  of  bending.  This  is  true  in  metals  or  stone,  but  in  timber 
the  proportion  is  rather  greater  than  the  square. 

MODELS    PROPORTIONED    TO    MACHINES. 

The  relation  of  models  to  machines,  as  to  strength,  deserves  the 
particular  attention  of  the  mechanic.  A  model  may  be  perfectly 
proportioned  in  all  its  parts  as  a  model,  yet  the  machine,  if  con- 
structed in  the  same  proportion,  will  not  be  suflBciently  strong  in 
every  part;  hence,  particular  attention  should  be  paid  to  the  kind 
of  strain  the  different  parts  are  exposed  to;  and  from  the  state- 
ments which  follow,  the  proper  dimensions  of  the  structure  may  be 
determined. 

If  the  strain  to  draw  asunder  in  the  model  be  1,  and  if  the  struc- 
ture is  8  times  lager  than  the  model,  then  the  stress  in  the  struc- 
ture will  be  8|  equal  512.  If  the  structure  is  6  times  as  large  aa 
(he  mod"I,  then  the  stress  on  the  structure  will  be  C|  equal  216, 


ITO  STRENGTH  OF  MATEHTALR finiER  AND  OTIIEnS, 

and  so  on;  therefore,  the  structure  will  be  much  less  firm  than  the 
model ;  and  this  the  more,  as  the  structure  is  cube  times  greater 
tluui  the  model.  If  we  wish  to  determine  the  greatest  size  we  can 
make  a  machine  of  which  we  have  a  model,  we  have. 

The  greatest  weight  which  the  beam  of  the  model  can  bear,  di- 
vided by  the  weight  which  it  actually  sustains  equal  a  quotcnt 
which,  when  multiplied  by  the  size  of  the  beam  in  the  model,  will 
give  the  greatest  possible  size  of  the  same  beam  in  the  structure.  / 

FjX. — if  a  beam  in  the  model  be  7  inches  long,  and  bear  a  wci<;lit 
of  4  lbs.  but  is  capable  of  bearing  a  weight  of  26  lbs. ;  what  is  the 
greatest  length  which  we  can  make  the  corresponding  beam  in  the 
6tructure  ?     Here 

26  -i-  4  =  6-5,     therefore,  6-5  y  V  =  45-5  inches. 

T'le  strength  to  resist,  crushing  increases  from  a  model  to  a  struc- 
ture in  proportion  to  their  size,  but,  as  above,  the  strain  increases 
as  tbe  cubes;  wherefore,  in  this  ease,  also,  the  model  will  be  stron- 
ger than  the  machine,  and  the  greatest  size  of  the  structure  will 
be  found  by  employing  the  square  root  of  the  quotient  in  the  last 
rule,  instead  of  the  cjuotient  itself;  thus, 

If  the  greatest  weight  which  the  column  in  a  model  can  bear  is 
3  cwt.,  and  if  it  actually  bears  28  lbs.,  then,  if  the  column  be  18 
inches  high,  we  have 

/  (  ^)  =  8-564  ;  wherefore  3-464  X  18  =  62-352 
inches,  the  length  of  the  column  in  the  structure. 


[From  Adcock^s  Engineer.'] 

List  of  metals,  arranged  according  to  their  strength. — Steel, 
wrought-iron,  cast-iron,  platiimm,  silver,  copper,  brass,  gold,  tin, 
bismuth,  zinc,  antimony,  lead. 

According  to  Tredgold's  and  Duleau's experiments,  a pieceof  the 
best  bar-iron  1  square  inch  across  the  end  would  bear  a  weight  of 
about  77.373  lbs.,  while  a  similar  piece  of  cast-iron  would  be  torn 
asunder  by  a  weight  of  from  16,243  to  19,464  lbs.  Thin  iron  wires, 
arranged  parallel  to  each  other,  and  presenting  a  surface  at  their 
extremity  of  1  square  inch,  will  carry  a  mean  weight  of  126,340  lbs. 

List  of  woods,  arranged  according  to  their  strength. — Oak,  alder, 
lime,  box,  pine  ( sylv.),  ash,  elm,  yellow  pine,  fir. 

A  piece  of  well-dried  pine  wood,  presenting  a  section  of  1  square 
inch,  is  able,  according  Eytelwein,  to  support  a  weight  of  from 
15,646  lbs.  to  20,408  lbs.,  whilst  a  similar  piece  of  oak  will  carry 
as  much  as  25,850  lbs. 

Hempen  cords,  twisted,  will  support  the  following  weights  to  the 
square  inch  of  their  section  : 

I  inch  to  1  inch  thick,  8,746  lbs. ;  1  to  3  inches  thick,  6,800  lbs.; 
3  to  5  inches  thick,  5,345  lbs.;  5  to  7  inches  thick,  4,860  lbs. 

Tredgold  gives  the  following  rule  for  finding  the  weight  in  lbs. 
which  a  hempen  rope  will  be  capable  of  supporting:  Multiply  the 
eqi'are  of  the  circumference  in  inches  by  200,  and  the  product  will 
b'  the  quantity  sought. 


STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS — GRIER  AM)  OTHERS.    177 

In  llie  practical  application  of  these  measures  of  absolute  strength, 
thill  of  metals  ?hou!cl  be  reckoned  at  one-half,  and  that  of  woods  and 
cords  at  one-third  of  their  estimated  value. 

In  a  paraliielopipcdon  of  imiform  thickness,  supported  on  two 
points  and  loaded  in  the  middle,  the  lateral  strength  is  dlrecllg  as  the 
product  of  the  breadth  into  the  square  of  the  depth,  and  inversely  as  the 
length.  Let  W  represent  the  lateral  strength  of  any  material,  esti- 
mated by  the  weight,  b  the  breadth,  and  (/  the  depth  of  its  end,  and 
/  the  distance  between  the  points  of  support ;  then  W=fd^b  -r-  -II. 

If  the  parellelopipedon  be  fastened  only  at  one  end  in  a  horizon- 
tal position,  and  the  load  be  applied  at  the  opposits  end,  W  =  / 
dH  -^  41. 

It  is  to  be  observed  that  the  three  dimensions,  b,  d,  and  /,  are  to 
be  taken  in  the  same  measure,  and  that  b  bo  so  great  that  no  lateral 
curvature  arise  from  the  we.ght;  fin  each  fornmla  represents  the 
lateral  strength,  which  varies  in  ditferent  materials,  and  which  must 
be  learnt  experimentally. 

A  beam  having  a  rectangular  end,  whose  breadth  is  two  or  three 
times  greater  than  the  breadth  of  another  beam,  has  a  power  of 
suspension  respectively  two  or  three  times  greater  than  it;  if  the 
end  be  two  or  three  times  deeper  than  the  end  of  the  other,  the 
Buspfnsion  power  of  that  which  has  the  greater  depth  exceeds  the 
suspension  power  of  the  other,  four  or  nine  times;  if  its  length  be 
two  or  three  times  greater  than  than  the  length  of  another  beam, 
its  power  of  suspension  will  be  -J- 1-3  respectively  that  of  the  other  ; 
provided  that  in  each  case  the  mode  of  suspension,  the  position  of 
the  weight,  and  other  circumstances  be  similar.  Hence  it  follows 
that  a  beam,  one  of  whose  sides  tapers,  has  a  greater  power  of 
suspension  if  placed  on  the  slant  than  on  the  broad  side,  and  that 
the  powers  of  suspension  in  both  cases  are  in  the  ratio  of  their 
.->i(les;  so,  for  instance,  a  beam,  one  of  whose  sides  is  double  the 
width  of  the  other,  will  carry  twice  as  much  if  placed  on  a  narrow 
side,  as  it  would  if  laid  on  the  wide  one. 

In  a  piece  of  round  timber  ( a  cylinder)  the  power  of  suspension 
is  in  proportion  to  the  diameters  cubed,  and  inversely  as  the  length; 
thus  a  beam  with  a  diameter  two  or  three  times  longer  than  that 
of  another,  will  carry  a  weight  8  or  27  times  heavier  respectively 
than  that  whose  diameter  is  unity,  the  mode  of  fastening  and  load- 
ing it  being  similar  in  both  cases. 

The  lateral  strength  of  square  timber  is  to  that  of  a  tree  whence 
it  is  hewn  as  10  :  17  nearly. 

A  considerable  advantage  is  frequently  secured  by  using  hollow 
cylinders  instead  of  solid  ones,  which,  with  an  equal  expenditure 
of  materials,  have  far  greater  strength,  provided  only  that  the  solid 
part  of  the  cylinder  be  of  a  sufficient  thickness,  and  that  the  work- 
manship be  good  ;  especially  that  in  cast  metal  beams  the  thickness 
be  uniform,  and  the  metal  free  from  flaws.  According  to  Eytelwein, 
such  hollow  cylinders  arc  to  solid  ones  of  equal  weight  of  metal  as 
1.212  :  1,  when  the  inner  semi-diameters  is  to  the  outer  as  1  :  2; 


ITS   STIlEKCTll   UV  :.;ATi:UlAl-S dl.IKU  AND  OTIIEKS. 

iiccording  to  Tiodgold  as  17  :  10,  wlieu  the  two  seiiii-diametois  are 
to  each  other  as  15  :  25,  and  as  2  :  1,  when  they  arc  to  each  other 
as  7  :  10. 

A  method  of  increashig  the  suspensive  power  of  timber  supported 
Ht  both  ends,  is,  to  saw  down  from  -J-  to  -^  of  its  depth,  and  forcibly 
drive  in  a  wedge  of  metal  or  hard  wood,  until  the  timber  is  slightly 
raised  at  the  middle  out  of  the  horizontal  line.  By  experiment  it 
was  found  that  the  suspensive  power  of  a  beam  thus  cut  1-3  of  its 
depth  was  increased  l-19th,  when  cut  ^  it  was  increased  l-29th, 
and  wnen  cut  S-4th  through  it  was  increased  l-87tb. 

The  force  required  to  crush  a  body  increases  as  the  section  of  the 
body  increases ;  and  this  quantity  being  constant,  the  resistance 
of  tiie  body  diminishes  as  the  height  increases. 

According  to  Eytelwein's  experiments,  the  strength  of  columns 
or  timbers  of  rectangular  form  in  resisting  compression  is,  as 

1.  The  cube  of  their  thickness  (the  lesser  dimension  of  their  sec- 
tion). 2.  As  the  breadth  (the  greater  dimension  of  their  section). 
3.  inversely  as  the  square  of  their  length. 

Cohesive  power  of  Bars  of  Metal  one  inch,  sr^-uare,  in   Tons. 

Iron,  Swedish  bar 29.20  Copper,  wrought in.SO 

Do.,  Russian  bar 26.70  Gun  metal    10.23 

Do.,  English  bar 25.00  Copper,  cast 8.51 

Steel,  cast 59.93  Brass,  cast,  yellow 8.(>1 

Do.,  blistered 59.43  Iron,  cast. .". 7.87 

Do.,  sheer 50.97  Tin,  cast 2.11 


Relative  Stringth  of  Cast  and  Malleable  Iron, 
It  has  been  found,  in  the  course  of  the  experiments  made  by  Mr. 
Hodgkinson  and  Mr.  Fairbairn,  that  the  average  strain  that  cast 
iron  will  bear  in  the  way  of  tension,  before  breaking,  is  about  seven 
tons  and  a  half  per  square  inch;  the  weakest,  in  the  course  of  16 
trials  on  various  descriptions,  bearing  6  tons,  and  the  strongest 
9  3-4:  tons.  The  experiments  of  Telford  and  Brown  show  that 
malleable  iron  will  bear,  on  an  average,  27  tons ;  the  weakest  bear- 
ing 24,  and  the  strongest  29  tons.  On  approaching  the  breaking 
point,  cast  iron  may  snap  in  an  instant,  without  any  previous  symp- 
tom, while  wrought  iron  begins  to  stretch,  with  half  its  breaking 
weight,  and  so  continues  to  stretch  till  it  breaks.  The  experiments 
of  Hodgkinson  and  Fairbairn  show  also  that  cast  iron  is  capable  of 
sustaining  compression  to  the  extent  of  nearly  50  tons  on  the 
square  inch  ;  the  weakest  bearing  36|-  tons,  and  the  strongest  60 
tons.  In  this  respect,  malleable  iron  is  much  inferior  to  cast  iron. 
With  12  tons  on  the  square  inch  it  yields,  contracts  iti  length,  and 
expands  laterally  ;  though  it  will  bear  27  tons,  or  more,  without 
actual  fracture. 


Rennie  states  that  cast  iron  may  be  crushed  with  a  weight  of 
93,000  lbs.,  and  brick  with  one  of  562  lbs.  on  the  square  inch. 


INDEX 


PAGE 

Air,  effects  of. 1-0 

Alcohol 1-tO 

Alloy  for  bells  of  clocks 1(56 

Alloy  for  cymbals  aiul  gongs 106 

Alloy  for  journiil  boxes 165 

Alloy  for  tools 166 

Alloy,  fusible 169 

Alloy  used  by  the  British 172 

Amber 138 

Amber  varnishes 146,  147 

American  lap  welded    iron    boiler 

flues 122 

Angle,  to  bisect 85 

Anime , 138 

Aqua  fortia  bronze  dip 171 

Aqueduct  pipes,  calibre,  etc 128 

Arc 07 

Arcanson 139 

Architectural  ornaments  in  relief....  169 

Arc,  to  describe 86 

Arc,  to  find  length 85,    99 

Area  of  circle,  to  find 97 

Area  of  circular  ring,  to  find 100 

Area  of  ellipse,  to  tiud 102 

Area  of  polygon 96 

Area  of  sector,  to  find.. 99 

Area  of  segment,  to  find 99 

Areas  of  circles Ill 

Areas,  to  find 93 

Arithmetical  signs 92 

Armenian  cement 168 

Artificial  gold 165 

Ascertaining  weight  of  pipes 129 

Ascertain  outlines  of  dome,  etc 28 

Balloons,  varnishes  for 154 

Bar  of  iron,  sti-ength  of. 174 

Bath  metal 172 

Beams,  strength  of 174 

Bell  metal I(i7 

Bells  of  clocks,  alloy  for 166 

Benzoin 139 

Best  pewter 172 


PAoa 

Bisect  triangle,  to 90 

Black  amber  varnish 146 

Black  grounds 133 

Black  japan 134,  135 

Black  japan  varnish 154 

Black  solder 170 

Black  varnish 147 

Black  varnish  for  harness 153 

lilaik  varnish  for  iron  work 146 

Blanched  copper 165,  172 

Blue  japan  grounds 134 

Bodies,  capacities  of 102 

Bodies,  effects  of  heat  on 122 

Body,  gum 139 

Body  varnish 144 

Boiled  oil  varnish 163 

Boiler  cover 75 

Boiler  flues 122 

Boilers,  cement  for 160 

Bolts,  weight  of  copper 110 

Bottle  corks,  cement  for 160 

Bowls,  wash,  sizes  of 120 

Brand  marks 127 

Brass,  bronze  paint  for 171 

Brass  dipped,  gold  colored  lacker  for..  157 

Brass,  dipping  acid 170 

Brass  fastened  to  glass  with  cement.  162 

Brass  for  turning 167 

Brass  lacker 155 

Brass,  lacker  for 157 

Brass,  lacker  for  bronzed 156 

Brass,  lacker  for  dipped 156,  157 

Brass  not  dipped,  gold  colored  lacker.  157 

Brass,  pale  lacker  for 167 

Brass,  red  lacker  for 167 

Brass,  rest  lacker  for 167 

Brass,  solder  for 169 

Brass,  vinegar  bronze  for 171 

Brass,  weight  of. 129 

Brick,  resisting  power  of....". 178 

Bridges,  strength  of. 174 

Britannia 167 

Britannia  metal 169 

(179.1 


ise 


IN.DEX*, 


PAGE 

Brilich  gDrei'a.^iient  aili.y.-..^..'......j;.  172 

Biitis'n  ^hm  ^'..../.....':..^  ;. "......rl64 

Bi'iitei,  line,  io  mejistirp,.;..;  ,.  '^.,.'..'.. ',  S8 

Bronze'd  brass,  lacker  fur ...  156 

Bronze  for  all  metals 171 

Bronze  for  brass 171 

Bronze  metal 167 

Bronze  varnish  for  statuary 146 

Brown  bronze  dip 171 

Brown  bronze  paint 171 

Brown  hard  spirit  varnish 145 

Browning  gun  barrels 165 

Brunswick  black 134 

Cabinetmaker's  varnish 147 

Cabinet  varnish 14o 

Calibre  of  lead  pipe 128 

Carriages,  varnish  for  parts  of. 147 

Can  top 5 

Capacities  of  bodies 102 

Carriage  gum 139 

Casks,  water  tight  cement  for 161 

Casting  britannia  metal 167 

Castings,  cement  for  holes  in 160 

Cast  iron  beams 174 

Cast  iron  cement 173 

Cast  iron,  expansion  of. 130 

Cast  iron,  resisting  power  of 178 

Cast  steel,  composition  for  welding..  173 

Cement,  metallic 164 

Cement,  miscellaneous 158 

Cement  varnish 148 

Centre,  to  find 85 

Centre  and  arcs  of  ellipse,  to  find...     82 

Cheap  cement 160 

Chemical  apparatus  cement 1-59 

China  cement 160 

Chinese  white  copper 172 

Choice  of  oil,  for  varnish. 138 

Chord 97 

Circle  in  triangle,  to  describe 90 

Circle,  mensuration  of 97 

Circles,  tables  of  circumferences Ill 

Circular  ring,  to  ^nd  area  of 100 

Circular  roofs,  covering  of. 25 

Circumference  of  circle,  to  find 97 

Circumference  of  ellipse,  to  find 102 

Circumferences  of  circles,  tables  of..  Ill 

Cisterns,  water  tight  cement  for 16] 

Clocks,  alloy  for  bells 166 

Coachmaker's  varnish 144 

Coaches,  fine  black  varnish  for 155 

Coach  varnish 147 

Coating  metals,  varnish  for 145 

Cock  metal 167 

Coffee  pots,  sizes  of. 120 

Cohesive  power  of  bars  of  metal 178 

Colophony 139 

Color  for  lacker 157 

Column,  strength  of 175 

Common  pewter 172 

Common  varnish 153 

Cone 3 

Cones  or  pyramids 101,  103 


I  ,    .  PAQIt 

I  f!o'utents/jf  frustrumof  cone,  to  find  104 

I  Coii/ox  scrface  of  cone,  to  find 101 

(loMvx  srrfacc  of  cylinder,  to  find..  lOi 
Convex  surface  of  frustrum  of  Cono, 

to  find 101 

Convex  surface  of  globe,  etc 102 

Copal 139 

Cnjial  polish 144 

Cupiil  varjiish 136 

Cupal  varnishes 142,  143,  144 

Cupper,  blanched 165,  172 

Copper  bolts,  weight  of 110 

Copper,  brown  bronze  paint  for 171 

Coppersmith's  cement 160,  161 

Copjier,  silvering  powder  for 165 

Copper,  solder  for 169 

Copper,  to  separate  from  silver 172 

Copper,  weight  of 109,  129 

Cords,  strength  of. 176 

Cornice 44 

Cover  a  dome,  to 26,  27 

Covering  of  circular  roofs 25 

Covers 78,     79 

Cracks  in  wood,  cement  for 162 

Cream,  furniture 150 

Crystallized  tin  plate 127 

Crvstal  varnishes 151 

Cubes 102 

Cutting  glass 16.3 

Cylinders 101,  103 

Cylinders,  solidity  of. 103 

Cylinders,  strength  of 175 

Cymbals,  alloy  for 166 


Dammara 

Dammar  varnish 

Decimal  equivalents 

Deck  flange 

Deej)  gold  colorefl  lacker 

Definition  of  signs 

Definitions  in  circles 

Describing  patterns,  rules  for 

Dextrine 

Diameter 

Diameter  of  circle,  to  find 97, 

Diamond  cement 

Dipped  brass,  lacker  for 156, 

Dipiiers,  sizes  of 

Dipping  acid 

Dipping  metal 

DiiTctic.iis  f.ir  making  lacker 

Dish  kt'ttli-s.  sizes  of. 

Dour-,  to  Cover 26,  27 

Druggists'  measures,  sizes  of. 


Earthenware  cement 

Effects  of  air 

Effects  of  heat  on  bodies  

Effects  of  steam 

Elbow  at  any  angle 

Elbow  at  right  angles 

Elbow  in  three  sections 

Elbows 62,  64,  66,  68,  70, 

Elbows  in  four  sections 


139 

153 

91 

5 

156 

92 

97 

3 

164 
97 
98 
158 
1.57 
121 
170 
170 
156 
120 
,  28 
121 

158 
126 
122 
123 
64 
62 


INDEX. 


181 


PAGE 

Elbows  in  five  sections 70 

Electrical  apparatus  cement l.']9 

Elemi lot) 

Ellipse 80 

Ellipse,  to  draw 80,  82 

EUijise,  to  tind  area  of 102 

Ellipse,  to  fiiul  circumference  of. 102 

Elliptic  arch,  to  describe 87 

End  lines,  to  draw 86 

Engineers'  cement IfiO 

Engravings  on  wood,  to  fix 1.50 

Engravings,  varnish  for loO 

Envelop  for  a  cone 3 

Envelop  for  frustrum  of  a  cone 6 

Equivalents,  decimal 91 

Essence  varnishes 141 

Etching  varnishes 150 

Expansion  of  air  by  heat 126 

Expansion  of  cast  iron 130 

Expansion  of  wrought  ir»n 130 

Eytelwein's  experiments 178 

Fastening  blades,  files,  etc.,  cement 

for 162 

Files 166 

Fine  black  varnish  for  coaches 155 

Finishing  japan 137 

Flange 76 

Flat  rolled  iron,  weight  of. 106 

Flexible  varnish 153 

Floors,  strength  of. 174 

Flues,  American  boiler 122 

Fluid  for  tinning  metals 173 

Fo\intain  pipes,  calibre,  etc 128 

Fractured  bodies,  cement  fur 162 

French  polish 149 

Fruit  cans,  sealing  wax  for 164 

Frustrum  of  a  cone 46 

Frustrum  of  cone,  to  find  solidity  or 

Contents 104 

Frustrum  of  pyramid,  to  find  solidity  105 

Furniture  cream 100 

Furniture  gloss 150 

Fu.  uiture  oils 150 

Furniture  pastes 150 

Furniture  polish 149 

Furniture  varnishes 148 

Fusible  alloy 169 

Fusible  metals 164 

Galvanizing 166 

Gas-bags,  varnishes  for 154 

Gas  fitter's  cement 162 

Geometry,  practical 84 

German  silver 168 

Bilded  articles,  varnish  for 148 

Glass  cutting 163 

Glass,  tr.ansparent  cement  for 161 

Glassware  cement 168 

Globe 102 

Gloss,  furniture 150 

Glue,  liquid 163,  164 

Gold,  artificial 165 

Gold  colored  lacker 156,  157 


PAGH 

Gold  lacuer 155 

Gold,  manheim 172 

(juld,  mock 173 

Gold  solder 106 

Gold,  solder  for 169 

Gold,  solvent  for 172 

Gold  varnish 154. 

Gongs,  alloy  for 166 

Good  cement 101 

Good  lacker  for  brass 157 

Green  bronze  dip 171 

Green  japan  grounds 135 

Orier  on  heat 125 

Gun  barrels,  browning 165 

Gun  barrels,  to  bronze 172 

Gum  copal 132 

Gutta-percha  varnish 153 

Gutter  mitre  joints 40,  41,  42 

Handles,  britannia  metal  for 168 

Ilardeniug  for  britannia 167 

Hard  solder 170 

Hard  varnish 144 

Hard  white  metal 169 

Harness,  varnish  for 153 

Heat 125 

Heat,  effect  of  on  bodies 122 

Heat,  expansion  of  air  by 126 

Hodgkinson  and  Fairbairn's  experi- 
ments   178 

Holes  in  castings,  cement  for 160 

House  varnish 1.54 

Hydraulic  cement  paint 162 

Imitation  of  silver 168 

Impervious  cement 162 

Impressions,  metal  for  taking 169 

India-rubber  varnishes 152 

Inside  work,  varnish  for 144 

Instrument  varnish 148 

Iron,  bronze  paint  for 171 

Iron  pots,  cement  to  mend 161 

Iron,  relative  strength  of  cast  and 

malloiible 178 

Iron  rust  cement 169 

Iron,  strength  of  bar 174 

Iron  tubes,  cement  for 160 

Iron,  varnish  for 145 

Iron,  weight  of, 106, 107, 108,  109 

Iron  Work,  black 164 

Italian  varnishes 151 

Ivory,  cement  for 100 

Japan  black,  for  leather 135 

Japan  finishing 137 

Japanners  cupal  varnish 136 

Japanning 131 

Japanning  old  tea-trays 136 

Joining  metals  and  wood,  cement  for  162 
Journal  boxes,  alloy  for 165 

Lac 139 

Lacker 142 

Lacker,  color  for 157 


'/.A.^V'x 


182 


INDEX. 


t\^>- 


PAGE 


Laclcer  'farnish 15U 

Lackers 1»5 

Lackers  for  pictures,  metal,wood,etc.  156 

Lamps,  etc.,  britannia  metal  for 168 

Lamp  top 40 

Lea.i  pipe 128 

Lead,  weight  of 109 

Leather,  bhick  for 1.35 

Leather,  cement  for 161 

Leather,  lackers  for 156 

Leather  varnish 155 

Length  of  broken  line,  to  measure...    88 

Length  of  rectangle,  to  find 89 

Lining  metal  for  boxes  of  oars 168 

Linseed  oil,  choice  of. 138 

Linseed  oil  varnish 153 

Liquid  glue 163,  164 

Liquor  measures,  sizes  of. 121 

Lithographs  on  wood,  to  fix 160 

Lithographs,  varnishes  for 150 

Luting,  watertight lis 

Mahogany  varnish 147 

Making  lacker 166 

Malleable  iron,  relative  strength  of.  178 

Manheim  gold 172 

Maps,  varnish  for 150 

Marble  cement ICl 

Marble  worker's  cement 161 

Marine  glue 163 

Mastic 139 

Mastics > 169 

Mastic  varnishes 152 

Materials,  strength  of. 174 

Measurements  of  tin  127 

Measures,  sizes  of. 121 

Mensuration 93 

Mensuration  of  surfeces 93 

Metal  bars,  cohesive  powers  of 178 

Metal  for  taking  impressions 169 

Metal,  fusible 1(J4 

Metal,  good  britannia 167 

Metal,  lackers  for 166 

Metallic  cement 164 

Metals,  strength  of. 170 

Metals,  varnish  for 145 

Metal  and  wood,  cement  for  joining.  162 

Metal  that  expands  in  cooling 172 

Methylamed  spirit  of  wine 140 

Milk  of  wax 151 

Mitre  joints 40,  41,  42,  44 

Mixture  for  silvering 172 

Mock  gold 173 

Mock  platinum 172 

Models    proportioned  to  machines, 

strength  of. 175 

Mother  of  pearl,  cement  for 160 

Naphtha 140 

O.ak  varnish 148 

Observations  on  circle 97 

Octagon 38,  46 


FAOB 

Octagon  lamp  top 46 

Octagon  or  square  top 78 

Oil,  choice  of. 138 

Oils,  furniture 150 

Oil  paintings,  varnishes  for 150,  151 

Oil  varnishes 141 

Old  tea-trays,  japanning 136 

Olive  bronze  dip 171 

Orange  colored  grounds 135 

Or-molu 165 

Or-molu  dipping  acid 170 

Ornaments  in  relief. 159 

Outlines  of  covering  of  a  dome 28 

Oval 7,  12,  13,  16, 19,  22,  23,  80,  81 

Oval  boiler  cover 75 

Oval,  to  find  area  of 102 

Oval,  to  find  circumference  of. 102 

Pails,  sizes  of. 120 

Paint  for  wire  work 16.3 

Painting  japan  work 136 

Pale  brass  lacker...,. 155 

Pale  lacker  for  brass 157 

Pale  lacker  for  tin  plate 157 

Pans,  cement  to  mend 161 

Pans,  sizes  of. 120 

Parabola,  to  describe 88 

Pastes,  finniture 150 

Pattern  for  a  frustrura  of  a  cone 6 

Pattern  for  a  tapering  oval,  7, 12,  13, 

[16,  19 

Patterns,  rules  for  describing 3 

Perpendicular 84,  85 

Pewter 172 

Pewterer's  solder 170 

Philosonhical  instruments,  lackers 

for...t ■. 157 

Pictures,  lackers  for 156 

Pinchbeck 168 

Pipe,  collar  on  side  of  main 56 

Pipe,  collar  smaller  than  main 52,  54 

Pipe  for  flat  surface 58 

Pipe  for  two  flat  surfaces 60 

Pipes 48,  50,  52,  54,  56,  53,  60 

Pipes  at  any  angle 50 

Pipes  at  right  angles 48 

Plated  metal,  silver  solder  for 170 

I'lates,  strength  of 175 

Platinum,  mock 172 

Plumbers'  cement 160 

Plumbers'  solder 170 

Polish,  French 149 

Polish,  furniture 119 

Polygons,  mensuration  of 96 

Polygon,  to  inscribe 88 

Pots,  coffee,  sizes  of 120 

Power,  cohesive,  of  metal  bars 178 

Practical  geometry S4 

Piactir:,!  n'Ceipts 1.31 

Pivp.nv,!  liipiid  glue 103 

Pi ciiaiin;;-  lnass  for  dipping; 17C 

Printers'  varnish 152 

Properties  of  water 124 


v 


Piirplo  japan  grounas 135 

Pyiiiniids 10,  lu3 

Queen's  metal 172 

Radius 97 

Radius  and  sine  of  frustrum  of  cone, 

to  lind S3 

Razor  (jaste 163 

Receipts,  practical 131 

Rectangle 36 

Rectangle  base  with  circular  top 34 

Rectangle  base  with  square  top 32 

Rectangle,  to  find  length 89 

Rectangle,  to  form  in  triangle 90 

Red  brass  for  turning 167 

Red  lacker  for  brass 157 

Red  spirit  lacker 155 

Red  tombac 168 

Registers,  britannia  metal  for 16S 

Relative  strength  of  cast  and  malle- 
able iron 178 

Relief,  ornaments  in 159 

Repairing  old  nitric  acid  ormolu  dips  171 

Resius,  to  make  varnishes 138 

Rest  laiker  for  brass 157 

Right  lined  figure,  to  find  surface...     9.? 

Rolled  iron,  weight  of. 106,  107,  108 

Roofs,  covering  circular 25 

Roofs,  strength  of. 174 

Ropes,  strength  of. 174 

Rosin 139 

Round  rolled  iron,  weight  of 108 

Rules  for  describing  patterns 3 

Rusting,  to  prevent 106 

Sandarach 140 

Scarlet  japan 134 

Sealing  wax  for  fruit  cans 164 

Sector 97 

Sector,  to  find  area  of. 99 

Segment 99 

Segment  of  circle,  to  describe 86 

Segment,  to  find  area  of 99 

Semicircle 97 

Sheet  iron,  weight  of 129 

Signs  92 

Silver  colored  metal 168 

Silver,  imitation  of. 168 

Silrering  by  heat 172 

Silvering  powder 165 

Silver  solder 170 

Silver,  solder  for 169 

Silver,  to  separate  from  copper 172 

Size  for  printers 152 

Sizes  for  tin  ware 120 

Smooth  moulding  patterns,  varnish 

for 155 

Soft  brilliant  varnish 145 

Soft  gold  solder 106 

Soft  solder 169 

Solder  for  steel  joints 166 

Solders 169 

Bolidity  of  cone,  to  find 103 


INDEX.  \   ^-^  "    '183"r; 

Solidity  of  cylinders,  to  find.-..^r:-..-r.."'W3 
Solidity  of  frustrum  of  cone,  to  find.  104 
Solidity  of  frustrum  of  pyramid,  to 

find.' 105 

Solidity  of  sphere,  to  find 105 

Solids,  mensuration  of 102 

Solvent  for  gold 172 

Spanisli  tutania 169 

Spa,  wood  toys  of,  varnish  for 148 

Speculum  metal 172 

Spheres  102 

Spheres,  to  find  solidity 105 

Spinning,  britannia  metal 168 

Spirit  of  wine 140 

Spirit  varnishes 140 

Spoons,  britannia  metal  for 168 

Spouts,  britannia  metal  for 168 

Square 30 

Square  article,  tapering 29,  30,  31 

Square  base  with  circular  top 31 

Square  rolled  iron,  weight  of. 106 

Square,  to  construct 89 

Square,  to  form  equal  to  rectangle...  89 
Square,  to  form  equal  to  tria'iigle....     89 

Statuary,  bronze  varnish  for 146 

Steam,  effects  of 123 

Steamer  cover 79 

Steel  joints,  solder  for 166 

Steel,  varnish  for 145 

Strength  of  cords 170 

Strength  of  materi.als 174 

Strength  of  metals 176 

Strength  of  woods 176 

Stoneware  cement 159 

Surface  of  cylinder,  to  find 101 

Surfaces,  mensuration  of. 93 

Table  of  effects  of  heat  on  bodies 122 

Table  of  expansion  of  air  by  heat....  126 
Table.s  of  circumferences  of  circles...  Ill 

Tables  of  weights 106 

Table  varnish 143,  144 

Tangent,  to  draw 86 

Tapering  article 32,  34,  36 

Tajiering  elbow 72 

Tajjering  octagon  top 38 

Tapering  oval  in  four  sections 7 

Tapering  oval  in  two  sections 13,  16 

Tapering  oval,  straight  sides,  etc. ..19,  21 

Tapering  square  article 29,  30,  31 

Telford  and  Brown's  experiments....  178 

Tempering 125 

Tempering  by  thermometer 125 

Thermometer,  to  temper  by 125 

Tin  lacker 156 

Tinman's  solder 170 

Tinning  metals,  fluid  for 173 

Tin  plate,  pale  lacker  for 157 

Tin  plates -127 

Tin  ware,  sizes  of. 120 

Tombac 168 

Tools,  alloy  for 166 

Tortoise  shell  japan 136 

Transparent  cement  for  glass 161 


/ 


184 


INDEX. 


PAGE 

rriuis|iiueut  japan 136 

Tiiuiit;k's,  mensuration  of. 91 

Tiianj^U',  to  bisect 90 

Tiiaiii;lc,  to  describe  circle  in 90 

Tiiai!f;lc,  tofinci  area 94,  95 

Trianuli',  to  form  rectangle  in 90 

Tulii',  strength  of. 176 

Turin-ntine 140 

Tutania 1C9 

Varley's  mastic 159 

Varnishes,  miscellaueous 138 

Varnish  for  lacker 156 

Varnishiug 131 

Versed  sine 97 

Vessels,  to  find  contents 103 

Vinegar  bronze  for  brass 171 

Wainscot  varnish 154 

Wash  bowls,  sizes  of. 120 

Water-proof  goods,  varnish  for 153 

Water-proof  varnishes 153 

Water,  properties  of. 124 

Water-tight  luting,  varnish  for 148 

Water,  weight  of. 123 

WHtin,  varnish  of,  for  gilded  articles  148 


PAGE 

Weight  of  lead  pipe 128 

Weight  of  water 123 

Weight  of  iron,  etc 129 

Weight  of  pipes,  to  ascertain 129 

Weights,  table  of. 106 

Welding  cast  steel,  composition  for.  173 

White  japan  ground 132 

White  solder 109 

White  spirit  varnish 144 

White  varnish 145 

Wire  work,  paint  for 163 

Wood,  cement  for  ciacks  in 162 

Wood,  lackers  for 156 

Woods,  strength  of. 176 

Wood,  to  fix  engravings,  etc.,  on 150 

Wood  toys  of  spa,  varnish  for 148 

Wood-work  varnish 148 

Wood  and  metals,  cement  for  join- 
ing   162 

Wrought  iron,  expansion  of. 130 

Wrought  iron,  weight  of. 109 

Yellow  brass  for  turning 167 

Yellow  dipping  metal 170 

Yellow  grounds 134 

Yellow  solder IQb 


CATALOGUE 

PRACTICAL  Al  MmiC  BOOKS 


mSM  CAM!  BlIRD  &  GO, 

Industrial  Publishers  and  Booksellers, 
NO.    810    AVAL  NUT    STREET, 


i»mLA.r>EiL.i»iriA.. 


*®*  Any  of  the  Books  comprised  in  this  Catalogue  will  be  sent  hy  mail,  free  of 
postage,  at  the  publication  price. 

*i"  A  Descriptive  Catalogue,  96  pages,  8vo,,  will  be  sent,  free  of  postage,  to  any 
one  who  will  furnish  the  publisher  with  his  addi-ess. 


ARLOT.— A  Complete  Guide  for  Coach  Painters. 

Translated  from  the  French  of  M.  Arlot,  Coach  Paiiit\;r ;  for  eleven 
years  Foreman  of  Paintinj;  to  M.  Eherler,  Coach  Maker,  Paris.  By 
A.  A.  Fesquet,  Chemist  and  Engineer.  To  which  is  added  an  Ap- 
pendix, containing  Information  respecting  the  Materials  and  the 
Practice  of  Coach  and  Car  Painting  and  Varnishing  in  the  United 
States  and  Great  Britain.     l2mo $1.25 

ARMENGAUD,  AMOROUX,  and  JOHNSON.— The 
Practical  Draughtsman's  Book  of  Industrial  De- 
sign, and  Machinist's  and  Engineer's  Drawing 
Companion : 

Forming  a  Complete  Course  of  Mechanical  Engineering  and  Archi- 
tectural Drawing.  From  the  French  of  M.  Armengand  tlie  elder.  Prof, 
of  Design  in  the  Conservatoire  of  Arts  and  Industry,  Paris,  and  MM. 
Armengand  the  younger,  and  Amoroux,  Civil  EngiTieers.  Rewritten 
and  arranged  with  additional  matter  and  plates,  selections  from  and 
examples  of  the  most  useful  and  generally  employed  nieclianism  of 
the  day.  By  William  Johnson,  Assoc.  Inst.  C.  E.,  Editor  of  "  The 
Practical  Mechanic's  .Tournal."  Illustrated  by  50  folio  steel  plates, 
and  50  wood-cuts.    A  new  edition,  4to.  .        .        ,        .        $10.00 

1 


2  HENRY   CAREY  BAIRD'S  'CATALOGUE. 

ARROWSMITH.— Paper-Hanger's  Companion : 

A  Treatise  in  wlucli  the  Pnicticul  OiKTutious  of  the  Trade  are  Sys- 
tematically laid  down  :  with  Cojiious  JJirections  Preparatorj^  to  Paper- 
ing; Preventives  against  the  Eflect  of  Damp  ou  Walls  ;  the  Various 
Cements  and  Pastes  Adapted  to  the  Several  Purposes  of  the  Trade ; 
Observations  and  Directions  for  the  Panelling  and  Ornamenting  of 
Rooms,  etc.  By  James  Akrowsmith,  Author  of  "Analysis  of  Dra- 
pery," etc.     12mo.,  cloth $1.25 

ASHTOW.— The  Theory  and  Practice  of  the  Art  of  De- 
signing Fancy  Cotton  and  Woollen  Cloths  frora 
Sample : 

(Tiving  full  Instructions  for  Reducing  Drafts,  as  well  as  the  Methods 
of  Spooling  aud  JIaking  out  Harness  for  Cross  Drafts,  and  Finding 
any  Reiiuired  Reed,  with  Calculations  and  Tables  of  Yarn.  By 
Frederick  T.  Ashton,  Designer,  West  Pittsfield,  Mass.  With  52 
Illustrations.    One  volume,  4to $10.00 

BAIRD.— Letters  on  the  Crisis,  the  Currency  and  the 
Credit  System. 
By  Henry  Carey  Baird.    Pamphlet 05 

BAIRD. — Protection  of  Home  Labor  and  Home  Pro- 
ductions necessary  to  the  Prosperity  of  the  Ameri- 
can Farmer. 
By  Henry  Carey  Baird.    8vo.,  paper 10 

BAIRD. — Some  of  the  Fallacies  of  British  Free-Trade 
Revenue  Reform. 

Two  Letters  to  Arthur  Latham  Perry,  Professor  of  History  and  Politi- 
cal Economy  in  Williams  College.  By  Henry  Carey  Baird. 
Pam])hlet.       ...........         05 

BAIRD.— The  Rights  of  American  Producers,  and  the 
Wrongs  of  British  Free-Trade  Revenue  Reform. 
By  Henry  Carey  Baird.    Pamj)hlet 05 

BAIRD. — Standard  Wages  Computing  Tables  : 

An  Improvement  in  all  former  Methods  of  Computation,  so  arranged 
that  wages  for  days,  hours,  or  fractions  of  hours,  at  a  specified  rate  per 
day  or  hour,  may  be  ascertained  at  a  glance.  By  T.  Spangler  Baird. 
Oblong  folio .' ?5.00 

BAIRD.— The  American  Cotton  Spinner,  and  Mana- 
ger's and  Carder's  Guide : 

A  Practical  Treatise  on  Cotton  Spinning ;  giving  the  Dimensions  and 
Speed  of  jMachinery,  Draught  and  Twist  Calculations,  etc.  ;  with 
notices  of  recent  Improvements :  together  with  Rules  and  Examples 
for  making  changes  in  the  sizes  and  numbers  of  Roving  and  Yarn. 
Compiled  from  the  papers  of  the  late  Robert  H.  Baird.  i2mo.    $1.50 


HENRY  CAREY   BAIRD'S  CATALOGUE.  3 

BAKER.— Long-Span  Railway  Bridges  : 

Coiiiprisiiiu:  lllve^tigatiolls  of  the  Comiiaralive  Tlieorotical  ami  Prac- 
tit-al  Advantages  of  the  various  Adoj)te(l  or  Proposed  Type  Systems 
of  Coiistruction  ;  with  numerous  Formulie  and  Tables.  By  B.  Baker. 
ll'mo .S2.00 

BAUERMAN.— A  Treatise  on  the  Metallurgy  of  Iron  : 

('oiitaiMiii'4  ()ntliiies  of  the  History  of  Iron  Manufacture,  Methods  of 
Assay,  and  Analysis  of  Iron  Ores,  Processes  of  Manufacture  of  Iron 
and  Steel,  etc.,  etc.  By  H.  Bauerman,  F.  G.  S.,  Associate  of  the 
Pvoyal  School  of  Mine.s.  First  American  Edition,  Picvised  and  En- 
larged. With  an  Appendix  on  the  Martin  Process  for  Making  Steel, 
from  the  Report  of  Abram  S.  Hewitt,  U.  S.  Commissioner  to  the 
Universal  Exjwsition  at  Paris,  1.S07.     Illustrated.     12rao.        .       §2.00 

BEANS.— A  Treatise  on  Railway  Cvirves  and  the  Loca- 
tion of  Railways. 

By  E.  W.  Beans,  C.  E.     Illustrated.     12mo.     Tucks.      .      .       $1.50 

BELL.— Carpentry  Made  Easy  : 

Or,  The  Science  and  Art  of  Framing  on  a  New  and  Improved  System. 
With  Specific  Instructions  for  Building  Balloon  Frames,  Barn  Frames, 
Mill  Frames,  Warehouses,  Church  S]nres,  etc.  Comprising  also  a 
System  of  Bridge  Building,  with  Bills,  Estimates  of  Cost,  and  valuable 
Tables.  Illustrated  by  38  plates,  comprising  nearly  200  figures.  By 
William  E.  Bell,  Architect  and  Practieaf  Builder.    8vo.      .    $5.00 

BELL.— Chemical  Phenomena  of  Iron  Smelting : 

An  Ex])erimental  and  Practical  Examination  of  the  Circumstances 
which  determine  the  Capacity  of  the  Blast  Furnace,  the  Temperature 
of  the  Air,  and  the  proper  Condition  of  the  Materials  to  be  operated 
upon.     By  I.  LowTHiAX  Bell.     Illustrated.     8vo.      .        .        $6.00 

BEMROSE.— Manual  of  Wood  Carving  : 

■Witli  Pi-netical  Illustrations  for  Learners  of  the  Art,  and  Original  and 
Selected  Designs.  By  WiLLlAM  Bemrose,  Jr.  With  an  Introduction 
by  Llewellyn  Jewitt,  F.  S.  A.,  etc.  With  128  Illustrations.  4to., 
cioth $3.00 

BICKNELL.— Village  Builder,  and  Supplement : 

Elevations  and  Plans  for  Cotta'.es,  Villas,  Suburban  Residences, 
Farm  Houses,  Stables  and  Carriage  Houses  Store  Fronts,  School 
Houses,  Churches,  Court  Houses,  and  a  model  .Tail ;  also,  Exterior  and 
Interior  details  for  Public  and  Private  Buildinss,  with  ap})roved 
Forms  of  Contracts  and  S))ecitications,  including  Prices  of  Building 
Materials  and  Labor  at  Boston,  ^lass.,  and  St.  Louis,  Mo.  Containing 
75  ])Iates  drawn  to  scale;  showing  the  style  and  cost  of  building  in 
dilferent  sections  of  the  country,  being  an  original  work  comprising 
the  desii^nis  of  twentv  leading  ;irchiteots,  re]iresenting  the  New  Eng- 
land, Middle,  Western,  and  Southwestern  States.     4to.         .         $12.00 


4  HENRY   CAREY   BAIRD'S  CATALOGUE. 

BLENKARN.— Practical  Specifications  of  Works  exe- 
cuted in  Architecture,  Civil  and  Mechanical  Engi- 
neering, and  in  Road  Making  and  Sewering  : 

To  which  are  added  a  series  of  praetieally  useful  Agreements  and  Re- 
ports.    By  John  Blenkakn.     llhistruted  by  15  hirge  folding  plates. 

8vo $y-*jo 

BLINN.— A  Practical  Workshop  Companion  for  Tin, 
Sheet-Iron,  and  Copperplate  Workers  : 

Containing  Rules  for  describing  various  kinds  of  Patterns  used  by 
Tin,  Sheet-Iron,  and  Copper-plate  Workers;  Practical  Geometry; 
Mensuration  of  Surfaces  and  Solids;  Tables  of  the  Weights  of  Metals, 
Lead  Pipe,  etc. ;  Tables  of  Areas  and  Circumferences  of  Circles ; 
Japan,  Varnishes,  Lackers,  Cements,  Compositions,  etc.,  etc.  By 
Leroy  J.  Blinn,  Master  Mechanic.  With  over  100  Illustrations. 
12mo $2.50 

BOOTH.— Marble  Worker's  Manual: 

Containing  Practical  Information  respecting  Marbles  in  general,  their 
Cutting,  Working,  and  Polishing;  Veneering  of  Marble;  Mosaics; 
Composition  and  Use  of  Artificial  Marble,  Stuccos,  Cements,  Receipts, 
Secrets,  etc.,  etc.  Translated  from  the  French  by  M.  L.  Booth. 
With  an  Appendix  concerning  American  Marbles.  12mo.,  cloth.    $1.50 

BOOTH  AND  MORFIT.— The  Encyclopedia  of  Che- 
mistry, Practical  and  Theoretical : 

Embracing  its  application  to  the  Arts,  iletallurgy,  Mineralogy,  Ge- 
ology, Medicine,  and  Pharmacy.  By  James  C.  Booth,  Melter  and 
Retiiier  in  the  United  States  Mint,  Professor  of  Applied  Chemistry  in 
the  Franklin  Institute,  etc.,  assisted  by  Campbell  Morfit,  author 
of  "  Chemical  Manipulations,"  etc.  Seventh  edition.  Royal  8vo., 
978  pages,  with  numerous  Avood-cuts  and  other  illustrations.     .    ?5.00 

BOX.— A  Practical  Treatise  on  Heat: 

As  applied  to  the  Useful  Arts  ;  for  the  Use  of  Engineers,  Architects, 
etc.  By  Thomas  Box,  author  of  "  Practical  Hydraulics."  Illustrated 
by  14  plates  containing  114  figures.     ]2mo $4.25 

BOX.— Practical  Hydraulics  : 

A  Series  of  Rules  an<l  Tables  for  the  use  of  Engineers,  etc.  By 
Tiiojias  Box.    12mo "  .        .       $2.50 

BROWN.— Five  Hundred  and  Seven  Mechanical 
Movements : 

Emlnaeing  all  those  which  are  most  important  in  Dynamics,  Hydrau- 
lics, Hydrostatics,  Pneumatics,  Steam  Engines,  Jlill  and  other  Gear- 
ing Presses,  Horology,  and  jMiscellaneous  Machinery  ;  and  including 
many  movements  never  before  jiul)lished,  and  several  of  which  have 
only  recently  come  into  use.  By  Henry  T.  Broavn,  Editor  of  the 
"  American  Artisan."     In  one  voiume,  li'mo.  .        .         .         $1.00 


HENRY  CAREY  BAIRD'S  CATALOGUE.  6 

BUCKMASTER.— The  Elements  of  Mechanical  Phy- 
sics : 
By  J.  C.  BrcKMASTEE,  late  Student  in  the  Government  School  of 
Mines ;  Certified  Teaeher  of  Science  by  the  Department  of  Science 
and  Art;  Examiner  in  Chemistry  and  Physics  in  the  Royal  College 
of  Precej)tors ;  and  late  Lecturer  in  Chemistry  and  Physics  of  tfie 
Royal  Polytechnic  Institute.  Illustrated  with  numerous  engravings. 
In  one  volume,  12mo.        ........        §1.50 

BULLOCK.— The  American  Cottage  Builder : 

A  Series  of  Designs,  Plans,  and  Specifications,  from  .s200  to  $20,000, 
for  Homes  for  the  People;  together  with  Warming,  Ventilation, 
Drainage,  Painting,  and  Landscape  Gardening.  By  John  Bullock, 
Architect,  Civil  Engineer,  Mechanician,  and  Editor  of  "  The  Rudi- 
ments of  Architecture  and  Building,"  etc.,  etc.  Illustrated  by  75  en- 
gravings.    In  one  volume,  8vo.        ......        .$3.50 

BULLOCK.  —  The    Riidiments    of    Architecture    and 
Building : 

For  the  use  of  Architects,  Builders,  Draughtsmen,  JIachinists,  Engi- 
neers, and  Mechanics.  Edited  l)y  .ToHX  Bullock,  author  of  "  The 
American  Cottage  Builder."  Illustrated  by  250  engravings.  In  one 
volume,  8vo $3.50 

BURGH. — Practical  Illustrations  of  Land  and  Marine 
Engines : 

Showing  in  detail  the  ^Modern  Improvements  of  High  and  Low  Pres- 
sure, Surface  Condensation,  and  Super-heating,  together  with  Land 
and  ^larine  Boilers.  By  X.  P.  BuROH,  Engineer.  Illustrated  by 
20  plates,  double  elephant  folio,  with  text.  .         .         .         S2l.ob 

BURGH.— Practical  Rules  for  the  Proportions  of  Mo- 
dern Engines  and  Boilers  for  Land  and  Marine 
Pui'poses. 
By  N.  P.  Burgh,  Engineer.     12mo $1.50 

BURGH.— The  Slide-Valve  Practically  Considered. 

By  N.  P.  BUKGii,  Engineer.     Completely  illustrated.     12mo.       $2.00 

BYLES.— Sophisms  of  Free  Trade  and  Popular  Politi- 
cal Economy  Examined. 
By  a  Bakrister  (Sir  John  Barnard  Byles,  Judge  of  Common 
Pleas).  First  American  from  the  Ninth  English  Edition,  as  i)ublished 
by  the  Manchester  Reciprocity  Association.  In  one  volume,  12mo. 
Paper,  75  cts.     Cloth $1.25 

BYRN.— The  Complete  Practical  Brewer  : 

Or  Plain,  Accurate,  and  Thorough  Instructions  in  the  Art  of  Brewing 
Beer,  Ale,  Porter,  including  the  Process  of  making  Bavarian  Beer, 
all  the  Small  Beers,  such  as  Root-beer,  Ginger-pop,  Sarsaparilla- 
beer,  ilead.  Spruce  Beer,  etc.,  etc.  Adapted  to  the  use  of  Public 
Brewers  and  Private  Families.  Bv  M.  La  Fayette  By'RN,  M.D. 
With  illustrations.     12nio.        .         ." $1,25 


6  HENRY  CAREY   BAIRD'S  CATALOGUE. 

B YRN.— The  Complete  Practical  Distiller : 

Comprising  the  most  prrfet't  and  exact  Tlieoretieal  and  Practical  De- 
scription of  the  Art  of  DistiHation  and  Rectification  ;  including  all  of 
the  most  recent  inii^rovemeuts  in  distilling  apparatus ;  instructions 
for  i^reparing  spirits  from  the  numerous  vegetables,  fruits,  etc. ;  direc- 
tions for  the  distillation  and  preparation  of  all  kinds  of  Ijrandies  and 
other  spirits,  spirituous  and  other  comjjounds,  etc.,  etc.  By  M.  L.\ 
Fayette  Byrn,  M.  D.  Eighth  Edition.  To  which  are  added,  Prac- 
tical Directions  for  Distilling,  from  the  French  of  Th.  Fling,  Brewer 
and  Distiller.     12mo ^        $1.50 

BYRNE. — Handbook  for  the  Artisan,  Mechanic,  and 
Engineer : 

Comprising  the  Grinding  and  Sharpening  of  Cutting  Tools,  Ahrasive 
Processes,  Laj^idary  Work,  Gem  and  Glass  Engraving,  Varnishing 
and  Lackering,  Apparatus,  Materials  and  Processes  for  Grinding  and 
Polishing,  etc.  By  Olivek  Byrne.  Illustrated  by  185  wood  en- 
gravings.    In  one  volume,  8vo §5.00 

BYRNE.— Pocket  Book. for  Railroad  and  Civil  Engi- 
neers : 

Containing  New,  Exact,  and  Concise  Methods  for  Laying  out  Rail- 
road Curves,  Switches,  Frog  Angles,  and  Crossings;  the  Staking 
out  of  work;  Levelling;  the  Calculation  of  Cuttings;  Embankments; 
Earth-work,  etc.  By  Oliver  By'rne.  ISmo.,  full  bound,  pocket- 
book  form $1.75 

BYRNE. — The  Practical  Model  Calculator : 

For  the  Engineer,  Mechanic,  Manufacturer  of  Engine  Work,  Naval 
Architect,  Miner,  and  ^Millwright.  By  Oliver  Byrxe.  1  volume, 
8vo.,  nearly  600  pages       . $-1.50 

BYRNE.— The  Practical  Metal-Worker's  Assistant: 

Comjn-ising  ]\letallurgic  Clicmistry  ;  the  Arts  of  Working  all  ^Metals 
and  Alloys;  Forging  of  Iron  and" Steel;  Hardening  and  Tempering; 
Melting  and  Mixing ;  Casting  and  Founding;  Works  in  Sheet  Metal ; 
The  Processes  Dejiendent  on  the  Ductility  of  the  Metals;  Soldering; 
and  the  most'  Improved  Processes  and  Tools  employed  by  iletal- 
Workers.  With  the  Application  of  the  Art  of  Electro-Metallurgy  to 
Manufacturing  Processes ;  collected  from  Original  Sources,  and  from 
the  Works  of  Holtzapffel,  Bergeron,  Leopold,  Plumier,  Nai)ier, 
Scoffern,  Clay,  Fairbairn,  and  others.  By  Oliver  Byrxe.  A  new, 
revised,  and  "improved  edition,  to  which  is  added  An  Appendix,  con- 
taining The  Manufacture  of  Russian  Sheet-Irox.  By  John 
Percy,  M.  D.,  F.R.S.  The  IManufacture  of  Malleable  Iron 
Castings,  and  Improvements  in  Bessemer  Steel.  By  A.  A. 
Fesquet,  Chemist  and  Engineer.  With  over  600  Engravings,  illus- 
trating every  Branch  of  the  Subject.     8vo $7.00 

Cabinet  Maker's  Album  of  Furniture : 

Comprising  a  Collection  of  Pesigns  for  Furniture.  Illustrated  by  48 
Large  and  Beautifully  Engraved  Plates.  lu  one  vol.,  oblong        $5.00 


HENRY  CAREY   BAIRD'S  CATALOGUE.  7 

CALLINGHAM.— Sign  Writing  and    Glass   Emboss- 
ing: 
A  Complete   Practical   Illnstratetl   ^laimal  of  the  Art.     By  James 
Callingham.     In  one  volume,  12mo $1.5U 

CAMPIN. — A  Practical  Treatise  on  Mechanical  Engi- 
neering : 

Comprising  Metallurgy,  Moulding,  Casting,  Forging,  Tools,  Work- 
shop Machinery,  Mechanical  Manipulation,  Manufacture  of  Steam- 
engines,  etc.,  etc.  With  an  Appendix  on  the  Analysis  of  Iron  and 
Iron  Ores.  By  Fkancis  Campin,  C.  E.  To  which  are  added,  Obser- 
vations on  the  Construction  of  Steam  Boilers,  and  Renuirks  upon 
Furnaces  used  for  Smoke  Prevention ;  with  a  Cliaj^ter  on  Explosions. 
By  II.  Armstrong,  C.  E.,  and  John  Bourne.  Rules  for  Calculating 
the  Change  Wheels  for  Screws  on  a  Turning  Lathe,  and  for  a  W'heel- 
cutting  Machine.  By  J.  La  Nicoa.  Management  of  Steel,  Includ- 
ing Forging,  Hardening,  Tempering,  Annealing,  Shrinking,  and  Ex- 
pansion. And  the  Case-hardening  of  Iron.  By  G.  Ede.  8vo.  Illus- 
trated with  29  plates  and  1(X)  wood  engravings       .         ,        .        $(J.OO 

CAMPII^.— The  Practice  of  Hand-Turning  in  Wood, 
Ivory,  Shell,  etc. : 

With  Instructions  for  Turning  such  works  in  ]\Ietal  as  may  be  re- 
quired in  the  Practice  of  Turning  Wood,  Ivory,  etc.  Also,  an  Appen- 
dix on  Ornamental  Turning.  By  Feancis  Campin  ;  with  Numerous 
Illustrations.     12mo.,  cloth $3.00 

CAREY —The  Works  of  Henry  C.  Carey  : 

FINANCIAL  CRISES,  their  Causes  and  Effects.  8vo.  paper  .  25 
HARMONY   OF  INTERESTS:   Agricultural,  Manuf-icturing,  and 

Commercial.    8vo.",  cloth $1.50 

MANUAL  OF  SOCIAL  SCIENCE.  Condensed  from  Carey's  "  Prin- 
ciples of  Social  Science."  By  Kate  McKean.  1  vol.  12mo.  $2.25 
MISCELLANEOUS  W^ORKS  :  comprising  "  Harmony  of  Interests," 
"  Money,"  "  Letters  to  the  President,"  "  Financial  Crises,"  "  The 
Way  to  Outdo  England  Without  Fighting  Her,"  "Resources  of 
the  Union,"  "The  Public  Debt,"  "Contraction  or  Expansion?" 
"  Review  of  the   Decade   1857-'67,"   "  Reconstruction,"   etc.,   etc. 

Two  vols.,  8vo.,  cloth $10.00 

PAST,  PRESENT,  AND  FUTURE.     8vo $2.50 

PRINCIPLES  OF  SOCIAL  SCIENCE.     3  vols.,  8vo.,  cloth      $10.00 

THE  SLAVE-TRADE,  DOMp:STIC  AND  FOREIGN ;  Whv  it  Ex-^ 

ists,  and  How  it  may  be  Extinguished  (1853).  8vo.,  cloth     ".     $2.00 

LETTERS  ON  INTERNATIONAL  COPYRIGHT  (1867)        .        .50 

THE  UNITY  OF  LAW :  As  Exhibited  in  the  Relations  of  Physical, 

Social,   ^Mental,  and  Moral  Science  (1872).     In  one  volume,  Svo., 

pp.  xxiii.,  433.     Cloth $3.50 

CHAPMAN.— A  Treatise  on  Ropemaking : 

As  Practised  in  jirivate  and  pulilic  Ro]ie  vards,  with  a  Description 
of  the  Manufacture,  Rules,  Tol)les  of  Weiglits,  etc.,  adajited  to  the 
Trades,  Shipping,  Mining,  Railwavs,  Builders,  etc.  By  Rop.ket 
Chapman,    24mo " $l.5o 


8  HENRY  CAllEY  BAIRD'S  CATALOGUE. 

COLBURN.— The  Locomotive  Engine  : 

Including  a  Ucsi-rijitiou  oi'  it.s  Strueture,  JUilus  fur  Estimating  its  Capa- 
bilities, uud  Practical  Observations  on  its  Coustrueti(ni  and  Manage- 
ment. By  Zekaii  CoLBUKN.  Illustrated.  A  new  edition.  12mo.    $1.25 

CRAIK.  —  The    Practical    American    Millwright    and 
Miller. 
By  David  Craik,  Millwright.     Illustrated  l^y  numerous  wood  en- 
gravings, and  two  folding  i)lates.     Svo.  .....        $5.00 

DE  GRAFF.--The  Geometrical  Stair  Builders'  G-uide : 

Being  a  Plain  I'ractieal  System  of  Hand-llailiug,  embracing  all  ita 
necessary  Details,  and  Geometrically  lllustralcd  by  L'i  Sieel  Engrav- 
ings;  together  with  the  use  of  the  most  aiMjroved  principles  of  Prac- 
ticral  Geometry.     By  Simon  De  Geaff,  Architect.    4to.        .       ^'t.W 

DE  KONINCK.— DIETZ.— A  Practical  Manual  of  Che- 
mical Analysis  and  Assaying : 

As  ai)iilie<I  to  the  Manufacture  of  Iron  from  its  Ores,  and  to  Cast  Iron, 
Wrought  Iron,  and  Steel,  as  found  in  Commerce.  By  L.  L.  De  Kon- 
INCK,  Dr.  Sc,  and  E.  Dietz,  Engineer.  Edited  witli  Notes, by  PtOBERT 
Mallet,  F.R.S.,  F.S.G.,  M.I.C.E.,  etc.  American  Edition,  Edited 
with  Notes  and  an  Appendix  on  Iron  Ores,  by  A.  A.  Fesquet,  Chennst 
and  Engineer.     One  volume,  12mo.  .....        $2.50 

DUNCAN. — Practical  Surveyor's  Guide: 

Containing  the  necessary  information  to  make  any  person,  of  common 
cai>acity,  a  finished  land  surveyor  without  the  aid  of  a  teacher.  By 
Ani>reav  Duncan.    Illustmte'd.     12mo.,  cloth.     .        .        .        $1.25 

DUPLAIS. — A  Treatise  on  the  Manufacture  and  Dis- 
tillation of  Alcoholic  Liquors : 

Comprising  Accurate  and  Complete  Details  in  Regard  to  Alcohol  from 
Wine,  Molasses,  Beets,  Grain,  Rice,  Potatoes,  Sorghum,  Asphodel, 
Fruits,  efe. ;  with  the  Distillation  and  Rectification  of  Brandy,  Whis- 
key, Rum,  Gin,  Swiss  Absinthe,  etc.,  the  Preparation  of  Aronuitic  Wa- 
ters, Volatile  Oils  or  Essences,  Sugars,  Syrups,  Aromatic  Tinctures, 
Liqueurs,  Cordial  Wines,  Eft'erveseing  Wines,  etc.,  the  Aging  of  Brandy 
and  the  Imjirovement  of  Spirits,  witli  Cojiious  Directions  and  Tables 
for  Testing  and  Reducing  Spirituous  Liquoi-s,  etc.,  etc.  Translated 
and  Editei^I  from  the  French  of  MM.  DirPLAlS,  Aino  et  Jenne.  By 
M.  McKennie,  M.D.  To  which  are  added  tlie  United  States  Internal 
Revenue  Regulations  for  the  Assessment  and  Collection  of  Taxes  on 
Distilled  Spirits.  Illustrated  by  fourteen  folding  plates  and  several 
wood  engravings.     743  pp.,  8vo $10.00 

DUSSAUCE.— A  General  Treatise  on  the  Manufacture 
of  Every  Description  of  Soap : 

Comprising  the  Chemistry  of  the  Art,  with  Remarks  on  Alkalies,  Sa- 
ponifiable  Fatty  Bodies,  the  apparatus  necessary  in  a  Soap  Factory, 
Practical  Instructions  in  the  manufacture  of  the  various  kinds  of  Soap, 
the  assay  of  Soaps,  etc.,  etc.  Edited  from  Notes  of  Larme,  Fontenelle, 
Malapayre,  Dufour,  and  others,  with  large  and  important  additions  by 
Prof.  H.  Dussauce,  Chemist.    Illustrated.   Inone  vol.,8vo.     .    $10.00 


HENRY  CAREY  BAIRD'S  CATALOGUE.  9 

DUSSAUCE.— A  General  Treatise  on  the  Manufacture 
of  Vinegar : 

Tht'divtioul  ;ui(l  Practical.  Cmiiprisiiiir  the  various  Methods,  hv  the 
Slow  ami  the  (^>uick  Processes,  with  Alcohol,  Wine,  Ciraiii,  Malt,  Cider, 
Molasses,  and  IJeets  ;  as  well  as  the  Fabrication  of  Wood  Vinegar,  etc., 
etc.     l>y  Prof.  li.  DlssAUCE.     In  one  volume,  Svo.       .         .         .'^.").(»0 

DUSSAUCE.— A  New  and  Complete  Treatise  on  the 
Ai'ts  of  Tanning,  Currying,  and  Leather  Dressing : 

Conii)rising  all  the  Discoveries  and  Improvements  made  in  France, 
Great  Britain,  and  the  United  States.  Edited  from  Notes  and  Docu- 
ments of  Messrs.  Sallerou,  Grouvelle,  Duval,  Dessables,  Labarraque, 
Payen,  Rene,  De  Fontenelle,  Malapeyre,  etc.,  etc.  By  Prof.  H.  DUS- 
SAUCE, Chemist.     Illustrated  by  212  wood  engravings.     8vo.      ^25.00 

DUSSAUCE.— A  Practical  Guide  for  the  Perfumer  : 

Being  a  New  Treatise  on  Perfumery,  the  most  favorable  to  the  Beauty 
without  being  injurious  to  the  Health,  comprising  a  Description  of  the 
substances  used  in  Perfumery,  the  FormulsB  of  more  than  1000  Prepa- 
rations, such  as  Cosmetics,  Perfumed  Oils,  Tooth  Powders,  Waters, 
Extracts,  Tinctures,  Infusions,  Spirits,  Vinaigres,  Essential  Oils,  Pas- 
tels, Creams,  Soaps,  and  many  new  Hygienic  Products  not  hitherto 
described.  Edited  from  Notes  and  Documents  of  Messrs.  Debay,  La- 
nel,  etc.  With  additions  by  Prof.  H.  DusSAUCE,  Chemist.  12mo.    $3.00 

DUSSAUCE.— Practical    Treatise    on  the  Fabrication 

of  Matches,  Gun  Cotton,  and  Fulminating  Powders. 

By  Prof.  11.  DUSSAUCE.     12mo $3.00 

Dyer  and  Color-maker's  Companion: 

Containing  upwards  of  200  Eecei]>ts  for  making  Colors,  on  the  most 
approved  principles,  for  all  the  various  styles  and  fabrics  now  in  exist- 
ence ;  with  the  Scouring  Process,  and  plain  Directions  for  Preparing, 
AVashing-oflF,  and  Finishing  the  Goods.     In  one  vol.,  12rao.      .    $1.25 

EASTON.— A  Practical  Treatise  on  Street  or  Horse- 
power Railways. 
By   Alexander  Easton,   C.  E.     Illustrated  by  23  plates.      8vo., 
cloth $2.00 

ELDER.— Questions  of  the  Day : 

Economic  and  Social.     By  Dr.  William  Elder.     8vo.        .        $3.00 

FAIRBAIRN.— The  Principles  of  Mechanism  and  Ma- 
chinei'y  of  Transmission : 

Comjirising  the  Principles  of  ]\Iechanism,  Wheels,  and  Pulleys, 
Strength  and  Proportions  of  Shafts,  Coupling  of  Shafts,  and  Engaging 
and  Disengaging  Gear.  Bv  Sir  WiLLlAM  Fairbairn,  C.E.,  LL.D., 
F.R.S.,  F.G.'S.  Beautifully  illustrated  by  over  150  Avood-cuts.  In 
one  volume,  12mo.     .........         $2.50 

FORSYTH.— Book  of  Designs  for  Headstones,  Mural, 
and  other  Monuments : 

Containing  78  Designs.  By  JAMES  FoR.SYTH.  With  an  Introduction 
by  Charles  Boutell,  M."  A.    4to.,  cloth $5.00 


10  HENRY  CAREY  BAIRD'S  CATALOGUE. 

GIBSON.— The  American  Dyer: 

A  Practical  Treatise  on  the  Coloring  of  "Wool,  Cotton,  Yarn  and 
Cloth,  in  three  parts.  Part  First  gives  a  descriptive  account  of  the 
Dye  Stuffs ;  if  of  vegetable  origin,  where  ])roduced,  how  cultivated, 
ami  how  prepared  for  use;  if  chemical,  their  composition,  specific 
gravities,  and  general  adaptability,  how  adulterated,  and  how  to  de- 
tect the  adulterations,  etc.  Part  Second  is  devoted  to  the  Coloring  of 
Wool,  giving  recipes  for  one  hundred  and  twenty-nine  different  colors 
or  shades,  and  is  supplied  witli  sixty  colored  samples  of  Wool.  Part 
Third  is  devoted  to  the  Coloring  of  Raw  Cotton  or  Cotton  Waste,  for 
mixing  with  Wool  Colors  in  the  Manufacture  of  all  kinds  of  Fabrics, 
gives  recipes  for  thirty-eight  different  colors  or  shades,  and  is  supplied 
with  twenty-four  colored  samples  of  Cotton  Waste.  Also,  recipes  for 
Coloring  Beavers,  Doeslvins,  and  Flannels,  Avith  remarks  upon  Ani- 
lines, giving  reci2>es  for  fifteen  different  colors  or  shades,  and  nine 
samples  of  Aniline  Colors  that  will  stand  both  the  Fulling  and  Scour- 
ing process.  Also,  recijjes  for  Aniline  Colors  on  Cotton  Thread,  and 
i-ecipes  for  Common  Colors  on  Cotton  Yarns.  Embracing  in  all  over 
two  hundred  recipes  for  Colors  and  Shades,  and  ninety-four  samples 
of  Colored  Wool  and  Cotton  Waste,  etc.  By  Richard  H.  Gibson, 
Practical  Dyer  and  Chemist.     In  one  volume,  8vo.      .        ,        $12.50 

GILBART. — History  and  Principles  of  Banking  : 

A  Practical  Treatise.  By  James  W.  Gilbaet,  late  Manager  of  the 
London  and  Westminster  Bank.  With  additions.  In  one  volume, 
8vo.,  600  pages,  slice}:) $5.00 

Gothic  Album  for  Cabinet  Makers : 

Comprising  a  Collection  of  Designs  for  Gothic  Furniture.  Illustrated 
by  23  large  and  beautifully  engraved  plates.     Oblong  .         .        $3.00 

GRANT.  — Beet-root    Sugar    and    Cultivation    of   the 
Beet. 
By  E.  B.  Grant.    12mo $1.25 

GREGORY.— Mathematics  for  Practical  Men  : 

Adapted  to  the  Pursuits  of  Surveyors,  Architects,  Mechanics,  and 
Civil  Engineers.    By  Olinthus  GREGORY.    8vo.,  plates,  cloth    $3.08 

GRISWOLD.— Railroad  Engineer's  Pocket    Compan- 
ion for  the  Field : 

Comprising  Rules  for  Calculating  Deflection  Distances  and  Angles, 
Tangential  Distances  and  Angles,  and  all  Necessary  Tables  for  Engi- 
neers ;  also  the  art  of  Levclliiiix  from  Preliminary  Survey  to  the  Con- 
struction of  Railroads,  intended  Expressly  for  the  Young  Engineer, 
together  with  Numerous  Valuable  Rules  and  Examples.  By  W. 
Griswold.      12mo.,  tucks       .        .  • $1.75 

GRUNER. — Studies  of  Blast  Furnace  Phenomena. 

By  M.  L.  Gruner,  President  of  tlie  General  Council  of  Ivlmes  of 
France,  and  lately  Professor  of  Metallurgy  at  the  Ecole  des  Mines. 
Translated,  with  the  Author's  sanction,  with  an  Appendix,  by  L.  D.  B. 
Gordon,  F.R.S.E..  E.G..?.     Illustrated.     8vo.       .         .         .         $2.50 


HENRY  CAREY  BAIRD'S  CATALOGUE.  11. 

GUETTIER.— Metallic  Alloys: 

Boiuj^  a.  rractical  Guide,  to  their  Chemical  and  Pliysical  Properties, 
their  Preparation,  Composition,  and  Uses.  Translated  from  the 
French  of  A.  GfETTlEli,  Engineer  and  Director  of  Foundries,  author 
of"  La  Fouderie  en  Fi'ance,"  etc.,  etc.  By  A.  A.  Fesquet,  Chemist 
and  Engineer.     In  one  volume,  12mo .$3.00 

HARRIS. — Gas  Superintendent's  Pocket  Companion. 

By  n.VKRTS  &  Brother,  Gas  Meter  Manufacturers,  1115  and  1117 
Cherry  Sti'cet,  Philadelphia.    Full  bound  in  jiocket-book  form    $2.00 

Hats  and  Felting: 

A  Practical  Treatise  on  their  Manufacture.  By  a  Practical  natter. 
Illustrated  by  Drawings  of  Machinery,  etc.    Svo.  .         .         .         $1.25 

HOFMANW.— A  Practical  Treatise  on  the  Manufac- 
tiire  of  Paper  in  all  its  Branches. 

By  Carl  IIofmann.  Late  Superintendent  of  paper  mills  in  Ger- 
many and  the  United  States;  recently  manager  of  the  Public  Ledger 
Paper  JMills,  near  Elkton,  !Md.  Illustrated  by  110  wood  engravings, 
and  five  large  folding  plates.  In  one  volume,  4to.,  cloth;  398 
pages $15.00 

HUGHES. — American  Miller  and  Millwright's  Assist- 
ant, 

By  Wm.  Carter  Hughes.   A  new  edition.   In  one  vol.,  12mo.  $l./>0 

HURST. --A  Hand-Book  for  Architectural  Surveyors 
and  others  engaged  in  Building: 

Containing  Formulse  useful  in  Designing  Builder's  work,  Table  of 
Weights,  of  the  materials  used  in  Building,  Memoranda  connected 
with  Builders'  Avork,  Mensuration,  the  Practice  of  Builders'  Measure- 
ment, Contracts  of  Labor,  Valuation  of  Property,  Summary  of  the 
Practice  in  Dilapidation,  etc.,  etc.  By  J.  F.  HilRST,  C.  E. '  Second 
edition,  pocket-book  form,  full  bound $2.50 

JERVIS.— Railway  Property : 

A  Treatise  on  the  Construction  and  Management  of  Railways ;  de- 
signed to  afford  useful  knowledge,  in  the  popular  style,  to  tlie  holders 
of  this  class  of  property ;  as  well  as  Railway  Managers,  Officers,  and 
Agents.  By  JoiiN  B.  Jervis,  late  Chief  Engineer  of  the  Hudson 
River  Railroad,  Croton  Aqueduct,  etc.    In  one  vol.,  12mo.,  cloth   $2.00 

JOHNSTON.— Instructions  for  the  Analysis  of  Soils, 
Limestones,  and  Manures. 

By  J.  F.  W.  .loiiNSTON,     12mo, 38 


12  HENRY  CAREY   BAIRD'S  CATALOGUE. 

KEENE.— A  Hand-Book  of  Practical  Gauging : 

For  the  Use  of  IJoginners,  to  wliich  is  aililcd,  A  Chapter  on  Distilla. 
tion,  describing  tlie  process  in  operation  iit  tlie  Custom  House  ibi- 
ascertaining  the  strength  of  wines.  By  James  B.  Keene,  of  H.  M. 
Customs.     8vo. $1.25 

KELTjEY. — Speeches,  Addresses,  and  Letters  on  In- 
dustrial and  Financial  Questions. 

By  Hon.  AViLLIAM  1).  Kelley,  M.  C.  In  one  volume,  544  pacres, 
8vo $b.00 

KENTISH. — A  Treatise  on  a  Box  of  Instruments, 

And  the  Slide  Rule  ;  with  the  Theory  of  Trigonometry  and  Loga- 
rithms, including  Practical  Geometry,  Hun'cying,  Measuring  of  Tim- 
ber, Cask  and  Malt  Gauging,  Heights,  and  Distances.  By  Thomas 
Kentish.     In  one  volume.     12mo. $1.25 

KOBELL.—ERNI.— Mineralogy  Simplified : 

A  short  Method  of  Determining  and  Classifying  Minerals,  by  means 
of  simple  Chemical  Experiments  in  the  Wet  Way.  Translated  from 
the  last  German  Edition  of  E.  VoN  KoBELl,,  with  an  Introduction  to 
Blow-jiipe  Analysis  and  other  additions.  By  Henri  Erni,  M.  D., 
late  Chief  Chemist,  Department  of  Agriculture,  author  of  "  Coal  Oil 
and  Petroleum."     In  one  volume,  12mo.         ....        $2.50 

LANDRIN.— A  Treatise  on  Steel: 

Comjn-ising  its  Theory,  Metallurgy,  Properties,  Practical  Working, 
and  Use.  By  M.  H.  "c.  Landri'n,  Jr.,  Civil  Engineer.  Translated 
from  the  French,  with  Notes,  by  A.  A.  Fesquet,  Chemist  and  Engi- 
neer. With  an  Appendix  on  the  Bessemer  and  the  Martin  Processes 
for  Manufacturing  Steel,  from  the  Report  of  Abrum  S.  Hewitt,  United 
States  Commissioner  to  the  Universal  Exposition,  Paris,  1867.  In  one 
volume,  12mo. $3.00 

LARKIN.— The  Practical  Brass  and  Iron  Founder's 
Guide  : 

A  Conci.se  Treatise  on  Brass  Founding,  Moulding,  the  Metals  and  their 
Alloys,  etc. :  to  which  are  ad<l(d  lUcent  Imi^rovements  in  the  Manu- 
facture of  Iron,  Steel  by  the  Bessemer  Process,  etc.,  etc.  By  James 
Laekin,  late  Conductor  of  the  Brass  Foundry  Department  in  Reany, 
Neafie  &  Go's.  Penn  Works,  Philadelphia.  Fifth  edition,  revised, 
with  Extensive  additions.     In  one  volume,  12mo.  .        .        $2.25 

LEA VITT.— Facts  about  Peat  as  an  Article  of  Fuel : 

With  Remarks  upon  its  Origin  and  Composition,  the  Localities  in 
Mhich  it  is  found,  the  ^Icthods  of  Preparation  and  Manufacture,  and 
the  various  Uses  to  which  it  is  applicable  ;  together  M'ith  many  other 
matters  of  Practical  and  Scientitic  Interest.  To  which  is  added  a  chap- 
ter on  the  Utilization  of  Coal  Dust  with  Peat  for  the  Production  of  an 
Excellent  Fuel  at  Moderate  Cost,  specially  adapted  for  Steam  Service. 
By  T.  H.  Leavitt.     Third  edition.     12mo.  .        .        .        $1.75 


HENRY  CAREY  BAIRD'S  CATALOGUE.  13 

LEROUX,  C. — A  Practical  Treatise  on  the  Manufac- 
ture of  Worsteds  and  Carded  Yarns : 

Comprising  Practical  Mechanics,  with  Rules  and  Calculations  applied 
to  Spinning;  Sorting,  Cleaning,  and  Scouring  Wools;  the  English 
and  French  nietliods  of  Combing,  Drawing,  and  Spinning  Worsteds 
and  Manufacturing  Carded  Yarns.  Translated  from  the  French  of 
Ch.\RLES  Leroux,  ilechanical  Engineer,  and  Superintendent  of  a 
Spinning  Mill,  by  IIouatio  Paixe,  M.  D.,  and  A.  A.  Fesquet, 
Chemist  and  Engineer.  Illustrated  ))y  12  large  Plates.  To  which  is 
added  an  Appendix,  containing  extracts  from  the  Reports  of  the  Inter- 
national Jury,  and  of  the  Artisans  selected  by  the  Committee  appointed 
by  the  Council  of  the  Society  of  Arts,  London,  on  Woollen  and  Worsted 
Machinery  and  Fabrics,  as  exhibited  in  the  Paris  Universal  Exposi- 
tion, 1867.     8vo.,  cloth §5.00 

LESLIE  (Miss).— Complete  Cookery: 

Directions  for  Coolvery  in  its  Various  Branches.  By  Miss  Leslie. 
60th  thousand.  Thoroughly  revised,  with  the  addition  of  New  Re- 
ceipts.    In  one  volume,  i2mo.,  cloth .$1.50 

LESLIE  (Miss).— Ladies'  House  Book: 

A  ^lanual  of  Domestic  Economy.     20th  revised  edition.     12mo.,  cloth. 

LESLIE  (Miss).— Two  Hundred  Receipts  in  French 
Cookery. 

Cloth,  12mo. 

LIEBER.— Assayer's  Guide : 
Or,  Practical  Directions  to  Assayers,  Miners,  and  Smelters,  for  the 
Tests  and  Assays,  by  Heat  and  by  Wet  Processes,  for  the  Ores  of  all 
the  princijjal  Metals,  of  Gold  and  Silver  Coins  and  Alloys,  and  of 
Coal,  etc.     By  Oscar  M.  Lieber.     12mo.,  cloth,  .        ,        $1.25 

LOTH.— The  Practical  Stair  Builder: 

A  Complete  Treatise  on  the  Art  of  Building  Stairs  and  Hand-Rails, 
Designed  for  Carpenters,  Builders,  and  Stair-Builders.  Illustrated 
with  Thirty  Original  Plates.  By  C.  Edward  Loth,  Professional 
Stair-Builder.    One  large  4to.  volume.  ....        §10.00 

LOVE. — The  Art  of  Dyeing,  Cleaning,  Scouring,  and 
Finishing,  on  the  Most  Approved  English  and 
French  Methods: 

Being  Practical  Instructions  in  Dyeing  Silks,  Woollens,  and  Cottons, 
Feathers,  Chips,  Straw,  etc.  Scouringand  Cleaning  Bed  and  Window 
Curtains,  Carpets,  Rugs,  etc.  French  and  English  Cleaning,  any 
Color  or  Fabric  of  Silk,  Satin,  or  Damask.  By  Thomas  Love,  a 
Working  Dyer  and  Scourer.  Second  American  Edition,  to  which  are 
added  General  Instructions  for  the  Use  of  Aniline  Colors.  In  one 
volume,  8vo.,  343  pages.  $5.00 


14  HENRY  CAREY    BAIRD'S   CATALOGUE. 


MAIN   and    BROWN.— Questions    on    Subjects    Con- 
nected with  the  Marine  Steam-Engine  : 

AjkI  Examination  Papers :  with  Hints  for  their  Solution.  By  TliOMAS 
J.  Main,  Professor  of  Mathematics,  Royal  Naval  College,  and  Thomas 
Browx,  Chief  Engineer,  R.  N.     12mo".,  cloth.        .         .         .         $1.50 

MAIN  and  BROWN.— The    Indicator    and    Dynamo- 
meter : 

With  their  Practical  Applications  to  the  Steam-Engine.  By  TllOMAS 
J.  Main,  M.  A.F.  R.,  Assistant  Professor  Royal  Naval  College,  Ports- 
mouth, and  Thomas  Brown,  Assoc.  Inst.  C.  E.,  Chief  Engineer,  R. 
N.,  attached  to  the  Royal  Naval  College.  Illustrated.  Front  tlie 
Fourth  London  Edition.     8vo. !j;i.50 

MAIN  and  BROWN.— The  Marine  Steam-Engine. 

By  Thomas  J.  Main,  F.  R.  ;  Assistant  S.  Mathematical  Professor  at 
the  Royal  Naval  College,  Portsmouth,  and  Thomas  Bkown,  Assoc. 
Inst.  C'  E.,  Chief  Engineer  R.  N.  Attached  to  the  Royal  Naval  Col- 
lege. Authors  of  "  Questions  connected  with  the  Marine  Steam-En- 
gine," and  the  "  Indicator  and  Dynamometer."  With  numerous  Illus- 
trations.    In  one  volume,  8vo. $5.00 

MARTIN.— Screw-Cutting  Tables,  for  the  Use  of  Me- 
chanical Engineers : 

Showing  the  Pro])er  Arrangement  of  Wheels  for  Cutting  the  Threads 
of  Screws  of  any  requiredPitch  ;  with  a  Table  for  Making  the  Uni- 
versal Gas-Pii^e  Thread  and  Taps.  By  W.  A.  Martin,  Engineer. 
8vo 50 

Mechanics'  (Amateur)  Workshop: 

A  treatise  containing  i)lain  and  concise  directions  for  the  manipula- 
iUm  of  AV'ood  and  JMetais,  including  Casting,  Forging,  Brazing,  Sol- 
dering, and  Carpentry.  By  the  author  of  the  "  Lathe  and  its  Uses." 
Tiiird  edition.     Illustrated'.     8vo $3.00 

MOLESWORTH.— Pocket-Book  of  Useful  Formulae 
and  Memoranda  for  Civil  and  Mechanical  Engi- 
neers. 
By  Guilford  L.  Molesworth,  Member  of  the  Institution  of  Civil 
Engineers,  Chief  Resident  Engineer  of  the  Ceylon  Railway.  Second 
American,  from  the  Tenth  Loudon  Edition.  In  one  volume,  full 
bound  in  pocket-book  form $2.00 

NAPIER,— A  System  of  Chemistry  Applied  to  Dyeing. 

By  James  Napier,  F.  C.  S.  A  New  and  Thoroughly  Revised  Edi- 
tion. Completely  brought  up  to  the  present  state  of  the  Science,  inclu- 
ding the  Chemistry  of  Coal  Tar  Colors,  by  A.  A.  Fesquet,  Chemist 
and  Engineer.  With  an  Appendix  on  Dyeing  and  t'alieo  Printing,  as 
shown  at  the  Universal  Exposition,  Paris,  18()7.  Illustrated.  In  one 
V^olume,  8vo.,  422  pages $5.00 


HENRY  CAREY  BAIRD'S  CATALOGUE.  15 

NAPIER.— Manual  of  Electro-Metallurgy : 

liK-liiiliiij,'  tho  ApplicatidH  of  tlie  Art  to  Maiiut'aetiiring  Processes.  By 
JAiMIvS  xS  APiEJi.  Fourtli  American,  from  the  Fourth  London  edition, 
revised  and  enlarged.  Illustrated  by  engravingy.  Inonc  vol.,  8vo.  §2.00 

NASON.— Tabic  of  Reactions  for  Qualitative  Chemical 
Analysis. 

By  IIenky  B.  Nasox,  Professor  of  Chemistry  in  the  Rensselaer  Poly- 
technic Institute,  Troy,  New  York.     Illustrated  by  Colors.        .         (33 

NEWBERY.— Gleanings     from    Ornamental    Art    of 
every  style  : 

Drawn  from  Examples  in  the  British,  South  Kensington,  Indian, 
Crystal  Palace,  anc'  >ther  ]\Iuseums,  the  Exhibitions  of  LSol  and  lSt)2, 
and  the  best  Eng'iu^n  and  Foreign  works.  In  a  series  of  one  hundred 
exquisitely  drawn  I'lates,  containing  nuiny  hundred  examiiles.  By 
Robert  Newbeky.    4to $15.00 

NICHOLSON.— A  Manual  of  the  Art  of  Bookbinding : 

Containing  full  instructions  in  the  different  Branches  of  Forwa?ding, 
Gilding,  and  Finishing.  Also,  the  Art  of  Marbling  Book-edges  and 
Paper.     By  J.\MES  B.  Nicholson.     Illustrated.     12mo.,  cloth.  $2.25 

NICHOLSON.— The  Carpenter's  New  Guide: 

A  Complete  Book  of  Lines  for  Carpenters  and  Joiners.  By  PETER 
Nicholson.  The  whole  carefully  and  thoroughly  revised  by  H.  K, 
Davis,  and  containing  numerous  new  and  improved  and  original  De- 
signs for  Roofs,  Domes,  etc.  By  Samuel  Sloan,  Architect.  Illus- 
trated by  80  plates.    4to. $4.50 

NORRIS.— A  Hand-book  for  Locomotive  Engineers 
and  Machinists : 
Comprising  the  Proportions  and  Calculations  for  Constructing  Loco- 
motives ;  Manner  of  Setting  Valves  ;  Tables  of  Squares,  Cubes,  Areas, 
etc.,  etc.  By  Septimus  Norris,  Civil  and  Mechanical  Engineer. 
New  edition.     Illustrated.     12mo.,  cioth $2.00 

NYSTROM.— On    Technological    Education,   and   the 
Construction  of  Ships  and  Screw  Propellers : 

For  Naval  and  Marine  Engineers.  By  JoHN  W.  Nystrom,  late  Act- 
ing Chief  Engineer,  U.  S.  N.  Second" edition,  revised  with  additional 
matter.     Illustrated  by  seven  engravings.     12mo.  .         .         $1.50 

O'NEILL.— A  Dictionary  of  Dyeing  and  Calico  Print- 
ing: 
Containing  a  brief  account  of  all  the  Substances  and  Processes  in  use 
in  the  Art  of  Dveing  and  Printing  Textile  Fabrics;  M'ith  Practical 
Receipts  and  Scientitic  Information.  By  Charles  O'Neill,  Ana- 
lytical Chemist ;  Fellow  of  the  Chemical  Society  of  London  ;  Member 
of  the  Literary  and  Philosophical  Society  of  Manchester  ;  Author  of 
"  Chemistry  oif  Calico  Printing  and  Dyeing."  To  which  is  added  an 
Essay  on  Coal  Tar  Colors  and  their  apjdication  to  Dyeing  and  Calico 
Printing.  By  A.  A.  Fesquet,  Chemist  and  Engineer.  With  an  Ap- 
pendix on  Dyeing  and  CJalico  Printing,  as  shown  at  the  Universal 
Exposition,  Paris,  18G7.     In  one  volume,  8vo.,  491  pages.      .        $(j.00 


16  HENRY  CAREY  BAIRD'S  CATALOGUE. 

ORTON.— Underground  Treasures : 

How  and  "Where  to  Find  Them.  A  Key  for  the  Ready  Determination 
of  all  the  Useful  Minerals  withiu  the  United  States.  By  JAMES 
Okton,  a.  M.    Illustrated,  12mo $1.50 

OSBORN. — American  Mines  and  Mining: 
Theoretically  and  Practically  Considered.     By  Prof.  H.  S.  OSBOEN. 
Illustrated  by  numerous  engravings.     8vo.     {In  2}repuration.) 

OSBORN.— The  Metallurgy  of  Iron  and  Steel : 

Theoretical  and  Practical  in  all  its  Branches ;  Mitli  s]»ecial  reference 
to  American  Materials  and  Processes.  By  H.  S.  Osboen,  LL.  D., 
Professor  of  Mining  and  Metallurgy  in  Lafayette  College,  Easton, 
Pennsylvania.  Illustrated  by  numerous  large  folding  plates  and 
wood-engravings.     Svo. $15.00 

OVERMAN.— The  Manufacture  of  Steel : 

Containing  the  Practice  and  Princii)les  of  Working  and  Making  Steel. 
A  Handbook  for  Blacksmiths  and  Workers  in  Steel  and  Iron,  Wagon 
Makers,  Die  Sinkers,  Cutlers,  and  Manufacturers  of  Files  and  Hard- 
ware, of  Steel  and  Iron,  and  for  Men  of  Science  and  Art.  By  Fred- 
erick Overman,  Mining  Engineer,  Author  of  the  "  Manufacture  of 
Iron,"  etc.  A  new,  enlarged,  and  revised  Edition.  By  A.  A.  Fesquet, 
Chemist  and  Engineer $1.50 

OVERMAN.— The    Moulder   and    Pounder's    Pocket 
Guide  : 

A  Treatise  on  Moulding  and  Founding  in  Green-sand,  Dry-sand,  Loam, 
and  Cement;  the  Moulding  of  Machine  Frames,  Mill-gear,  Hollow- 
ware,  Ornaments,  Trinkets,  Bells,  and  Statues  ;  Description  of  Moulds 
for  Iron,  Bronze,  Brass,  and  other  Metals  ;  Plaster  of  Paris,  Sulphur, 
Wax,  and  other  articles  commonly  used  in  Casting;  the  Construction 
of  Melting  Furnaces,  the  Melting  and  Founding  of  Metals  ;  the  Com- 
position of  Alloys  and  their  Nature.  "With  an  Appendix  containing 
Receipts  for  Alloys,  Bronze,  Varnishes  and  Colors  for  Castings ;  also, 
Tables  on  the  Strength  and  other  qualities  of  Cast  Metals.  By  Fred- 
erick Overman,  Mining  Engineer,  Author  of  "  The  Manufacture 
of  Iron."     With  42  Illustrations.     12mo $1.50 

Painter,  Gilder,  and  Varnisher's  Companion : 

Containing  Rules  and  Regulations  in  everything  relating  to  the  Arts 
of  Painting,  Gilding,  Varnishing,  Glass-Staining,  Graining,  Marbling, 
Sign-Writing,  Gilding  on  Glass,  and  Coach  Painting  and  Varnishing ; 
Tests  for  the  Detection  of  Adulterations  in  Oils,  Colors,  etc. ;  and  a 
Statement  of  the  Diseases  to  which  Painters  are  peculiarly  liable,  with 
the  Simplest  and  Best  Remedies.  Sixteenth  Edition.  Revised,  with 
an  Appendix.  Containing  Colors  and  Coloring— Theoretical  and 
Practical.  Comprising  descriptions  of  a  great  variety  of  Additional 
Pigments,  their  Qualities  and  Uses,  to  which  are  added.  Dryers,  and 
Modes  and  Operations  of  Painting,  etc.  Together  with  Chevreul's 
Principles  of  Harmony  and  Contrast  of  Colors.     12rao..,  cloth.       $1.50 


HENRY  CAREY   BAIRD'S  CATALOGUE.  17 


PALLETT.— The  Miller's,  Millwright's,  and  Engineer's 
Guide. 
By  IIeney  Pallett.     lllustrateil.     In  (inc  volume,  12nio.        $3.00 

PERCY.— The  Manufacture  of  Russian  Sheet-Iron. 

By  John-  Pkiuy,  M.D.,  F.H.S.,  Leotiurr  on  :Mc'tallurLr7  'it  tho  Royal 
ydiool  of  .Minus,  and  to  Tlu'  Advanced  Class  of  Artillery  Officers  at 
the  Royal  Artillery  Institution,  Woolwich;  Author  of  "  Metalluruy." 
With  Illustrations.    Svo.,  paper iiU  cts. 

PERKINS.— Gas  and  Ventilation. 

Practical  Treatise  on  Gas  and  Ventilation.  With  Special  Relation  to 
Illuminating,  Heating,  and  Cooking  by  Gas.  Including  Scientific 
Heljis  to  Engineer-students  and  others.  '  With  Illustrated  Diagrams. 
By  E.  E.  Pekkins.    12mo.,  cloth "  $1.25 

PERKINS  and  STOWE.— A  New  Guide  to  the  Sheet- 
iron  and  Boiler  Plate  Roller  : 

Containing  a  Series  of  Tables  showing  the  Weight  of  Slabs  and  Piles 
to  produce  Boiler  Plates,  and  of  the  Weight  of  Piles  and  the  Sizes  of 
Bars  to  produce  Sheet-iron ;  the  Thickness  of  the  Bar  Gauge  in 
decimals;  the  Weight  j)er  foot,  and  the  Thickness  on  the  Bar  or  Wire 
Gauge  of  the  fractional  parts  of  an  inch  ;  the  Weight  per  sheet,  and 
the  Thickness  on  the  Wire  Gauge  of  Sheet-iron  of  various  dimensions 
to  weigh  1 12  lbs.  per  bundle ;  and  the  conversion  of  Short  Weight 
into  Long  Weight,  and  Long  Weight  into  Short.  Estimated  and  col- 
lected by  G.  H.  Perkins  and  J.  G.  Stowe $2,50 

PHILLIPS  and  DARLINGTON.— Records  of  Mining 
and  Metallurgy ; 

Or  Facts  and  Memoranda  for  the  use  of  the  Mine  Agent  and  Smelter. 
By  J.  Arthur  Phillips,  Mining  Engineer,  Graduate  of  the  Imperial 
School  of  Mines,  France,  etc.,  and  John  Darlington.  Illustrated 
by  numerous  engravings.     In  one  volume,  12mo.  .        .        $2.00 

PROTEAUX.— Practical  Guide  for  the  Manufacture 
of  Paper  and  Boards. 
By  A.  Proteaux,  Civil  Engineer,  and  Graduate  of  tiie  School  of  Arts 
and  Manufactures,  and  Director  of  Thiers'  Paper  Mill,  Puy-de-Dome. 
With  additions,  by  L.  S.  Le  Normanu.  Translated  from  the  French, 
Avith  Notes,  by  Horatio  Paine,  A.B.,  M.D.  To  which  is  added  a 
Chapter  on  the  Manufacture  of  Paper  from  Wood  in  the  United 
States,  by  Henry  T.  Broavn,  of  the  "  American  Artisan."  Illus- 
trated bv  six  plates,  containing  Drawings  of  Raw  Materials,  Machi- 
nery, Plans  of  Paper-.Mills,  etc.,  etc.     Svo $10.00 

REGNAULT.— Elements  of  Chemistry. 

By  M.  V.  Regnaui.t.  Translated  fron»  the  French  by  T.  FORREST 
Betton,  ^[.  D.,  and  edited,  with  Notes,  by  .TamES  C.  BOOTH,  Melter 
and  Refiner  U.  S.  Mint,  arul  Wm.  L.  Faher,  Metallurgist  and  Mining 
Engineer.  Illustrated  by  nearly  700  wood  engravings.  Comprising 
nearly  1500  pages.     In  two  volumes,  8vo,,  cloth,     .        .        .        $7,50 


r^VlA,^!^ 


\-^ 


•>, 


.r-lt"-'^'^-''' 


1    -JfS^  HKVuy  CAREY  BAIRD'S  CATALOGUE. 


!E4rEIaJ,CA'* Practical  Treatise  on  the  Manufacture  of 
Portland  Cement : 
By  Henry  Reid,  C.  E.  To  which  is  added  a  Translation  of  M.  A. 
Lipowitz's  Work,  describing  a  New  Method  adoj)ted  in  Germany  for 
Mannfacturing  that  Cement,  by  W.  F.  Reid.  Illustrated  by  plates 
and  wood  engravings.     8vo.     . " $6.00 

RIPFAULT,    VERGNAUD,     and     TOUSSAINT.— A 
Practical    Treatise    on    the    Manufacture   of  Var- 
nishes. 
By   M  M.   RiFFAULT,    Veegnaxtd,   and   Toussaint.     Revised   and 
Edited  by  M.  F.  Malepeyre  and  Dr.  Emil  Wi>X'KLER.     Illustrated. 
In  one  volume,  Svo.     {In  j>r(puration.) 

RIFFAULT,  VERGNAUD,  and  TOUSSAINT.— A 
Practical  Treatise  on  the  Manufacture  of  Colors 
for  Painting : 

Containing  the  best  Formula?  and  the  Processes  the  Newest  and  in 
most  ( icneral  Use.  By  M  M.  Riffault,  Vergnaud,  and  Toussaint. 
Revised  and  Edited  by  M.  F.  Malepeyre  and  Dr.  Emii.  Win'CKLER. 
Translated  from  tlie  French  by  A.  A.  Fesquet,  Chemist  and  Engi- 
neer.    Illustrated  by  Engravings.     In  one  volume,  650  jmges,  Svo. 

$7.50 

ROBINSON.— Explosions  of  Steam  Boilers: 

How  they  are  Caused,  and  how  they  may  be  Prevented.  By  J.  R. 
Robinson,  Steam  Engineer.     12mo $1."25 

ROPER. — A    Catechism    of   High    Pressure    or    Non- 
Condensing  Steam-Engines : 
Including  the  Modelling,  Constructing,  Running,  and  Management 
of  Steam    Engines   and    Steam    Boilers.       With"  Illustrations.      By 
Stephen  Roper,  Engineer.     Full  bound  tucks    .        .        ,        $2,00 

ROSELEUR.— Galvanoplastic  Manipulations : 

A  Practical  Guide  for  the  Gold  and  Silver  Electro-jdater  and  the 
Galvanoplastic  Operator.  Translated  from  the  French  of  Alfred 
RosELEUR,  Chemist,  Professor  of  the  Galvanoplastic  Art,  Manufactu« 
rer  of  Chemicals,  Gold  and  Silver  Electro-plater.  By  A.  A.  Fesquet, 
Chemist  and  Engineer.     Illustrated  bv  over  127  Engravings  on  wood. 

8vo.,  495  pages ' $6.00 

IjST'This  Treatise  is  the  fullest  and  by  far  the  best  on  this  subject  ever 
published  in  the  United  States. 

SCHINZ.— Researches  on  the  Action  of  the  Blast 
Furnace. 
By  Charles  Schinz.  Translated  from  the  German  with  the  special 
permission  of  the  Author  by  Willlvm  II.  Maw  and  MoRiTZ  Mul- 
LER.  With  an  Appendix  written  by  the  Author  expressly  for  this 
edition.  Illustrated  by  seven  plates,  containing  28  figures.  In  one 
volume,  ]2nio,  r         .         ,         i         ,         ,         .         .         .         $4.25 


HENRY  CAREY  BAIRD'S  CAT.^L^KvE. 

<^l 

SHAW.— Civil  Architecture : 

BeiiiL,'  a  Complete  Theoretical  and  Priictical  System  of  Cuildin,!?,  con- 
taining the  Fundamental  PriueiiJles  of  the  Art.  By  Edwakd  Siiaw, 
Arciiitect.  To  Avhieh  is  added  a  Treatise  on  Gothic  Architecture,  etc. 
By  Thomas  W.  Silloway  and  Geokge  M.  IIakding,  Architects. 
The  whole  illustrated  by  One  Hundred  and  Two  quarto  2)lates  finely 
engraved  on  cojij^c'r.      Eleventh  Edition.     4to.,  cloth.  .         §10.00 

SHUNK.— A   Practical   Treatise    on   Railway  Curves 
and  Location,  for  Young  Engineers. 

By  AVILI.IAM  F.  SliUNK,  Civil  Engineer.      12mo.  .         .         $2.00 

SLOAN.— American  Houses : 

A  variety  of  Original  Designs  for  Rural  Buildings.  Illustrated  by  26 
colored  Engravings,  with  Descriptive  References.  By  Samuel  Sloan, 
Architect,  author  of  the  "  Model  Architect,"  etc.,  etc.     Svo.  $2.50 

SMEATON.— Builder's  Pocket  Companion: 

Containing  the  Elements  of  Building,  Surveying,  and  Architecture; 
with  Pi-actical  Rules  and  Instructions  connected  with  the  subject. 
By  A.  C.  Smeaton,  Civil  Engineer,  etc.     In  one  volume,  12mo.     $1.50 

SMITH.— A  Manual  of  Political  Economy. 

By  E.  Pesiiine  Smith.  A  new  Edition,  to  which  is  added  a  full 
Index.    12rao.,  cloth $1.25 

SMITH.— Parks  and  Pleasure  Grounds: 

Or  Practical  iSJ^otcs  ou  Country  Residences,  Villas,  Public  Parks,  and 
Gardens.  By  Charles  H.  J.  Smith,  Landscape  Gardener  and 
Garden  Architect,  etc.,  etc.     12mo. $2.25 

SMITH.— The  Dyer's  Instructor: 

Comprising  Practical  Instructions  in  the  Art  of  Dyeing  Silk,  Cotton, 
A\'ool,  and  Worsted,  and  Woollen  Goods:  containing  nearly  8u0 
Receijits.  To  which  is  added  a  Treatise  on  the  Art  of  Padding ;  and 
the  Printing  of  Silk  Warps,  Skeins,  and  Handkerchiefs,  and  the 
various  Mordants  and  Colors  for  the  diftcrcut  styles  of  such  work. 
By  David  Smith,  Pattern  Dyer.     12mo.,  cloth.     .'        .        .        $3.00 

SMITH.— The  Practical  Dyer's  Guide: 

Comprising  Practical  Instructions  in  the  Dyeing  of  Shot  Cobour£js, 
Silk  Striped  Orleans,  Colored  Orleans  from  Black  Warps,  Ditto  from 
AVhite  Warps,  Colored  Cobourgs  from  "White  Warj)s,  Merinos,  Yarns, 
AVoollen  Cloths,  etc.  Containing  nearly  300  Receipts,  to  most  of  which 
a  Dyed  Pattern  is  annexed.  Also,  A  treatise  on  the  Art  of  Padding. 
By  David  Smith.    In  one  volume,  Svo.    Price.         .        .        $25.00 

STEWART.— The  American  System. 

Speeches  on  the  Tariif  Question,  and  on  Internal  Improvements,  princi- 
pally delivered  in  the  House  of  Representatives  of  the  Ignited  States. 
By  Andrew  Stewart,  late  M.  C.  from  Pennsylvania.  With  a  Portrait, 
and  a  Biographical  Sketch.     In  one  volume,'  Svo.,  407  pages.      $3,00 


20  HENRY   CAREY   BAIRD'S   CATALOGUE. 

STOKES. — Cabinet-maker's   and    Upholsterer's    Com- 
panion : 

Comprising  the  Rudiments  and  Principles  of  Cabinet-making  and  Up- 
holstery, with  Familiar  Instructions,  illustrated  by  Examples  for 
attaining  a  Proficiency  in  the  Art  of  Drawing,  as  applicable  to  Cabi- 
net-work; the  Processes  of  Veneering,  Inlaying,  and  Buhl-work  ;  the 
Art  of  Dyeing  and  Staining  Wood,  Bone,  Tortoise  Shell,  etc.  Direc- 
tions for  Lackering,  Japanning,  and  Varnishing;  to  make  French 
Polish;  to  prepare  the  Best  Glues,  Cements,  and  Comj^ositions,  and  a 
number  of  Receipts  particularly  useful  for  workmen  generally.  By 
J.  Stokes.     In  one  volume,  12mo.     With  Illustrations.        .        $1.25 

Strength  and  other  Properties  of  Metals: 

Rejiorts  of  Experiments  on  the  Strength  and  other  Properties  of  Metals 
for  Cannon.  With  a  Description  of  the  Machines  for  testing  Metals, 
and  of  the  Classification  of  Cannon  in  service.  By  Officers  of  the  Ord- 
nance Department  U.  S.  Army.  By  authority  of  the  Secretary  of  War. 
Illustrated  by  25  large  steel  i>lates.     In  one  volume,  4to.      .         $10.00 

SULLIVA]^.— Protection  to  Native  Industry. 

By  Sir  Edward  Sullivan,  Baronet,  author  of  "  Ten  Chapters  on 
Social  Reforms."     In  one  volume,  Svo $1.50 

Tables   Showing  the  Weight  of  Round,  Square,  and 
Flat  Bar  Iron,  Steel,  etc.. 

By  Measurement.     Cloth. 63 

TAYLOR.— Statistics  of  Coal : 

Including  Mineral  Bituminous  Substances  employed  in  Arts  and 
Mauufaclures ;  with  their  Geographical,  Geological,  and  Commercial 
Distribution  and  Amount  of  Production  and  Consumption  on  the 
American  Continent.  With  Incidental  Statistics  of  the  Iron  Manu- 
facture. By  R.  C.  Taylor.  Second  edition,  revised  by  S.  S.  Hal- 
DEMAN.  Illustrated  by  five  Maps  and  many  wood  engravings.  8vo., 
cloth $10.00 

TEMPLETON.— The  Practical  Examinator  on  Steam 
and  the  Steam-Engine : 

With  Instructive  References  relative  thereto,  arranged  for  the  Use  of 
Engineers,  Students,  and  others.  By  AVm.  Templeton,  Engineer. 
12mo $1.25 

THOMAS.— The  Modern  Practice  of  Photography. 

By  R.  W.  Thomas,  F.C.S.    Svo.,  cloth 75 

THOMSON.— Freight  Charges  Calculator. 

By  Andrew  Thomson,  Freight  Agent.    24mo.     .        .        .        $1.25 

TURNING:   Specimens  of  Fancy  Turning  Executed 
on  the  Hand  or  Foot  Lathe: 

With  Geometric,  Oval,  and  Eccentric  Chucks,  and  Elliptical  Cutting 
Frame.  By  an  Amateur.  Illustrated  by  30  exquisite  Photographs. 
4to $3.00 


ITENRY  CAREY  BAIRD'S  CATALOGUE.  21 

Turner's  (The)  Companion: 

Contiiiiiing  Instructions  in  Concentric,  Elliptic,  iind  Eccentric  Turn- 
ing: also  various  Plates  of  Chucks,  Tools,  and  Instruments  ;  and  Di- 
rections for  using  the  Eccentric  Cutter,  Drill,  Vertical  Cutter,  and 
Circular  Rest ;  with  Patterns  and  Instructions  I'or  working  them.  A 
new  edition  in  one  volume,  12mo.  $1.50 

URBIN.— BRULL.— A  Practical   Guide  for  Puddling 
Iron  and  Steel. 

By  Ed.  Ukbin,  Engineer  of  Arts  and  Manufactures.  A  Prize  Essay 
read  before  the  Association  of  Engineers,  Graduate  of  the  School  of 
Mines,  of  Liege,  Belgium,  at  the  Meeting  of  1865-0.     To  which  is  added 

A  COMPARISOX  OF  TJIE  RESISTING  PROPF.RTIES  OF  IRON  AND  STEEL. 

By  A.  Brull.  Translated  from  the  French  by  A.  A.  Fesquet,  Che- 
mist and  Engineer.    In  one  volume,  8vo $1.00 

VAILE. — Galvanized  Iron  Cornice-Worker's  Manual; 

(.'ontuining  Instructions  in  Laying  out  the  Different  jNIitres,  and  fla- 
king Patterns  for  all  kinds  of  Plain  and  Circular  Work.  Also,  Tables 
of  Weights,  Areas  and  Circumferences  of  Circles,  and  other  Mattel 
calculated  to  Benefit  the  Trade.  By  Charles  A.  Vaile,  Superin- 
tendent "  Richmond  Cornice  Works,"  Richmond,  Indiana.  Illustra- 
ted by  21  Plates.     In  one  volume,  4to S^5.00 

VILLE.— The  School  of  Chemical  Manures : 

Or,  Elementary  Principles  in  the  Use  of  Fertilizing  Agents.  From  the 
French  of  M.  George  Ville,  by  A.  A.  Fesquet,  Chemist  and  Engi- 
neer.    With  Illustrations.     In  one  volume,  12  mo.         .         .         $1.25 

VOGDES.— The  Architect's  and  Builder's  Pocket  Com- 
panion and  Price  Book : 

Consisting  of  a  Short  but  Comprehensive  Epitome  of  Decimals,  Duo- 
decimals, Geometry  and  Mensuration;  with  Tables  of  U.  S.  Measures, 
Sizes,  Weights,  Strengths,  etc.,  of  Iron,  Wood,  Stone,  and  various 
other  Materials,  (Quantities  of  Materials  in  Given  Sizes,  and  Dimen- 
sions of  Wood,  Brick,  and  Stone ;  and  a  full  and  complete  Bill  of 
Prices  for  Carpenter's  Work  ;  also.  Rules  lor  Computing  and  Valuing 
Brick  and  Brick  Work,  Stone  Work,  Painting,  Plastering,  etc.  By 
Frank  W.  Vogdes,  Architect.  Illustrated.  Full  bound  in  pocket- 
book  form $2.00 

Bound  in  cloth.  . 1-50 

WARN,— The  Sheet-Metal  Worker's  Instructor: 

For  Zinc,  Sheet-Iron,  Copper,  and  Tin-Plate  Workers,  etc.  Contain- 
ing a  selection  of  Geometrical  Problems;  also.  Practical  and  Sini])le 
Rules  for  describing  the  various  Patterns  required  in  the  ditt'erent 
branches  of  the  above  Trades.  By  Reuben  II.  Warn,  Practical  Tin- 
plate  Worker.  To  which  is  added  an  Appendix,  containing  Iiistrnc- 
tions  for  Boiler  ^Making,  Jlensuration  of  Surfaces  and  Soliils,  Rules  for 
Calculating  the  AVeis^lits  of  different  Figures  of  Iron  and  Steel,  Tables 
of  the  Weights  of  Iron,  Steel,  etc.  Illustrated  by  32  Plates  and  .37 
Wood  Engravings,     ^vo. $3.00 


22  HENRY  CAREY  BAIRD'S   CATALOGUE. 

WARNER. — New  Theorems,  Tables,  and  Diagrams 
for  the  Computation  of  Earth- Work : 

Designed  for  the  use  of  Engineers  in  Preliminary  and  Final  Estimates, 
of  Students  in  Engineering,  and  of  Contractors  and  other  non-profes- 
sional Computers.  In  Two  Parts,  with  an  Appendix.  Part  1. — A 
Practical  Treatise  ;  Part  II.— A  Theoretical  Treatise;  and  the  A])pen- 
dix.  Containing  Notes  to  the  Rules  and  Examijles  of  Part  I. ;  Expla- 
nations of  the  Construction  of  Scales,  Tables,  and  Diagrams,  and  a 
Treatise  upon  Equivalent  Square  Bases  and  Equivalent  Level  Heights. 
The  whole  illustrated  by  numerous  original  Engravings,  comj)rising 
Explanatory  Cuts  for  Definitions  and  Problems,  Stereometric  Scales 
and  Diagrams,  and  a  Series  of  Lithographic  Drawings  from  Models, 
showing  all  the  Combinations  of  Solid  Forms  which  occur  in  Railroad 
Excavations  and  Embankmerts.  By  John  Wabnek,  A.  M.,  Mining 
and  Mechanical  Engineer.     8vo $5.00 

WATSON.— A  Manual  of  the  Hand-Lathe: 

Comprising  Concise  Directions  for  working  Metals  of  all  kinds,  Ivory, 
Bone  and  Precious  Woods ;  Dyeing,  Coloring,  and  French  Polishing ; 
Inlaying  by  Veneers,  and  various  methods  practised  to  produce  Elabo- 
rate work  with  Dispatch,  and  at  Small  Exijense.  By  Egbert  P. 
Watson,  late  of  "  The  Scientific  American,"  Author  of  "  The  Modern 
Practice  of  American  Machinists  and  Engineers."  Illustrated  by  78 
Engravings $1.50 

WATSON.— The  Modern  Practice  of  American  Ma- 
chinists and  Engineers: 

Including  the  Construction,  Application,  and  Use  of  Drills,  Lathe 
Tools,  Cutters  for  Boring  Cylinders,  and  Hollow  Work  Generally, 
with  the  most  Economical  Speed  for  the  same  ;  the  Results  verified  by 
Actual  Practice  at  the  Lathe,  the  Vice,  and  on  the  Floor.  Together 
with  Worlvshop  Management,  Economy  of  Manufacture,  the  Steam- 
Engine,  Boilers,  Gears,  Belting,  etc.,  etc.  By  Egbeiit  P.  Watson, 
late  of  the  "  Scientific  American."  Illustrated  by  8(3  Engravings.  In 
one  volume,  V2mo $2.50 

WATSON.— The  Theory  and  Practice  of  the  Art  of 
Weaving  by  Hand  and  Power: 

With  Calculations  and  Tal)les  for  the  use  of  those  connected  with  the 
Trade.  By  JoiiN  Watson,  Manufacturer  and  Practical  Machine 
Maker,  illustrated  by  large  Drawings  of  the  best  Power  Looms. 
8vo ' ."jilO.OO 

WEATHERLY.— Treatise  on  the  Art  of  Boiling  Su- 
gar, Crystallizing,  Lozenge-making,  Comfits,  Gum 
Goods. 

V2mo $2.00 

WEDDING.— The  Metallurgy  of  Iron; 
Theoretically  and  Practically  Considered.  By  Dr.  Hermann  Wed- 
ding, Professor  of  the  Metallurgy  of  Iron  at  the  Royal  Mining 
Academy,  Berlin.  Translated  by^iJiiLlus  Du  MoNT,  Bethlehem,  Pa. 
Illustrated  by  207  Engravings  on  Wood,  and  three  Plates.  In  one 
volume,  bvo.     {In  press.) 


HENRY  CAREY  BAIRD'S  CATALOGUE.  23 


WILL.— Tables  for  Qualitative  Chemical  Analysis. 

By  Professor  IIeinricii  Will,  of  Giessuii,  Germany.  Seventh  edi- 
tion. Translated  by  CHARLES  F.  Himes,  Ph.  D.,  Professor  of  Natu- 
ral Science,  Dickinson  College,  Carlisle,  Pa.         .        .        .  !pl.50 

WILLIAMS.— On  Heat  and  Steam  : 

Embracing  New  Views  of  Vaporization,  Condensation,  and  Explosions. 
By  Charles  Wye  Williams,  A.  I.  C.  E.    Illustrated.    8vo.      $3.50 

WOHLER.— A  Hand-Book  of  Mineral  Analysis. 

By  F.  W\iHLER,  Professor  of  Chemistry  in  tlie  University  of  Giittin- 
gen.  Edited  by  Henry  B.  Nason,  Professor  of  Chemistry  in  the 
Rensselaer  Polytechnic  Institute,  Troy,  New  York.  Illustrated.  In 
one  volume,  12mo .        $3  00 

WORSSAM.— On  Mechanical  Saws: 

From  the  Transactions  of  the  Society  of  Engineers,  1869.  By  S.  W. 
WORSSAM,  Jr.     Illustrated  by  18  large  plates^     8vo.      .        .        $:i.</5 


P?'  S^0  2P-7 


*.<> 


GETTY  CENTER  LIBRARY 


3  3125  00060  4344 


"Ill  •WL.» 

■  iMiiiiiiiJI^iUiij  miiivi, 
i,,!i/h|i5i«i{  1'- 
!!i.l!IJ!)!.!lMi.  <j 

lljl 


